THE  UNIVERSITY 


OF  ILLINOIS 
LIBRARY 


796 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 
in  2016 


https://archive.org/details/losttentribesOOwild 


THE 


LOST  TEN  TRIBES: 

AND 

18  8 2. 


BY 

REV.  JOSEPH  -WILD,  D.  D., 

PAST  OR  OF  UNION  CONGREGATIONAL  CHURCH, 

BRO  OKLYN,  N.  Y. 


NEW  YORK: 

JAMES  HUGGINS,  PRINTER  AND  PUBLISHER, 
No.  372  Pearl  Street. 


1 879. 


Entered  according  to  Act  of  Congress  in  the  year  18T9, 

By  REV.  JOSEPH  WILD,  D.  IX, 

In  the  office  of  the  Librarian  of  Congress,  at  Washington,  I).  C. 


PREFACE. 


The  following  Discourses  are  presented  to  the 
public  in  book  form,  agreeable  to  the  request  of 
numerous  friends.  I have  selected  twenty  from 
one  hundred  and  thirty,  which  I have  given  to 
my  own  congregation,  during  the  past  three 
years.  I have  tried  to  have  them  lean  one  against 
another,  to  the  end  that  the  argument  might  be 
continuous  and  somewhat  complete.  The  reader 
will  remember,  however,  that  the  vast  subject  of 
which  they  treat,  cannot  be  fairly  and  com- 
pletely presented  in  such  a volume  as  this. 
Also,  it  should  be  borne  in  mind  that  the  lan- 
guage, style  and  structure,  are  sermonic.  Pulpit 
literature,  in  these  things,  is  peculiar  and  dis- 
tinctively characteristic. 

When  I first  entered  the  ministry,  I made  up 
my  mind  that  I would  try  and  thoroughly  un- 


672390 


PREFACE. 


derstand  the  Scriptures.  I soon  found  that  a 
large  portion  was  of  a prophetic  nature.  I set 
to  work  according  to  the  usual  method,  but  to 
my  sorrow,  I soon  discovered  that  the  method 
and  rules  in  general  use  for  scripture  exegesis, 
among  what  they  called  orthodox  authors,  were 
very  defective  and  unsatisfactory.  The  fact  was 
forced  upon  me  that  the  true  method,  or  key  of 
interpretation,  was  not  in  use.  I was  always 
persuaded  that  the  Bible  was  a unit,  and  that 
the  principles  contained  in  such  a unit  were 
beautifully  related  ; and  because  of  such  a faith, 
I wondered  more  and  more  as  I grew  older,  why 
we  had  not  a better  key  of  interpretation.  Men 
spiritualized  at  random,  without  any  kind  of  a 
rule,  except  their  own  fancy  In  this  manner 
they  expounded  the  material  history  of  the  Old 
Testament.  The  whole  arrangement  wras  a Babel. 

I had  faintly  discerned  that  the  Scriptures 
made  a distinction  between  the  house  of  Israel 
and  the  house  of  Judah,  and  that  the  prophecies 
belonging  to  one  could  not,  in  fairness,  be  ap- 
plied to  the  other ; and  that  some  prophecies 
applied  to  both.  It  always  seemed  strange  to 
me,  that  the  people  which  God  said  he  had 
chosen  for  Himself,  should  not  be  known.  The 
Jews  were  always  known,  but  where  was  “Is- 
rael, His  inheritance  % ” Again,  I could  see  no 
point  in  the  Lord  swearing  so  positively  about 
David’s  seed  and  throne  lasting  to  the  end  of 
time.  Taking  them  in  a typical  sense,  they  were 


■PREFACE. 


about  the  poorest  types  that  could  have  been 
selected,  because  of  the  shortness  of  their  ex- 
istence, according  to  the  general  mode  of  inter- 
pretation. Just  at  this  point  of  my  experience 
I came  across  a book  entitled  “Our  Israelitisli 
Origin,”  by  the  late  John  Wilson,  the  reading 
of  which  confirmed  me  in  my  convictions,  and 
aided  me  to  a better  knowledge  of  the  good 
Book  and  Providence. 

After  some  twenty  years  of  experience,  I be- 
gan to  teach  the  principles  of  interpretation  ^ 
embodied  in  these  Discourses.  Some  three  years 
ago,  I began  to  give  a series  of  sermons,  on  the 
Ten  Lost  Tribes.  I soon  found  my  own  con- 
gregation, as  well  as  the  public,  were  interested 
and  profited  with  the  same,  as  was  manifest  from 
the  large  and  constant  attendance  thereon.  By 
personal  interviews  and  letters,  I have  been 
gratified  to  learn  that  many  have  been  savingly 
and  truly  converted  to  God  through  these  Dis- 
courses. Especially  has  this  been  the  case  with 
those  who  were  infidel  in  faith  and  action 
towards  God  and  His  word.  I have  received 
hundreds  of  letters  thanking  me,  that  the  key  of 
interpretation  presented,  had  made  the  Bible  an 
interesting  and  easily  understood  book.  The 
interest  created  gave  rise  to  numerous  requests 
for  copies  of  my  sermons.  The  notice  by  the 
public  press  now  and  again,  intensified  the  in- 
terest and  increased  the  demand.  To  meet  this 
desire,  I made  arrangements  with  the  editor  and 


PREFACE . 


proprietor  of  a weekly  paper,  called  the  Cham- 
pion, to  publish  my  evening  Discourses.  At 
once  the  arrangement  was  found  to  be  profitable 
to  him,  agreeable  to  me,  and  admirably  suited 
to  the  public.  So  for  more  than  a year  the 
Champion  has  been  my  faithful  messenger  on 
this  line,  and  will  continue  to  be.  It  is  a weekly 
paper,  published  at  132  Nassau  Street,  New 
York  ; price  one  dollar  per  year.  I am  not 
personally  interested  more  than  this.  With  its 
politics  and  other  matter  I have  nothing  to  do  ; 
but  for  the  sermonic  matter  I hold  myself  respon- 
sible. I feel  free  to  express  my  pleasure  in  the 
wonderful  increase  of  its  circulation.  I am  glad 
it  goes  all  over  the  States,  the  Dominion  of  Can- 
ada, and  is  in  goodly  demand  in  Great  Britain. 

After  I had  been  preaching  on  this  subject  for 
some  time,  I made,  fortunately,  the  acquaint- 
ance of  a name- sake  of  mine,  Mr.  Joseph 
Wild,  of  Bay  Ridge,  near  Brooklyn.  On  this 
subject  I found  him  remarkably  well  posted. 
He  had  lots  of  books,  pamphlets,  papers  and 
maps  on  the  matter,  any  or  all  of  which  he  gave 
me  liberty  to  use.  Through  him  my  attention 
was  called  to  the  valuable  writings  of  our  Eng- 
lish brethren  on  this  point,  Edward  Hine,  Rev. 
Mr.  Glover,  M.  A.,  Rev.  Mr.  Grimaldi,  M.  A., 
Philo-Israel  and  a host  of  others,  whose  writings 
have  helped  me  very  much.  Our  English  friends 
have  now  a vast  store  of  this  kind  of  literature  ; 
while,  so  far  as  I know,  we  have  no  home  pro- 


PREFACE. 


duction.  This  is  one  reason  I feel  satisfied  in 
sending  forth  this  volume. 

For  years  I have  been  greatly  interested  in 
pyramidology,  in  the  teachings  of  the  Great 
Pyramid,  at  Gizeh,  in  Egypt.  Twenty  years 
ago  I had  confidence  to  lecture  frequently  on 
the  subject,  and  a few  years  since  it  was  in  my 
mind  to  publish  a small  work  on  it.  The  necess- 
ity of  such  a work  was  wisely  and  competently 
taken  out  of  my  hands,  however,  by  the  ap- 
pearance of  a book  entitled  “The  Stone  Miracle,” 
by  Rev.  Dr.  Seiss,  of  Philadelphia.  This  is  a 
book  admirably  suited  to  beginners  on  this  line 
of  study.  And  if  one  wants  to  go  further  and 
be  specially  informed  on  pyramidology,  why  let 
them  get  “ Our  Inheritance  in  the  Great  Pyra- 
mid,” a work  by  Prof.  Piazzi  Smyth,  Astronomer- 
Royal  of  Scotland.  To  this  man  God  has  given 
a fine  mind  and  a large  heart,  for  a special  place 
and  work.  But  what  pleases  me  above  all,  is  that 
this  pyramid,  being  the  Lord' s pillar,  and  His 
witness , should  so  finely  tally  with  the  scriptures 
and  Providence ; that  the  teachings  of  this 
monument  are  in  harmony  with  the  principles 
of  interpretation,  as  applied  to  the  prophecies  in 
these  Discourses.  I wish  the  reader  to  study 
and  become  familiar  with  the  plate  of  the 
pyramid. 

By  several  small  engravings,  I have  sought  to 
aid  the  mind  of  the  reader  through  the  eye.  In 
the  royal  arms  of  England,  there  is  considerable 


PREFACE. 


of  history ; the  position  of  the  lions,  unicorn, 
crown,  and  indeed  all  connected  with  it,  is  sig- 
nificantly expressive.  In  these  things,  the  ac- 
cidental grouping,  so  far  as  man  was  concerned, 
were  as  much  under  divjne  supervision,  as  the 
blundering  of  the  Jews  in  the  crucifying  of 
Jesus.  So,  divinely  considered,  they  divinely 
reveal.  We  know  not  the  mind  of  our  fathers 
in  the  matter  of  selecting  and  composing  the 
items  that  make  up  the  great  seal,  but  we  know 
the  mind  of  Providence. 

The  plate  of  the  ragged  old  stone,  called 
Jacob’s  Pillow,  is  not  very  distinct,  but  it  is  the 
best  we  could  do.  As  it  is,  it  will  aid  the  reader 
in  forming  a better  idea.  The  stone  in  shape  is 
an  oblong  square,  about  32  inches  long,  13  broad, 
and  11  inches  deep.  At  each  end  is  an  iron  ring, 
much  worn  and  rusted.  It  is  a bluish  steel-like 
color,  mixed  with  some  veins  of  red.  It  has 
been  in  its  present  resting  place  583  years. 

The  main  idea  I wTish  to  convey  in  this  book, 
is  that  God  is  conducting  His  Providence 
through  His  ancient  chosen  people,  Israel,  whom 
I believe  are  found  in  the  Saxon  race.  And  His 
throne  on  earth,  through  which  flow  the  pur- 
poses of  Providence,  is  David’s  throne;  which  I 
believe  to  be  at  present  the  English  throne 
Queen  Victoria  (and  God  bless  her),  I believe  to 
be  of  David’s  seed.  The  United  States  fulfills 
the  role  of  the  tribe  of  Manasseh.  Therefore,  to 
understand  the  prophecies,  Providence,  and  the 


PREFACE. 


present  movements  of  nations,  as  well  as  the 
future  lot  and  destiny  of  each,  we  must  read  the 
Scriptures  in  this  light.  God  has  made  the 
children  of  Israel  and  throne  of  David  His  ex- 
ecutive, in  time,  on  earth.  They  are  His  execu- 
tive for  civilization,  evangelization,  order  and 
conquest.  Through  them  God  will  conquer  the 
world  to  a universal  peace.  As  Moses  was  to 
God,  so  is  Israel.  Moses  being  a divine  execu- 
tor, was  to  the  people  a god — so  is  Israel  to  all 
mankind.  Spiritual  Israel  will  come  through 
literal  Israel. 

I have  expressed  myself  freely — shall  cheer- 
fully grant  reviewers,  critics  and  readers,  the 
same  privilege.  I send  forth  this  book  with  a 
pure  desire  that  it  may  do  good.  Amen,  so 
mote  it  be. 

JOSEPH  WILD. 

Brooklyn,  May  1st,  1879. 


OBVERSi. 


REVERSE. 


a* 

A />  li. 


This  device  of  the  great  Seal  was  adopted  by  act  of  the  Continental  Con- 
gress, on  June  20th,  1T82,  and  re-adopted  by  the  new  Congress,  September 
15th,  1789.  The  act  provided  for  an  obverse  and  a reverse , as  set  forth  in 
this  plate  ; the  reverse  is  not  used.  This  is  a plate  of  the  first  and  original 
Seal,  which,  by  use,  has  been  worn  out.  The  one  now  in  use  is  the  second ; 
it  differs  from  the  first  that,  by  an  accident,  seven  arrows  were  left  out  of 
the  eagle’s  talon. 


f 


J Ct 


V 


LC 


CONTENTS 


PAGE. 

Preface 

The  Great  Seal 

Diagram  of  Pyramid 

Explanation  of  Diagram  12 


DISCOURSE,  1. 

KE  Y DIS  TINCTIONS  .... 14 


DISCOURSE,  2. 

ISRAEL  AND  THE  GATES. 

Israel — How  the  gates  of  His  enemies  are  to  be  given  Him — 

By  this  sign  lost  Israel  may  be  known — The  giving  will 
correspond  to  the  multiplying— The  promise,  in  this  day, 
is  rapidly  fulfilling  — England,  Disraeli,  Tancred  and 
Russia 25 


DISCOURSE,  3. 

ISRAEL  AND  TERRITORY. 

Promises  to  Israel — Material  nature — Location  of  the  tribes 
in  Christ’s  day— God’s  Providence — British  and  American 
rule — “Life  from  the  dead” — Teaching  the  Nations 
peaceful  arbitration — England  and  Russia — Afghanistan 
falls  to  Anglo-Israel — God’s  political  geography— Anglo- 
Saxon  evangelization—  Russia  opposing  it — British  and 
Russian  outposts  in  contact — Wail  of  Judah — Earth’s 
girdle  41 


viii. 


CONTENTS. 


DISCOURSE,  4. 

ISRAEL  AND  POPULATION 
Prophetic  latter  days — Our  bearings  in  the  ages — Unwise  im- 
patience— Israel  to  be  always  a nation  —Her  Empire — 
Historic  career  of  and  future  of  England,  America  and 
Judah — Relative  increase  of  population  — The  Infidel 
Saxon — Jewish,  British  and  American  interests  one — A 
full  end  of  all  nations  but  Israel — Famine  henceforth  only 
for  the  Heathen— Arbitration  to  be  enforced  by  Israel — 
American  absorption — Startling  figures  of  future  popula- 
tion— The  balance  of  power 56 


DISCOURSE,  5. 

ISRAEL  AND  LANGUAGE. 

Latter  day  prophetic  promises — Time  of  Israel's  revival — 
Pyramid  testimony — British  Island  population  in  1882 — 
Affinity  between  the  English  and  Hebrew—Cell  of  the 
honey  bee  — Origin  of  language — Lion  of  languages — 
Foreign  testimony— All  tongues  indigenous  but  English 
— The  pre-millennial  tokens 71 


DISCOURSE,  6. 

ISRAEL  AND  GENTILE  FULLNESS. 

Meaning  of  the  Gentile  fullness — Blessings  through  Judah 
and  Ephraim — Best  religion — Jews  outwitted — Why  Ben- 
jamin was  kept  at  Jerusalem — French  Protestantism  — 
Gentile  fullness  contemporary  with  to-day  — Turkey 
exceptional 85 


DISCOURSE,  7. 

DREAM  IMAGE  OF  NEBUCHADNEZZAR. 

Future  history  of  the  world— The  destruction  of  the  Papacy 
commenced — Ireland  to  be  free  and  independent  of  Eng- 
land and  Rome — Future  glory  of  Britain  and  the  United 
States 100 


CONTENTS. 


IX. 


DISCOURSE,  8. 

LITTLE  HORN  AND  TURKEY . 

The  Turks  the  Ishmaelites — England  and  Russia  to  partition 
the  Mohammedan  Empire — Why  England  sympathizes 
with  Turkey 112 


DISCOURSE,  9. 

LITTLE  HORN  AND  ANTI-CHRIST. 

Prophetic  wonders— Twenty  marks  of  the  monster — The  Ber- 
lin Congress — Anti-Christs  many — Mistakes  by  Writers.  .124 


DISCOURSE,  10. 

ANTI-CHRIST  AND  LITTLE  HORN . 

Second  Discourse  on  the  monster — Who  he  will  be  and  his 
name  — How  he  will  obtain  power — Trouble  for  Germany, 
France  and  Russia — Communism — Romanism —Shakers 
— Matthias,  Westchester  prophet 136 


DISCOURSE,  11. 

THE  TWO  WITNESSES. 

Troublous  times — Appearance  of  the  witnesses — Who  they  are 
— How  they  can  be  identified — Their  mission  work  and 
suffering — The  time  and  circumstances  of  Christ’s  coming.  148 


DISCOURSE,  12. 

MOSES  AND  ELIJAH. 

More  about  the  two  witnesses — Mormonism  — God  ruling 
among  the  nations — Career  of  the  two  witnesses  -Anti- 
Christ — The  throne  and  house  of  David 159 


X. 


CONTENTS 


DISCOURSE,  13. 

BATTLE  OF  ARMAGEDDON. 

The  combatants  on  both  sides — Who  “The  Kings  of  the 
East”  are — The  great  Napoleonic  idea — Disraeli,  Lincoln 
and  Grant — England’s  policy  in  Turkey — Future  wars 
and  intrigues — The  great  battle  field — Gathering  of  the 
nations— Earthquakes — Jerusalem  as  a seaport 172 


DISCOURSE,  14. 

ARMAGEDDON  AND  THE  PYRAMID. 

The  forces  in  the  battle — Time  of  its  occurrence — Mistakes  of 
Adventists — A church  “strike  ” wanted — The  hard  times 
after  1882 — History  of  the  world  till  1935 — Hine’s  theory.  184 


DISCOURSE,  15. 

WONDERS  OF  THE  FUTURE. 

Purpose  of  the  flood  — The  Abrahamic  current  — Rending 
Mount  Olivet— Former  earthquakes  —Boundaries  of  Pales- 
tine Dan  and  Gad  to  guard  the  “gates”— Gad  the 
Scotchman — The  future  Jerusalem— The  Dead  Sea  and 
Mediterranean  to  be  joined — Mistake  of  Spiritualizing 
everything  197 


DISCOURSE,  16. 

NINE  TEEN  HUNDRED  AND  FIFTY-SE  FEN 

“Signs  of  the  times” — The  return  to  Jeiusalem — Forces  of 
Russia  and  England — Present  locality  of  ancient  nations 
— Origin  of  American  republicanism — Federation  of  the 
nations  coming — Evolution  and  Devolution  207 


CONTENTS 


xi. 


DISCOURSE,  17. 

THE  STONE  WITNESS. 

The  Great  Pyramid— Who  Job  was — Who  built  the  Pyramid 
— What  it  was  built  for — An  epitome  of  the  earth — The 
history  of  man  contained  in  it,  past  and  future— Science 
and  the  Bible,  etc.,  etc 220 


DISCOURSE,  18. 

SIGNS  AND  WONDERS. 

The  Stone  Prophet  in  the  wilderness— No  war  for  four  years 
— The  great  struggle  to  commence  in  1882  — Prussia 
ancient  Assyria— England,  Germany  and  Egypt,  to  be 
allies — The  future  history  of  the  world — The  Philistines 
the  Southern  Irish- -Who  their  great  ancestor  was,  etc. . . 233 


DISCOURSE,  19. 

THE  THRONE  OF  DAVID . 

England’s  prophecy  fulfilled  in  the  Berlin  Congress — The 
harp  of  Tara  the  harp  of  Israel — The  future  European 
alliances — Royal  succession  of  the  house  of  Israel 243 


DISCOURSE,  20. 

JEREMIAH  AND  ST.  PATRICK. 

The  prophet’s  commission — His  life  — The  tribes  in  his  day — 
Landing  of  Jeremiah  in  Ireland — What  he  brought  with 
him — Colonization  of  Ireland — Jeremiah  the  founder  of 
the  ancient  Irish  government  and  religion — Tea  Tephi 
and  Heremon — The  ancient  Irish  flag — The  harp  and  lion 
— Season  of  Ireland’s  historical  prestige — Causes  of  her 
decline  — St.  Patrick  a Benjaminite— How  Rome  de- 
stroyed Jeremiah’s  memory  among  the  Irish — Destruction 
of  Tara— Ulster  never  conquered — Irish  independence  — 

Ark  of  the  covenant — Ruins  of  Tara 263 


EXPLANATIONS  OF  THE  PYRAMID  PLATE. 


Fig.  I.  Shows  how  the  Pyramid  could  be  built  both  on  the  bor- 
der and  the  middle  of  Egypt.  Upper  and  lower  Egypt  are  in  the 
shape  of  a fan.  The  point  of  joining  is  called  the  Sector  point. 
At  that  point  it  stood.  The  river  Nile  empties  by  several  mouths 
into  the  Mediterranean. 

Fig.  2.  The  Boss,  i-ii  real  size.  It  is  a granite  stone  in  a 
leaf  shape,  expressing  the  true  measure  used  by  the  builders. 

Fig.  3.  A vertical  section  of  the  king’s  chamber,  with  ante- 
room and  passage  leading  from  the  grand  gallery  ; with  the 
several  chambers  over  the  king’s  chamber. 

C.  Points  out  Porphyry  Coffer,  which  is  simply  a trough  or 
lidless  box,  cut  out  of  a piece  of  porphyry  stone.  It  is  about  7 feet 
6^  inches  long,  3 feet  and  3 inches  broad,  and  3 feet  5 inches  high. 
It  is,  so  far,  the  only  piece  of  furniture  found  in  the  whole  building. 
It  was  built  in,  for  it  is  too  large  to  pass  through  the  entrance.  It 
is,  no  doubt,  the  true  standard  of  weights  and  measures. 

The  Pyramid  inch  is  longer  than  the  English  inch  by  the 
breadth  of  a very  fine  hair.  The  Pyramid,  as  it  stood,  was  the 
circle  squared. 


PYRAMID,  AT  GIZEH,  EGYPT. 


H 

< 

W 

P4 

O 


PILLAR  AND  WITNESS  TO  THE  LORD. 


Explanations  of  the  Pyramid  Plate. 


The  vertical  section  shown  represents  the  Pyramid  cut  in  two, 
from  north  to  south.  The  reader  is  supposed  to  be  looking  west- 
ward. Twice  a year  the  sun  shines  on  the  Pyramid,  without  a 
shadow  on  any  part  of  it, — the  only  building  so  peculiarly  situated. 
The  falling  sun’s  rays  are  to  indicate  the  same. 

The  dotted  outside  lines  represent  the  Pyramid  when  com- 
plete. The  yellowish  white  marble  casing,  that  is,' covering  stones, 
have  been  taken  away.  The  square  above  the  chambers,  near  the 
top,  represents  a supposed  room,  which  will  typify  Heaven. 

A.  B.  Vertical  height  about  486^  feet. 

C.  The  entrance  passage,  978  inches  to  first  ascending  pas- 
sage, made  by  the  builders,  which,  when  the  building  was  com- 
plete, was  covered  up.  It  was  about  49  feet  from  the  ground,  and 
300  inches  east  of  the  north  centre. 

D.  Descending  passage,  continues  to  a well  chamber,  deep 
in  the  natural  rock. 

E.  First  ascending  passage,  1542  inches  long. 

F.  Natural  rock. 

g.  Grand  Gallery.  1881  inches  and  a fraction  long,  gen- 
erally called  1882  inches. 

G.  Horizontal  passage  leading  into  the  Queen’s  chamber. 

H.  A line  pointing  to  the  Pole  star,  Alpha  Draconius,  in  2170 
B.  C.  This  fixed  the  exact  place  of  entrance. 

I.  A passage  out  of  grand  gallery,  passing  through  the  grotto 
chamber  to  the  subterranean  well  chamber. 

K.  A1  Mamoun’s  entrance.  This  Arab  chief,  about  820  A. 
D.,  at  a great  cost  of  time  and  labor,  forces  a way  into  the  Pyra- 
mid, the  builder’s  way  not  being  then  known.  This  is  the  way 
people  enter  now. 

L.  Rubbish  made  by  A1  Mamoun’s  opening. 

M.  Rubbish  and  chips  of  the  ancient  builders. 

V.  Vents,  or  air  flues,  as  they  are  called. 


KEY  DISTINCTION'S. 


Discourse , 1 . 


Text— 2 Peter  i.  19-20* 

“ We  have  a more  sure  word  of  Prophecy ; w hereunto  ye  do  well 
that  ye  take  heed , as  unto  a light  that  shineth  in  a dark  place, 
until  the  day  dawn , and  the  day  star  arise  in  your  hearts. 
Knowing  this  first , that  710  prophecy  of  the  Scripture  is  of 
any  private  interpretation P 


5TL  AM  about  to  give  you  a few  Discourses  on 
Prophecy,  and  in  doing  so,  I desire  in  the 
first  place,  to  point  out  to  you  a few  very  im- 
portant distinctions  included  in  the  Prophecies. 
Suppose  the  Bible  to  be  a great  palace,  with  its 
royalty,  royal  children,  servants  and  subjects. 
You  desire  to  go  through  it  and  view  it  intelli- 
gently, and  to  understand  all  about  its  inhabit- 
ants and  laws  of  government;  now  to  do  so  you 
must  have  keys,  and  you  must  learn  who  is 
who,  their  place,  authority  and  work.  If  not  so 
qualified  you  could  not  pass  from  room  to  room, 
and  you  might  confound  the  King  with  some 


KEY  DISTINCTIONS. 


15 


servant,  and  visitors  might  be  mistaken  for  the 
children  of  the  household.  Thus  your  ideas 
would  be  considerably  mixed  ; you  would  be 
guilty  of  talking  about  the  King,  when  you 
really  meant  some  servant,  and  of  prophesying 
for  the  royal  children  in  the  name  of  the  visitors. 
The  years  would  come  and  go,  but  events  would 
not  happen  as  you  had  prophecied.  Each  gen- 
eration would  take  your  report  and  follow  in 
your  footsteps,  thus  confusion  and  disappoint- 
ment would  keep  pace  with'  the  passing  gen- 
erations. 

What  is  here  made  a matter  of  supposition, 
has  been  a solemn  fact  on  the  line  of  human 
experience.  Men  have  studied  the  Bible  and 
Providence  in  this  ignorant  and  confused  way. 
Theologians  have  thrown  aside  all  restraints,  and 
well  defined  limitations  and  distinctions  of  the 
bible  in  their  assumed  liberty  of  expounding 
and  spiritualizing  the  same.  No  matter  to  them 
that  there  is  a God-revealed  distinction  between 
Judah  and  Israel,  Manasseh  and  Ephraim,  Sa- 
maritans and  Gentiles,  and  the  throne  of  David 
and  the  throne  of  the  Heathen.  Writers  and 
speakers  are  guilty  of  using  the  words  Judah 
and  Israel  in  a synonymous  sense,  though  the 
words  stand  for  different  people,  history  and 
prophecies,  soon  after  the  descendants  of  Jacob 
settled  Palestine.  To  aid  you  in  seeing  this 
historical  confusion  and  folly,  let  me  call  your 
attention  to  them  separately. 


16 


KEY  DISTINCTIONS. 


JUDAH. 

What  does  this  word  stand  for  in  the  bible  ? 
In  the  first  place  it  is  the  name  of  the  fourth  son 
of  Jacob.  In  the  second  place  it  was  the  name 
of  his  direct  descendants  or  tribe.  In  the  third 
place  it  became  the  name  of  the  portion  of  the 
country  occupied  by  this  tribe  in  the  Promised 
Land.  In  the  fourth  place  it  became  the  name 
of  a kingdom  and  government ; this  fourth  name 
included  the  tribe  of  Benjamin  and  their  terri- 
tory. In  the  fifth  place  it  became  the  name  of 
the  whole  country  of  Palestine,  and  is  now  often 
so  used.  To-day  this  word  stands  for  those  we 
call  Jews,  who,  as  they  allow  among  themselves, 
represent  and  only  include  Judah  and  Levi. 

On  the  death  of  Solomon  the  country  and 
tribe%finally  separated  into  two  houses,  king- 
doms and  governments.  Nine  tribes  went  with 
Jeroboam,  and  three  with  Rehoboam,  namely, 
Judah,  Levi  and  Benjamin.  The  nine  tribed 
house  was  called  Israel,  the  three  tribed  house 
Judah.  This  separation  was  about  975  B.  C. — 
I Kings,  12.  From  that  day  to  this  these  two 
houses  have  never  been  united;  but  they  are  to 
be,  as  scores  of  statements  to  that  effect  are  in 
the  good  book. — Hosea  1.  11.  About  5S0  B.  C. 
the  house  of  Judah  was  taken  captive  into  Bab- 
ylon, remaining  70  years,  then  they  returned  to 
their  own  land  and  remained  till  the  year  of  our 
Lord  70,  when  Jerusalem  was  destroyed  and 
they  were  scattered. 


KEY  DISTINCTIONS. 


17 


Prophecies  referring  to  the  Jews  are  numerous 
and  in  striking  contrast  to  those  that  refer  to 
Israel.  1.  The  Jews  were  to  be  a scattered 
people.  2.  A specially  persecuted  people.  3. 
to  be  without  a nationality.  4.  To  be  without 
government.  5.  Not  to  be  owners  of  landed 
property,  though  they  will  have  money,  until 
toward  the  latter  days.  6.  They  were  to  be  a 
proverb.  7.  They  were  to  be  few  in  number. 

8.  They  are  to  retain  a special  type  of  features. 

9.  They  were  to  be  repeatedly  robbed.  10.  They 
were  to  reject  Christ.  11,  To  retain  the  Mosaic 
service  till  returned  to  their  own  land.  12.  They 
are  to  keep  their  name,  and  many  such  distinc- 
tions, none  of  which  should  be  applied  to  Israel. 
All  these  things  have  been  and  are  fulfilled,  or 
fulfilling,  and  though  men  are  wonderfully  given 
to  spiritualizing,  few,  if  any,  venture  to  spiritu- 
alize Judah’s  curses.  Men  and  ministers  calling 
themselves  Gentiles,  are  rude  enough  to  spirit- 
ualize the  blessings  of  Judah,  and  stealing  them, 
apply  them  to  themselves. 

ISRAEL. 

1.  A name  given  to  Jacob  after  wrestling  with 
the  angel.  2.  A term  applied  sometimes  to  all 
the  descendants  of  Jacob.  3.  In  a spiritual 
sense,  those  who  believe  in  Christ.  4.  A name 
that  covered  and  included  the  nine  tribes  which 
went  with  Jeroboam  and  formed  the  kingdom 
of  Israel.  They  remained  a distinct  kingdom, 


18 


KEY  DISTIKCTIOltS. 


and  till  now  a nationality.  From  975  to  725  B. 
C. , they  had  some  19  kings.  They  were  finally 
carried  captive  into  Assyria  by  Shalmaneser. — 
II  Kings,  17.  From  that  captivity  they  have 
never  returned  ; as  a body  they  never  can,  only 
representatives,  as  stated  Jer  3.  14,  “ One  of  a 
city,  and  two  of  a family.” 

Now  prophecy  points  out  that  it  was  Israel 
that  was  to  be  lost  for  a while,  and  come  to  light 
in  the  latter  day.  They  are  known  in  the  Scrip- 
tures in  contradistinction  from  others  by 
such  terms  as  the  following:  “ All  Israel ,” 

‘ ‘ All  the  House  of  Israel  wholly , ” “ The  House 
of  Israel , ’ ’ ‘ ‘Men  of  Israel,  ’ ’ and  God  calls  them 
His  “ Servants,  Witnesses , Chosen  People,  In- 
heritance and  Seed.”  The  lot,  course  and  Prov- 
idential portion  of  this  people  are  very  marked 
from  any  other,  especially  from  the  Jew,  with 
whom  they  are  so  often  confounded.  The  his- 
tory of  the  two  people  have  been  wide  apart  and 
as  different  as  they  well  could  be, 

1.  They  were  to  be  lost.  2.  They  were  to  be 
divorced  from  the  Mosaic  law.  3.  They  were  to 
lose  their  name.  4.  They  were  to  lose  their 
language.  5.  They  were  to  possess  the  isles  of 
the  sea,  coasts  of  the  earth,  waste  and  desolate 
places,  to  inherit  the  portion  of  the  Gentiles, 
their  seed,  land  and  cities.  6.  They  are  to  be 
great  and  successful  colonizers.  7.  Before  them 
other  people  are  to  die  out.  8.  They  are  to  be 
a head  nation.  9.  To  be  a company  of  nations. 


KEY  DISTINCTIONS.  19 

10.  To  be  great  in  war  on  land  or  sea.  11.  To 
be  lenders  of  money.  12.  To  have  a monarchy . 
13.  To  be  keepers  of  the  Sabbath.  14.  To  have 
David’ s throne  and  seed  ruling  over  them . 15. 

They  are  to  possess  Palestine,  and  invite  their 
brethren  of  Judah  to  return.  And  thus  I might 
repeat  some  sixty  positive  marks  and  distinc- 
tions setting  forth  Israel ; and  yet  men  wilfully 
persist  in  confounding  them  with  the  Jews,  or 
looking  for  this  great  and  favored  people  of  the 
Lord  among  the  lowest  of  human  kind,  Indians, 
Africans,  and  so  on. 

SAMARITANS. 

The  Samaritans  were  not  Jews  or  Israelites, 
strictly  speaking.  They  of  course  became  Jew- 
ish in  their  customs  and  worship.  Originally 
they  were  Assyrians.  When  the  nine  tribes 
were  carried  captive  they  were  brought  and  put 
in  their  place.  “And  the  King  of  Assyria 
brought  men  from  Babylon,  and  from  Cuthah, 
and  from  Ava,  and  from  Hamah,  and  from  Sep- 
harvaim,  and  placed  them  in  the  cities  of 
Samaria,  instead  of  the  children  of  Israel.” — II 
Kings,  17,  24.  The  Jews  and  the  Samaritans 
never  wholly  mixed  ; one  was  always  distaste- 
ful to  the  other.  They  never  were  taken  cap- 
tive, and  to  this  day  they  live  in  and  about 
Mount  Scychar,  numbering  between  three  and 
four  hundreds. 


20 


KEY  DISTINCTIONS. 


BENJAMIN. 

The  tribe  of  Benjamin  has  a singular  and 
special  place  in  the  history  of  Israel  and  Judah. 
Neither  the  Old  or  New  Testament  can  be  well 
understood  unless  one  understands  the  place  of 
this  tribe  in  Providence.  They  were  always 
counted  one  of  the  ten  tribes,  and  reckoned  wit  h 
them  in  the  prophetic  visions.  They  were  only 
loaned  to  Judah  about  800  years.  Read  I 
Kings,  11.  They  were  to  be  a light  for  David  in 
Jerusalem.  God,  foreseeing  that  the  Jews  would 
reject  Christ,  kept  back  this  one  tribe  to  be  in 
readiness  to  receive  Him,  and  so  they  did.  At 
the  destruction  of  Jerusalem  they  escaped,  and 
after  centuries  of  wanderings  turn  up  as  the 
proud  and  haughty  Normans.  Finally  they 
unite  with  the  other  tribes  under  William  the 
Conquerer.  A proper  insight  into  the  work  and 
mission  of  Benjamin  will  greatly  aid  one  in  in- 
terpreting the  New  Testament.  He  was  set 
apart  as  a missionary  tribe,  and  at  once  set  to 
work  to  spread  the  Gospel  of  Jesus.  Most  of 
the  disciples  were  Benjaminites.  Then,  after  800 
years  of  fellowship  with  Judah,  they  were  cut 
loose  and  sent  after  their  brethren  of  the  house 
of  Israel.  It  was  needful  that  the  Lion  and  the 
Unicorn  should  unite. 

MANASSEH  AND  EPHRAIM. 

The  history  of  these  two  representative  char- 
acters is  worth  your  careful  study.  The  whole 
of  the  circumstances  of  Jacob  blessing  them 


KEY  DISTINCTIONS. 


21 


must  be  accepted  as  Divinely  directed.  Man- 
asseli  was  to  be  a great  people,  and  so  I believe 
he  is.  In  the  United  States  I find  this  promise 
literally  fulfilled.  This  is  the  Key  to  the  settle- 
ment of  this  land  ; to  the  agitations  of  the  Pil- 
grims and  Puritans  in  England.  The  mission, 
work  and  place  of  the  United  States,  may  be 
found  in  the  prophecies  relating  to  this  tribe. 
Let  any  one  examine  the  great  seal  of  the 
United  States,  and  study  its  design,  and  surprise 
will  fill  the  mind  that  facts,  Providence  and  pro- 
phecies, do  so  wonderfully  agree.  Take  the 
obverse  side  : Here  you  have  an  eagle  with  out- 
stretched wings  ; the  bird  is  perfect,  not  double 
head  and  deformed,  as  in  other  cases  where  the 
eagle  has  been  or  is  the  National  bird.  The 
striped  escutcheon  on  its  breast,  in  its  beak  a 
scroll,  inscribed  with  a motto  “ E pluribus 
TJnum  /”  one  out  of  many,  as  Manasseh  was, 
and  as  the  country  is  building  up  a grand 
nationality  and  oneness  out  of  all  nations  nearly. 
Over  the  head  of  the  eagle  there  is  a glory , the 
parting  of  clouds  by  light ; in  the  opening  ap- 
pear 13  stars  forming  a constellation  argent,  on 
an  azure  field.  In  the  dexter  or  right  talon  is 
an  olive  branch,  a symbol  of  peace  ; in  the  sin- 
ster  or  left  talon,  is  a bundle  of  13  arrows.  But 
it  is  on  the  reverse  side  of  the  great  seal  that  we 
have  a wonder.  Here  we  have  an  unfinished 
pyramid : a portion  of  the  top  is  gone,  exactly 
the  same  as  the  great  pyramid  in  Egypt  is  at 


22 


KEY  DISTINCTIONS. 


this  day.  Anticipating  this  very  day — Is.  19. 
19  : “In  that  day  shall  there  be  an  altar  to  the 
Lord.  And  it  shall  be  for  a sign  and  for  a wit- 
ness unto  the  Lord  of  Hosts  in  the  land  of  Egypt.” 
Now  it  is  somewhat  singular  that  the  Congress 
of  1782  should  have  adopted  so  remarkable  a 
sign,  one  that  would  witness  to  God  and  tell  of 
their  origin.  The  reverse  side  is  the  under  side, 
and  shows  from  whence  the  nation  came,  and  on 
what  it  is  built.  In  the  zenith,  that  is,  above 
the  top  of  the  pyramid,  is  a triangle  surrounded 
by  a glory ; and  in  the  center  is  an  All-seeing 
eye.  Over  the  eye  we  have  Annuit  Ccsptis, 
which  means,  ‘ He  prospers  our  beginning."  On 
the  base  of  the  pyramid  we  have  in  letters,  1776, 
and  underneath  the  following  motto — ‘Hovus 
or  do  sector  um ,”  meaning  a “New  era  in  the 
ages.  ’ ’ The  suggestion  of  the  items  upon  the  great 
seal  were  from  Sir  John  Prestwicli,Bart.,  an  Eng- 
lishman. He  gave  the  suggestions  to  the  Amer- 
ican Minister,  John  Adams,  and  thus  the  same 
were  conveyed  to  Congress  and  adopted. 

We  have  in  the  facts  of  the  great  seal,  a series 
of  coincidents  that  connect  this  country  with  the 
tribe  of  Manasseh.  When  the  tribes  marched, 
Benjamin,  Ephraim  and  Manasseh,  went  to- 
gether, on  the  west  side  of  the  Ark,  for  their 
homes  were  westward.  On  their  battalion  ban- 
ner was  the  figure  of  a youth,  denoting  activity, 
with  the  motto,  “ The  Cloud  of  Jehovah  rest  on 
them,  even  when  they  go  forth  out  of  the  camp.” 


KEY  DISTINCTIONS. 


23 


Here  we  have  the  origin  of  the  clond  on  the  seal. 
And  when  we  remember  that  Manasseh  was 
brought  up  at  the  foot  of  the  pyramid  and  could 
see  it  from  his  palace  home  at  Memphis,  then 
we  get  a cue  to  the  figure  of  the  pyramid  on  the 
seal.”'* 

PYRAMID. 

The  pyramid  is  a wonderful  witness  for  God 
and  his  people.  This  building  in  Egypt  has 
stood  for  4,000  years  ; finished  and  complete,  it 
stood  for  about  3,000,  before  anybody  ventured 
to  find  a way  into  it.  Then,  at  a great  cost  of 
men,  money  and  time,  a way  was  forced  in  by 
an  Arab  chief.  There  surely  is  something  re- 
markable that  the  only  thing  found  in  it  should 
be  a stone  trough,  and  more  singular  to  my 
mind,  that  the  Ark  of  the  Covenant  and  this 
stone  trough  should  be  of  equal  capacity  ; and 
the  Laver  in  which  the  Priest  washed  his  feet  in 
the  Temple  was  exactly  of  the  same  size.  And 
Solomon’s  Molten  Sea  contained  just  as  much 
water  as  would  fill  the  King’ s Chamber  in  which 
this  trough  was  found.  Can  any  man  know 
these  things  and  believe  them  to  be  accidental  ? 
Verily  not.  They  do  most  assuredly  pledge  a 
God  and  Providence. 

EPHRAIM. 

This  word  is  not  only  the  name  of  Joseph’s 
son  and  the  tribe,  but  it  is  used  quite  frequently 
in  a generic  sense  and  stands  for  the  ten  tribes 

* Essay  on  Manasseh  and  the  United  States,  by  the  author. 


24  KEY  DISTINCTION'S. 

and  Manasseh.  To  Reuben  by  birthright  was 
the  lead  politically,  but  it  was  taken  from  him 
and  given  to  Joseph,  and  so  to  Ephraim.  From 
Judah  came  the  chief  ruler,  that  is  Christ ; but 
the  birthright  was  Joseph’s. — I Chron.  5.  1. 

THRONE  OF  DAVID. 

To  this  throne  God  pledged  under  oath  a per- 
petuity. Also  He  pledged  that  some  one  of 
David’ s seed  should  always  be  on  it.  The  throne 
and  seed  are  pledged  an  unconditional  existence. 
This  being  so,  it  follows  that  they  must  be  now 
in  existence,  and  that  finally  all  thrones  will  be 
swallowed  up  by  this  one.  Queen  Victoria  is  of 
David,  and  the  English  throne  is  David’s. 
Hence  all  the  promises  and  prophecies  referring 
to  David’s  throne  may  be  found  on  this  line. 
For  prophecy  not  being  of  private  interpretation 
such  facts  may  be  proven. 

GENTILES. 

The  word  Gentile  generally  embraces  all  those 
nations  and  people  outside  of  the  twelve  tribes. 
Keeping  these  few  distinctions  in  mind,  you  will 
be  enabled  to  read  the  bible  interestingly  and 
with  the  proper  understanding.  Prophetic  evi- 
dence is  a strong  kind  of  proof.  Study  the 
word  on  this  line  and  you  will  find  Providence 
and  history  lending  glorious  confirmation  to  the 
same. 


ISRAEL  AND  THE  GATES. 


Discourse,  2 . 


ISRAEL — HOW  THE  GATES  OF  HIS  ENEMIES  ARE 
TO  BE  GIVEN  HIM — BY  THIS  SIGN  LOST  ISRAEL 
MAY  BE  KNOWN  — THE  GIVING  WILL  COR- 
RESPOND TO  THE  MULTIPLYING — THE  PRO- 
MISE, IN  THIS  DAY,  IS  RAPIDLY  FULFILLING 
— ENGLAND,  DISRAELI  AND  TANCRED  AND 
RUSSIA. 


Text— Gen*  22  : 17. 

“ That  in  blessing , I will  bless  thee  ; and  in  multiplying , I will 
multiply  thy  seed  as  the  stars  of  the  heaven , and  as  the  sand 
which  is  upon  the  seashore ; and  thy  seed  shall  possess  the 
gate  of  his  enemies C 


®NDER  a divine  oath  was  this  prophetic 
promise  made  to  Abraham.  At  the  time  it 
was  given  Abraham  had,  by  command,  offered 
his  only  son,  Isaac,  which  offering,  to  all  human 
appearance,  would  leave  the  old  patriarch  again 
childless ; but  his  faith  staggered  not,  for  human 
incompetence  does  not  circumscribe  the  bounds 
of  divine  suflicience.  The  God  who  commanded 
Abraham  to  offer,  recalled  the  command  at  a 
certain  stage  of  the  fulfillment,  counting  the 


26 


ISRAEL  AND  THE  GATES. 


faith  of  Abraham  for  righteousness.  In  Abra- 
ham's faith  Isaac  was  really  sacrificed ; hence 
the  divine  approval : ‘ ‘ By  Myself  have  I sworn, 
saith  the  Lord  ; for  because  thou  hast  done  this 
thing,  and  hast  not  withheld  thy  son,  thine  only 
son,  that  in  blessing  I will  bless  thee,  and  in 
multiplying  I will  multiply  thy  seed  as  the 
stars  of  the  heaven,  and  as  the  sand  which  is 
upon  the  seashore  ; and  thy  seed  shall  possess 
the  gate  of  his  enemies.”  An  oath  with  men  in 
this  day  does  not  mean  much  in  the  way  of  con- 
firmation, but  not  so  with  God’ s oath.  An  oath 
ought  to  be  sacred,  and  should  be  the  end  of 
doubt  and  strife.  God  made  a promise  to  Abra- 
ham, and  because  He  could  swear  by  no  greater, 
He  sware  by  Himself.  And  Abraham  lived  to 
see  the  promise  begin  to  fulfill,  and  to-day  the 
heirs  of  Abraham  may  look  and  see  the  same 
promise  fulfilling,  for,  as  Paul  says  in  Heb.  vi. 
17 : “Wherein  God,  willing  more  abundantly 
to  show  unto  the  heirs  of  promise  the  immuta- 
bility of  His  counsel,  confirmed  it  by  an  oath.” 
Who  are  the  heirs  of  promise  % For  to  them 
belong  many  and  precious  promises,  both  spirit- 
ual and  temporal.  Spiritually,  they  are  to 
lead  and  be  responsible  for  the  evangelization 
of  the  world.  Temporally,  they  are  to  be  a 
numerous  seed,  a powerful  people.  They  are 
to  occupy  the  ends  of  the  earth,  the  uttermost 
parts  of  the  earth,  the  coasts  of  the  earth,  the 
waste  and  the  desolate  places  of  the  earth,  the 


ISRAEL  AND  THE  GATES. 


27 


isles  of  the  sea,  the  heathen,  as  an  inheritance. 
They  are  to  inherit  the  Gentiles,  and  make  the 
desolate  cities  to  be  inhabited  ; they  are  to  be 
the  chief  of  nations  ; they  are  to  be  a company 
of  nations ; they  are  to  be  a great  people ; they 
are  to  possess  the  gates  of  their  enemies. 
Snrely  such  a people  should  be  found,  for  all 
these  things  make  it  impossible  for  them  to  be 
hid  in  a corner.  One  cannot  help  saying  with 
the  psalmist:  “Blessed  is  the  nation  whose 

God  is  the  Lord  ; and  the  people  whom  He  hath 
chosen  for  His  own  inheritance.” 

In  the  English  court  of  chancery  are  vast  sums 
of  money,  large  fortunes  waiting  for  heirs.  The 
court  frequently  advertises  for  them,  and  many 
in  every  land  respond  and  are  eager  to  prove 
their  claims  ; they  are  anxious  to  be  known  and 
accepted  as  the  decendants  and  lawful  heirs  of 
certain  testators.  It  is  oftentimes  difficult  to 
establish  their  claims  and  prove  satisfactorily 
their  identity.  The  court  demands  that  the 
evidences  of  heirship  be  very  definite.  In  this 
they  are  right.  But  we  venture  to  say  that 
even  the  English  court  of  chancery  would  not 
turn  away  a claimant  who  had  all  the  distinct 
marks  and  abounding  evidence  of  identity  that 
mark  and  characterize  the  children  of  Abraham, 
especially  so  in  the  latter  day,  for  then  these 
characteristics  are  to  be  clearer  and  fuller. 

The  Jews  are  known  ; they  have  been  known 
all  down  the  centuries  ; they  have  not  been  able 


28 


ISRAEL  AND  THE  GATES. 


to  hide  themselves.  In  keeping  with  the  word 
of  God  they  have  fulfilled  up  to  the  present  time 
the  prophecies  attaching  to  them.  In  all  the 
world  they  are  estimated  to  number  some  nine 
millions.  The  Jews  include  the  children  of  Judah 
and  Levi ; these  two  tribes  only.  The  Jews 
themselves  consent  to  this  statement,  and  allow 
that  the  descendants  of  Reuben,  Simeon,  Zebu- 
lum,  Issacliar,  Dan,  Gad,  Asher,  Naphtali, 
Joseph  and  Benjamin,  are  lost,  but  not  extinct. 
They  are  in  the  world,  for  God  has  not  cast 
away  His  people  forever.  If  the  two  tribes 
give  us  nine  millions,  how  many  should  we  ex- 
pect the  ten  tribes  to  furnish  ? Most  certainly 
not  less  than  forty-five  millions.  To  the  ten 
tribes  the  special  promises  of  fruitfulness  were 
given.  To  the  ten  tribes  belong  a greater  por- 
tion of  prophecy ; and  in  the  history  of  the 
world  more  is  allotted  to  Israel  than  to  Judah. 
Indeed,  the  world’s  history  pivots  on  the  ten 
lost  tribes. 

I believe  you  know  the  God-revealed  distinc- 
tion between  the  words  Israel  and  Judah.  You 
know  that  they  have  a distinct  history.  Their 
place  and  work,  promises  and  blessings,  chas- 
tisements and  rebukes,  are  as  distinct  and  differ- 
ent as  silver  and  gold. 

The  spiritual  heirs  of  Abraham  are  all  who 
are  embraced  in  the  saving  and  atoning  cove- 
nant of  grace  in  Christ.  I do  not  say  all  who 
believe,  for  there  will  be  more  in  heaven  with- 


ISRAEL  AND  THE  GATES. 


29 


out  faith  than  those  with ; namely,  all  those 
who  have  died  before  the  years  of  responsibility, 
with  many  of  the  pagan  world  who,  never  having 
heard  of  a Saviour,  have  therefore  never  denied 
him.  In  a spiritual  sense,  they  are  children.  I 
believe  in  this  matter  with  Paul,  who  says,  when 
writing  to  the  Romans,  second  chapter  : “There 
is  no  respect  of  persons  with  God  ; for  as  many 
as  have  sinned  without  law  shall  also  perish 
without  law,  and  as  many  as  have  sinned  in 
the  law  shall  be  judged  by  the  law.  For  when 
the  Gentiles,  which  have  not  the  law,  do  by 
nature  the  things  contained  in  the  law,  these, 
having  not  the  law,  are  a law  unto  themselves  ; 
which  show  the  work  of  the  law  written  in  their 
hearts,  their  conscience  also  bearing  witness,  and 
their  thoughts  the  meanwhile  accusing,  or  else 
excusing  one  another.”  Thus,  under  the  law 
which  governs  the  pagan,  I presume  many  will 
be  saved  and  many  lost,  just  as  under  the  law 
of  the  gospel.  In  Abraham  all  nations  were  to 
be  blessed,  spiritually.  In  this  sense  Abraham’ s 
seed  embraces  persons  of  every  age,  clime  and 
race. 

But  who  are  the  seed  of  Abraham  according 
to  the  flesh  ? W e answer  the  descendants  of 
the  twelve  tribes.  Now  to  the  natural  seed  the 
Bible  assigns  a distinct  work  and  place.  This 
natural  seed  are  divided  in  the  Bible,  the  word 
Israel  standing  generally  for  the  ten  tribes,  and 
Judah  for  two  tribes.  These  divisions  have 


30  ISRAEL  AND  THE  GATES. 

separate  paths  appointed  them  to  walk  in 
through  the  centuries.  ‘ ‘All  the  house  of  Israel 
wholly,”  “ the  whole  house  of  Israel,”  “all  the 
house  of  Israel,”  have  a special  work.  The  ten 
tribes  are  especially  called  in  the  scriptures  the 
seed  of  Abraham.  Sometimes  “My  chosen,” 
again  “ Mine  inheritance,”  and  “My  servant.” 
God,  in  referring  to  them  in  their  scattered  state, 
and  of  His  gathering  them  together,  says,  Is. 
xli.  8:  “But  thon,  Israel,  art  My  servant, 

Jacob,  whom  I have  chosen  ; the  seed  of  Abra- 
ham My  friend — thou  whom  I have  taken  from 
the  ends  of  the  earth,  and  called  thee  from  the 
chief  men  thereof,  and  said  unto  thee,  Thou  art 
My  servant;  I have  chosen  thee  and  not  cast  thee 
away.”  The  ten  tribes  are  sometimes  desig- 
nated by  the  word  Jacob.  If  we  once  get  a clear 
idea  who  the  seed  are,  then  we  can  search  among 
the  people  of  the  earth  to  find  them,  because  in 
the  latter  day  they  were  to  be  so  different  from 
other  people,  and  distinctly  marked,  we  will 
have  no  great  difficulty  in  finding  them.  Of  the 
special  marks,  one  was  they  were  to  possess  the 
gates  of  their  enemies.  The  multitudinous  seed 
and  other  characteristics  we  will  pass  by  for  the 
present. 

This  seed  were  to  possess  the  gates  of  their 
enemies  ; of  this  we  are  assured  by  the  oath  of 
God.  The  word  gate  here,  you  will  admit,  is  used 
in  a generic  sense.  It  means  a place  of  prominence, 
a position  of  strength,  a strategetic  point,  as  the 


ISRAEL  AND  THE  GATES. 


31 


entrance  into  a city  ; remembering  that  in  olden 
times  the  cities  were  walled  around,  the  gate 
was  an  important  point  of  defense ; or,  as  the 
narrow  entrance  into  a bay,  like  the  entrance 
into  New  York  bay  or  port,  the  Narrows  we  call 
them.  Here  our  cities,  New  York  and  Brook- 
lyn, could  best  and  first  be  defended.  Again,  a 
gate  in  the  general  vernacular  means  any  strong- 
hold : a tower,  an  island,  a mountain  pass. 

Now,  of  this  seed  it  is  plainly  stated  that  they 
shall  possess  the  gates  of  their  enemies. 

The  text  would  be  very  finely  illustrated  if 
we  supposed  that  Mexico  held  Governor  s island, 
in  the  middle  of  our  bay,  and  defiantly  dictated 
to  us  doctrines  of  trade,  politics  and  religion. 
As  arrogant  and  as  impudent  as  this  would 
seem,  yet  such  is  the  case  with  this  seed  of 
Abraham  and  other  nations.  Believing  that 
the  Saxon  race  are  the  ten  lost  tribes,  it  then  fol- 
lows that  the  English  nation  is  the  chief  repre- 
sentative of  these  tribes,  and  that  they  should  be 
in  possession  of  the  gates  of  their  enemies.  Are 
they  ? We  answer,  yes.  And  every  year  confirms 
and  makes  more  clear  the  answer.  This  you  say 
is  a theory.  Grant  it.  You  know  that  in  science 
a theory  is  formed  and  then  applied.  If  you 
form  a theory  about  the  tides  or  formation  of 
the  planets,  or  this  world,  your  theory  with 
others  is  applied  to  known  facts  to  see  if  it  will 
fit  them,  to  see  if  it  will  account  for  them,  and 
to  see  if  it  is  in  harmony  with  the  same.  Now 


1SKAEL  AND  THE  GATES. 


science  accepts  that  theory  which  applies  best, 
that  which  accounts  for  facts  the  most  reason- 
able, and  harmonizes  the  most  naturally.  Such 
theory  is  then  the  science  of  the  day,  and  will 
be  so  accepted  and  so  taught  until  it  is  sup- 
planted by  a better.  Try  then  the  theory  I have 
advanced  by  these  rules. 

Take  the  Guernsey  islands  in  the  English 
channel,  between  England  and  France,  nearer 
to  the  French  shore  than  England  ; the  inhabi- 
tants, being  a majority  of  them  French,  speak- 
ing French.  Yet  when  France  was  England’s 
greatest  and  most  dangerous  enemy,  England 
held  then,  as  now,  the  gates  of  her  enemies. 
Properly  speaking,  and  adjudged  by  any  human 
rule,  they  belong  to  France — as  naturally  as  the 
island  of  Heligoland,  at  the  mouth  of  the  Elbe, 
belongs  to  Germany.  Gibraltar,  Malta,  Cyprus, 
Suez  canal,  island  of  Perim  in  the  straits  of 
Babelmandeb  in  the  Red  sea,  and  Socotra  in  the 
same  sea  ; also  Aden  in  the  Red  sea,  covering 
Arabia  ; Peshawur,  the  very  entrance  of  or  from 
India  into  Afghanistan.  In  and  around  the 
vast  empire  of  India  you  have  Bombay,  Cal- 
cutta, Madras,  with  many  similar  strongholds  ; 
Rangoon,  on  the  Irawady  river,  commanding 
and  ever  menacing  Burmah.  The  vast  empire 
of  China  is  carefully  guarded  and  held  in  check 
by  such  gates  as  Singapore,  Malacca,  Penang, 
Hong  Kong  and  Cowloon.  Sarawak  in  Borneo, 
and  Labuan,  off  the  coasts,  are  such  gates. 


ISRAEL  AND  THE  GATES. 


33  _ 


Africa  is  being  gradually  gobbled  up  ; her 
strongholds  and  vast  areas  of  country  are  fall- 
ing into  the  hands  of  England ; the  coasts  are 
fast  coming  under  British  rule.  This  past  year 
England  has  come  into  possession  of  three  gates, 
namely,  the  island  of  Socotra  in  the  Red  sea, 
the  island  of  Cyprus  in  the  Mediterranean,  and 
the  Sublime  Porte,  the  lofty  gateway,  Constan- 
tinople. And  recent  telegrams  say  that  Eng- 
land is  negotiating  with  Portugal  for  Delogoa 
bay,  in  south-eastern  Africa  ; price,  three  million 
dollars.  But  this  people  are  not  satisfied  with 
all  these  gates.  So  now  they  have  pretended  to 
be  insulted  by  Shere  Ali,  the  Emir  of  Cabul, 
that  they  can  begin  negotiations  of  plunder  and 
conquest.  They  want — and  they  will  get  what 
they  want  in  a very  short  time,  thank  heaven, 
not  what  they  deserve  ! — they  want  the  famous 
Ivhyber  pass.  This  pass  is  a narrow  road  be- 
tween mountain  rocks  that  rise  over  two  thou- 
sand feet  at  the  lowest  point.  It  is  some  twenty- 
eight  miles  long,  while  for  twenty-two  miles 
the  average  width  is  only  150  feet.  The  eastern 
end  the  English  already  hold,  called  the  Pesha- 
wur  pass. 

Afghanistan  is  a country  in  Asia,  It  is  about 
the  size  of  England,  460  miles  from  north  to 
south,  and  430  from  east  to  west.  On  the  north 
it  is  bounded  by  Turkestan,  east  by  India,  south 
by  Beloochistan,  and  west  by  Persia.  The  popu- 
lation numbers  about  7,000,000.  They  are  as 


34 


ISRAEL  AND  THE  GATES. 


wild  as  the  country  is  broken  and  irregular. 
They  are  chiefly  agriculturists.  The  country  is 
rich  in  minerals  and  timber.  In  time  past  they 
have  seldon  been  at  peace  ; being  very  generally 
at  war  among  themselves.  Afghan  is  a Persian 
word,  and  means  that  which  is  wrapped  around 
— no  doubt  having  reference  to  the  mountain 
chain  that  hems  in  the  whole  land.  The  people 
themselves,  however,  name  their  country  Vila- 
yet, which  means  the  land  of  our  ancestors. 
They  claim  that  in  their  country  lived  Adam 
and  his  children,  also  Noali  and  his.  They  say 
they  had  in  their  possession  once  the  ark  of  the 
covenant,  but  they  have  lost  it.  While  it  was 
with  them,  if  they  took  it  into  battle  victory 
was  sure  to  be  theirs.  At  the  present  time  they 
have  Noah’ s ark.  It  is  embedded  in  the  ground, 
with  a portion  protruding  out,  which  pilgrims 
to  the  top  of  Dera  Ismael  Khan — that  is,  the 
sacred  mountain  of  Israel — are  permitted  to  see 
and  touch.  Many  have  supposed  the  Afghans 
to  be  the  ten  lost  tribes.  It  has  been  the  folly 
of  many  of  the  learned,  in  time  past,  to  hunt 
for,  and  actually  expect  to  find,  the  chosen  of 
God  in  some  out-of-the-way  place  ; to  find  them 
few,  poor  and  deluded — the  poorer,  the  fewer, 
and  the  more  wretched,  the  better.  Hence,  the 
wild  Indians  of  the  continent,  the  bushmen 
of  Africa,  the  aborigines  of  Australia,  the  Lap- 
landers of  the  north,  and  many  such  have  been 
chosen  of  men — though  not  of  God. 


ISRAEL  AND  THE  GATES. 


35 


The  Afghan  country,  no  doubt,  once  had  in- 
tercourse with  Palestine.  During  Solomon’s 
reign  many  Jews  left  the  land  as  merchants. 
Solomon  built  store-cities  in  Hamath,  Tadmor 
in  the  wilderness,  and  many  others.  These 
store-cities  were  on  the  great  highway  which  he 
made  through  the  desert,  so  as  to  bring  the 
trade  of  Dedan  and  Sheba  to  Jerusalem.  That 
Hebrew  names  are  given  to  the  mountains,  places, 
rivers  and  persons,  no  one  can  deny  ; but  such 
does  not  prove  them  to  be  the  lost  tribes — it 
shows  away  back  Jewish  influence  and  inter- 
course. They  do  not  speak  the  Hebrew,  but 
two  languages  called  the  Pukhtu  and  Pushtu. 
In  either  language  there  are  few,  if  any,  traces 
of  the  Hebrew.  No  doubt  the  lost  tribes,  after 
being  scattered  into  Central  Asia,  when  taken 
captive  about  725  B.C.,  wandered,  some  of  them, 
into  Afghan,  and  probably  for  a time  settled 
there,  and  gave  names  to  the  country.  The 
Afghans  themselves  went  into  the  country  from 
India,  and  as  the  tribes  moved  westward  they 
left  the  Afghans  in  possession. 

The  Afghan  country  comes  now  into  great 
importance  because  it  is  on  the  highway  of  the 
march  of  Israelitish  civilization  and  progress. 
England  wants  it ; and  I predict  she  will  get  it. 
Russia  wants  it,  and  at  present  seems  to  have 
the  upper  hand  ; but  Russia  or  England,  or  the 
world,  can  avail  nothing  against  the  purposes 
of  Jehovah.  The  gates  are  promised  to  Israel, 


36 


ISRAEL  AND  THE  GATES. 


therefore  she  will  get  them.  The  English  have 
already  an  army  of  35,000  men  in  the  Peshawur 
valley,  under  command  of  General  Sir  Frederick 
Paul  Haines.  Russia  is  gathering  a force,  and 
ere  long  the  two  countries  will  be  brought  face 
to  face.  The  end  of  the  whole  muddle  will  be 
that  England  will  take  charge  of  Afghan.  Thirty- 
three  years  ago  the  crownless  king,  Disraeli, 
wrote  his  novel  called  “Tancred.”  In  this 
novel  he  makes  the  queen  of  England  the  em- 
press of  India,  and  one  of  her  favorite  officers 
is  made  Earl  Beaconsfield  ; so  far  fancy  has  be- 
come fact.  But  in  that  same  novel  the  future 
of  the  present  strife  has  been  set  forth.  It  has 
been  very  finely  put  by  the  London  Spectator  : 
“There  is  a story  going  about,  founded,  we 
believe,  on  good  authority,  that  when  some  one 
quoted  ‘Tancred,’  two  or  three  months  ago,  in 
Lord  Beaconsfield’ s presence,  the  prime  minister 
remarked  : ‘Ah ! I perceive  you  have  been  read- 
ing “Tancred.”  That  is  a work  to  which  I re- 
fer more  and  more  every  year — not  for  amuse- 
ment, but  for  instruction.’  And  if  any  one  will 
take  the  trouble  just  now  to  refresh  his  memory 
of  ‘Tancred,’  he  will  see  how  much  Lord  Bea- 
consfield has  borrowed  from  it  in  relation  to  the 
policy  of  the  day.  Turn,  for  instance,  to  this 
passage  : ‘ If  I were  an  Arab  in  race  as  well  as 
in  religion,’  said  Tancred,  ‘ I would  not  pass  my 
life  in  schemes  to  govern  mere  mountain  tribes.’ 
‘I’ll  tell  you,’  said  the  Emir,  springing  from  his 


ISRAEL  AND  THE  GATES. 


37 


divan,  and  flinging  the  tube  of  his  nargileh  to 
the  other  end  of  the  tent,  4 the  game  is  in  our 
hands,  if  we  have  energy.  There  is  a combina- 
tion which  would  entirely  change  the  whole 
face  of  the  world  and  bring  back  empire  to  the 
East.  Though  you  are  not  the  brother  to  the 
queen  of  the  English,  you  are,  nevertheless,  a 
great  English  prince,  and  the  queen  will  listen 
to  what  you  say,  especially  if  you  talk  to  her  as 
you  talk  to  me,  and  say  such  fine  things  in 
such  a beautiful  voice.  Nobody  ever  opened 
my  mind  like  you.  You  will  magnetize  the 
queen  as  you  have  magnetized  me.  Go  back  to 
England  and  arrange  this.  You  see,  gloss  over 
as  they  may,  one  thing  is  clear,  it  is  finished 
with  England.  * * * * Let  the  queen  of 

the  English  collect  a great  fleet,  let  her  stow 
away  all  her  treasure,  bullion,  gold  plate  and 
precious  arms  ; be  accompanied  by  all  her  court 
and  chief  people,  and  transfer  the  seat  of  her 
empire  from  London  to  Delhi.  There  she  will 
find  an  immense  empire  ready-made,  a first-rate 
army  and  a large  revenue.  In  the  meantime  I 
will  arrange  with  Mehemet  Ali.  He  shall  have 
Bagdad  and  Mesopotamia,  and  pour  the  Bedouin 
cavalry  into  Persia.  I will  take  care  of  Syria 
and  Asia  Minor.  The  only  way  to  manage  the 
Afghans  is  by  Persia  and  by  the  Arabs.  We 
will  acknowledge  the  empress  of  India  as  our 
suzerain,  and  secure  for  her  the  Levantine  coast. 
If  she  like,  she  shall  have  Alexandria,  as  she 


38 


ISRAEL  AND  THE  GATES. 


now  lias  Malta.  It  could  be  arranged.  IT our 

queen  is  young.  She  has  an  avenir.  Aberdeen 
and  Sir  Robert  Peel  will  never  give  her  this  ad- 
vice ; their  habits  are  formed.  They  are  too  old, 
two  ruses.  But  you  see  ! the  greatest  empire 
that  ever  existed  ; besides  which  she  gets  rid  of 
the  embarrassment  of  her  chambers  ! and  quite 
practicable  ! For  the  only  difficult  part,  the 
conquest  of  India,  which  baffled  Alexander,  is 
all  done.’  Who  can  avoid  seeing  that  Lord 
Beaconsfield  has  been  quite  recently  referring  to 
this  passage — ‘not,’  as  he  said,  ‘for  amusement, 
but  for  instruction  ? ’ These  are  all  the  ideas  of 
his  recent  policy  in  germ — especially  the  treat- 
ment of  the  British  empire  as  having  its  true 
center  of  gravity  in  the  far  East — the  use  of  the 
Indian  army  for  conquest  to  be  made  in  Western 
Asia — the  acquisition  of  the  Levantine  coast  for 
Gfreat  Britian — the  active  alliance  between  the 
British  power  and  the  Mohammedan  power — - 
and  last,  not  least,  the  getting  rid,  to  a great 
extent  at  least,  by  the  help  of  Indian  leverage, 
of  ‘ the  embarrassment  of  the  chambers.’  For 
the  last  eight  months,  at  least,  English  policy 
has  evidently  been  borrowed  from  ‘Tancred.’ 
The  monarch,  for  anything  we  know,  has  been 
‘magnetized.’  The  cabinet  assuredly  have. 
Lord  Derby  and  Lord  Carnarvon  have  been 
treated  much  as  the  Emir  in  ‘ Tancred  ’ would 
have  treated  ‘Aberdeen  and  Sir  Robert  Peel  ’ — 
thrown  aside  as  two  ‘ruses.’  ” 


ISRAEL  ANI)  THE  GATES.  39 

England  lias  indeed  adopted  an  Oriental 
policy,  and  forward  slie  must  go  to  execute 
Jehovah’s  purpose.  Russia  is  preparing  on  a 
gigantic  scale.  In  Prussia  the  most  flourishing 
branch  of  trade  among  the  Germans  at  present 
is  the  manufacturing  of  arms  for  Russia.  Though 
the  late  war  be  over,  still  Russia  is  buying  ships, 
and  fitting  them  out  in  this  country.  She  feels 
bitterly  her  defeat  through  English  diplomacy  : 
England  taking  Cyprus,  assuming  protection 
over  Asiatic-Turkey,  and  making  Russia  yield 
back  to  Turkey  30,700  geographical  miles  which 
was  contained  in  the  original  treaty  of  San 
Stefano.  The  following  from  the  government 
organ  of  Russia  will  give  you  some  idea  of  her 
chagrin : 

The  St.  Petersburg  Golos  says  that : the  treaty 
of  Berlin  has  produced  an  almost  crushing  im- 
pression on  the  Russian  public.  “It  is  felt 
that  Russia  has  not  attained  her  object ; that 
she  has  been  deceived  by  her  friends,  and  that 
she  has  foolishly  helped  her  enemies  with  her 
victories.  * * * What  is  the  reason  of  our 

failure  % One-half  per  cent,  of  our  population 
have  perished  in  the  war,  hundreds  of  millions 
have  been  expended,  and  yet  the  Eastern  ques- 
tion is  not  solved  and  the  treaty  of  Berlin  is 
merely  a truce.  The  last  war  has  clearly  shown 
all  our  national  peculiarities  as  well  as  our  moral 
and  material  strength,  * * * All  the  mili- 

tary requirements  which  depended  on  the  inbred 


4o 


ISRAEL  AND  THE  GATES. 


qualities  of  the  Russian  soldier  were  brilliantly 
carried  out ; but  where  knowledge  and  prepar- 
ation were  demanded  we  were  not  equal  to  the 
task.  It  was  probably  for  this  reason  that  we 
felt  so  much  hurt  on  reading  of  the  boldness  of 
Lord  Beaconsfield,  who  doubtless  reckoned  on 
the  superior  culture  of  Englishmen  to  that  of 
Russians.  All  classes  of  Russian  society  are  re- 
sponsible for  this.  We  do  not  estimate  culture 
and  knowledge  at  their  true  value.  Most  of  us 
say  that  mental  work  does  not  bring  money, 
and  that  culture  is  a means  of  corruption.  * * 

In  western  Europe,  on  the  other  hand,  people 
have  arrived  by  hard  experience  at  the  convic- 
tion that  intelligence,  capacity,  culture  and 
energy,  bring  men  to  the  front,  and  give  them 
peace  at  home  and  power  abroad.  It  is  the 
knowledge  of  how  to  make  the  best  possible  use 
of  their  energy  and  abilities  that  has  enabled 
the  English  to  derive  success  from  our  victories 
and  sacrifices.  May  this  be  a lesson  to  us.” 

But  enough  ; one  knows  the  end  e’re  they 
begin,  for  the  word  of  God  is  true.  We  do  not 
argue  that  the  English  are  so  much  smarter 
than  other  people,  no,  but  we  account  for  their 
success  because  they  are  the  executive  nation  of 
Divine  Providence.  It  falls  to  the  lot  of  those 
who  do  not  believe  this  theory  to  account  for 
their  success  without  allowing  them  to  be 
smarter. 


ISRAEL  AND  TERRITORY. 


Discourse , 3. 


PROMISES  TO  ISRAEL — MATERIAL  NATURE — LO- 
CATION OF  THE  TRIBES  IN  CHRIST’S  DAY — 
GOD’S  PROVIDENCE — BRITISH  AND  AMERICAN 
RULE — “LIFE  FROM  THE  DEAD” — TEACHING 
THE  NATIONS  PEACEFUL  ARBITRATION — ENG- 
LAND AND  RUSSIA — AFGHANISTAN  FALLS  TO 
ANGLO-ISRAEL — GOD’S  POLITICAL  GEOGRAPHY 
— ANGLO-SAXON  EVANGELIZATION  — RUSSIA 
OPPOSING  IT — BRITISH  AND  RUSSIAN  OUTPOSTS 
IN  CONTACT — WAIL  OF  JUDAH— EARTH’S  GIR- 
DLE. 


Text-Isaiah  liv.  2,  3* 

“ Enlarge  the  place  of  thy  tent , and  let  them  stretch  forth  the  cur- 
tains of  thine  habitations  ; spare  not , lengthen  thy  cords,  and 
strengthen  thy  stakes  ; for  thou  shalt  break  forth  on  the  right 
hand  and  on  the  left;  and  thy  seed  shall  inherit  the  Gentiles , 
and  make  the  desolate  cities  to  be  inhabited 


SN  the  writings  of  the  prophets  the  feminine 
gender  is  often  used  when  speaking  of  the 
house  of  Israel,  and  the  masculine  when  denoting 
the  house  of  J udah.  Quite  frequently  Israel  is 
spoken  of  as  a divorced  woman,  as  being  cast 
off,  and  as  being  barren.  Judah  remaining  faith- 


42 


ISRAEL  AND  TERRITORY. 


fill  to  the  throne  of  David  and  the  temple  ser- 
vice, and  abiding  in  the  land  much  longer  than 
Israel,  is  presented  as  one  married.  So  you 
will  understand  Jeremiah  iii.  8,  when  he  says: 
“And  I saw,  when  for  all  the  causes  whereby 
backsliding-Israel  committed  adultery  I had  put 
her  away,  and  given  her  a bill  of  divorce.” 
Again,  Isaiah  1.1:  “ Thus  saith  the  Lord,  where 
is  the  bill  of  your  mother’s  divorcement  whom 
I have  put  away.”  Yet,  though  Israel  was  di- 
vorced, forsaken,  cast  off  and  desolate,  she  was 
to  have  more  children  than  married  Judah.  So 
the  verse  preceding  the  text  says  : “ Sing,  Oh 

barren,  thou  that  didst  not  bear ; break  forth 
into  singing,  and  cry  aloud  thou  that  didst  not 
travail  with  child  ; for  more  are  the  children  of 
the  desolate  than  the  children  of  the  married 
wife,  saith  the  Lord.”  Then  come  the  words  of 
the  text  bidding  her  enlarge  the  place  of  her 
tent,  or  dwelling-place,  to  stretch  forth  her 
curtains,  so  as  to  cover  over  the  new-gotten 
habitations.  To  spare  not,  that  is,  to  be  not 
tardy,  or  slow,  in  lengthening  out  her  cords, 
that  is  her  influence,  and  strengthen  her  stakes, 
that  is  her  authority ; but  to  break  forth  on 
every  hand  where  there  is  an  opening,  and  in- 
herit the  seed  of  the  Gentiles,  and  make  the 
languishing  and  poverty-stricken  cities  of  the 
nations  to  be  inhabited  ; in  this  conquest  to  go 
on  and  fear  not. 

These  exhortations  are  given,  and  promises  are 


ISRAEL  AND  TERRITORY. 


43 


made  to  Israel  after  she  had  left  Palestine.  No 
one  can  say  truthfully  that  they  have  yet  been 
fulfilled  in  no  degree  or  sense,  unless  they  find 
such  fulfillment  in  the  conquests  of  the  Saxon 
race.  These  predictions  cannot  apply  to  the 
Jews,  for  they  are  few,  nationless,  and  without 
a government.  Touching  the  past  history  of 
both  Judah  and  Israel  in  Palestine,  we  shall 
find  it  to  be  barren  of  victories,  territory,  acqui- 
sition and  number,  in  comparison  to  other  na- 
tions. They  have  never  occupied  the  land  given 
to  Abraham  in  fullness.  In  Solomon’s  time 
they  bare  rule  only  over  a part  of  it.  The  Gen- 
tiles and  heathens  have  occupied  it  more  and 
longer  than  the  sons  of  Abraham.  But  what 
failed  to  be  accomplished  in  the  past,  is  held 
grandly  in  reserve  for  this  day,  the  next  few 
years.  God  will  remember  His  promise  to 
Abraham,  Isaac,  Jacob  and  David.  He  will 
remember  it  to  fulfill  it,  in  spite  of  hell  or  earth. 

We  have  been  blind  and  guilty  in  the  past, 
unconscious  of  our  origin,  and  as  a natural  con- 
sequence, ignorant  of  our  place  and  special 
work.  In  interpreting  the  word  of  God  we 
have  been  lavish  in  spiritualizing,  and  greedy  in 
materializing,  overlooking  the  fact  that  nine- 
tenths  of  the  Old  Testament  is  a material  his- 
tory about  one  people,  and  that  through  them 
God’ s special  providence  was  to  flow  to  all  other 
nations  ; and  the  New  Testament  plants  the  life 
and  prosperity  of  the  Gentile  world  upon  the 


44  ISRAEL  AND  TERRITORY. 

course  and  progress  of  Israel.  God  said  to 
Abraham  ‘ ‘ In  thee  shall  all  the  families  of  the 
earth  be  blessed,”  and  more,  “ and  in  thy  seed 
shall  all  the  nations  of  the  earth  be  blessed.”  Is- 
rael being  scattered  and  cast  off  became  a bless- 
ing to  the  world.  They  gave  to  the  surround- 
ing nations  the  only  true  idea  of  God,  for  in 
their  lowest  condition  and  idolatry  they  pre- 
served the  name  and  knowledge  of  Jehovah, 
and  Christ  sent  His  disciples  after  them  through 
one  of  their  own  tribe,  namely,  Benjamin,  tell- 
ing them  not  to  go  into  the  way  of  the  Gentiles, 
nor  into  the  cities  of  the  Samaritans,  “but  go 
rather  to  the  lost  sheep  of  the  house  of  Israel.” 
To  these  sheep  Christ  declares  he  was  sent. 
Where  were  these  sheep  ? They  were  scattered 
about  in  Central  Asia,  in  scriptural  language  in 
Cappadocia,  Galatia,  Pamphylia,  Lydia,  Bithy- 
nia,  and  round  about  Illyricum.  From  these 
very  regions  came  the  Saxons  ; from  here  they 
spread  abroad  north  and  west,  being  the  most 
Christian  of  any  people  on  the  face  of  the  earth 
then,  as  well  as  now.  Their  reception  of  the 
gospel  gave  them  power  over  the  surrounding 
nations,  to  whom  they  were,  as  it  had  been  fore- 
told, witnesses  for  Jesus  and  providence  in  a 
very  special  manner.  What  then,  we  say  with 
Paul,  will  be  the  blessing  of  Israel — recognized 
and  fully  restored  to  God’ s favor  ? If  so  much 
good  was  carried  and  bestowed  upon  the  Gen- 
tile nations  because  Israel  was  scattered,  how 


ISRAEL  AND  TERRITORY. 


45 


much,  and  what  are  the  blessings  in  store  for 
those  nations  when  Israel  and  Judah  be  restored  ? 
Paul  compares  it  to  a resurrection — like  as  when 
the  barrenness  and  desolation  of  a winter  is  sup- 
planted by  the  fruits  aud  beauties  of  summer. 
“If  the  casting  away  of  them  be  the  reconciling 
of  the  world,  what  shall  the  receiving  of  them 
be,  but  life  from  the  dead.” — Roms.  xi.  15. 

It  is  reasonable  to  suppose  that  this  world  is 
subject  to  the  providence  of  God.  Such  a sup- 
position is  grandly  sustained  by  the  laws  and 
operations  of  nature  without,  and  the  experience 
and  intuitions  of  the  mind  within  ; and  I believe 
this  providence  to  be  all-comprehensive,  bound- 
ing, and  cognizing  all  things  past,  present  and 
future,  both  small  and  great ; claiming  the  ages 
for  its  measure,  the  universe  for  the  field  of  its 
operations,  and  the  Infinite  as  the  source  of 
power.  ‘ ‘ The  Lord  J ehovah  reigns,  let  the  earth 
rejoice.”  Let  me  persuade  you  to  thoroughly 
believe  in  the  precision,  the  intimacy  and  the 
completeness  of  this  providence.  This  doctrine 
we  need  to  fully  learn  and  accept.  “In  the  be- 
ginning God  created  the  heavens  and  the  earth,” 
and  it  is  He  ‘ 1 who  hath  measured  the  waters  in 
the  hollow  of  His  hand,  and  meted  out  heaven 
with  a span,  and  comprehended  the  dust  of  the 
earth  in  a measure,  and  weighed  the  mountains 
in  scales,  and  the  hills  in  a balance.”  Aye,  and 
more,  yes  closer  still  does  this  providence  ap- 
proach us  in  our  affairs.  “By  Him  kings  reign 


46 


ISRAEL  AND  TERRITORY. 


and  princes  decree  judgment.  He  bringetli  the 
princes  to  nothing ; He  maketh  the  judges  of 
the  earth  as  vanity.”  Even  closer  yet,  for  with- 
out His  permisssion  a sparrow  cannot  fall  to  the 
ground  ; and  so  intimate  is  He  with  us,  that  He 
knoweth  the  number  of  the  hairs  of  the  head. 
Now  all  this  kind  of  Bible  instruction  is  intended 
to  teach  the  nearness  of  God  to  us,  and  His  in- 
terest and  intimacy  with  nations  and  nature. 
Let  us  not  think  for  a moment  that  nations  can 
rush  to  war  and  be  outside  of  this  circle  of  pro- 
vidence. Let  us  study  to  know  God’s  mind, 
His  plans  and  purposes  with  the  nations  ; for 
rest  satisfied  that  His  plan  will  finally  be  ac- 
cepted by  men  and  nations,  and  His  purposes 
will  prevail.  Kings  may  plan,  diplomatists  may 
diplomatize,  scientists  may  analyze,  theologians 
may  teach  and  preach  their  isms,  and  politi- 
cians may  make  platforms  and  construct  rings, 
yet  none,  nor  all  combined,  can  stay  the  hand 
of  God.  “He  doeth  according  to  His  will  in 
the  armies  of  heaven  and  among  the  inhabitants 
of  the  earth.”  He  can  initiate,  permit,  modify 
and  destroy.  Once  we  truly  recognize  the  sove- 
reignity of  God  over  us,  conceit  will  lie  dead  at 
the  feet  of  humility. 

The  church  at  large  has  but  a slender  hold 
upon  this  great  doctrine.  They  look  upon  the 
great  movement  of  wars  and  strife,  rising  and 
falling  of  nations,  as  looks  the  country  stranger 
upon  a railway  engine  the  first  time,  the  whirl- 


ISRAEL  AND  TERRITORY. 


47 


ing  wheels,  the  steam  and  smoke  and  burnished 
boiler  rivet  his  attention  so  completely,  that  he 
sees  not  the  driver  in  his  cab.  So  men  are  dazed 
with  the  show  of  pomp  of  courts  and  councils, 
with  the  harangues  of  legislators  and  march  of 
regiments,  that  they  discern  not  the  master  hand 
behind  that  directs  all.  “ Verily  thou  art  a God 
that  hidest  Thyself.”  No,  no,  friends  ; English 
bravery,  nor  American  ingenuity  will  not  ac- 
count for  all  that  England  has  done  on  the  line 
of  victories,  and  the  marvelous  and  rapid  growth 
of  these  United  States.  As  God  said  long  ago 
through  Moses,  so  He  could  say  to-day  ; for 
heavenly  counsel  was  given  to  the  children  of 
Israel  on  entering  the  promised  land,  with  a de- 
sign of  suppressing  their  pride  and  enabling 
them  to  form  a correct  idea  of  their  success  in 
driving  the  strong  and  greater  nations  of  Canaan- 
ites  and  Philistines.  “Speak  not  thou  in  thine 
heart,  after  that  the  Lord  thy  God  hath  cast 
them  out  from  before  thee,  saying : For  my 
righteousness  the  Lord  hath  brought  me  in  to 
possess  this  land  ; but  for  the  wickedness  of 
these  nations  the  Lord  doth  drive  them  out  from 
before  thee.  Not  for  thy  righteousness,  or  the 
uprightness  of  thine  heart,  dost  thou  go  to  pos- 
sess the  land,  but  for  the  wickedness  of  those 
nations  the  Lord  thy  God  doth  drive  them  out 
from  before  thee,  that  He  may  perform  the  word 
which  the  Lord  sware  unto  thy  fathers,  Abra- 
ham, Isaac  and  Jacob.  Understand,  therefore, 


48 


ISRAEL  AND  TERRITORY. 


that  the  Lord  thy  God  givetli  thee  not  this  good 
land  to  possess  it  for  thy  righteousness,  for  thou 
art  a stiifed-necked  people.” — Deut.  ix.  4. 

By  the  same  rule  and  for  the  very  same  reason 
that  Israel  conquered  Palestine,  does  England 
go  on  from  conquest  to  conquest.  And  because 
God  remembered  to  perform  his  promises  made 
to  the  patriarchs  upon  their  seed,  America  was 
opened  for  the  Puritans,  who  are  without  doubt 
the  descendants  and  representatives  of  Manas- 
seh,  of  whom  God  said  He  should  be  a people, 
a great  people. 

The  rule  of  England  and  America  over  other 
people,  is  to  be  as  life  from  the  dead.  That  is, 
whatever  country  England  conquers  and  rules, 
it  is  better  for  the  people,  and  the  country,  and 
the  world.  They  give  to  the  people  a liberty 
that  they  would  not  have  given  to  themselves  ; 
they  develop  the  resources  of  the  country  as 
never  before,  and  by  trade  and  commerce  bless 
the  people  and  cause  them  be  a blessing  unto 
others.  And  better  still,  they  make  known  to 
the  conquered  ones,  in  due  time,  the  riches  of 
faith  in  Christ.  So  we  have  no  hesitation  in 
saying  a thing  patent  to  every  unprejudiced  ob- 
server, that  the  aborignes  of  the  conquered  colo- 
nies of  Great  Britain  are  treated  better  by  their 
conquerers  than  they  ever  treated  themselves. 
The  Africans,  in  the  conquered  colonies  of  Af- 
rica, are  better  off  under  British  rule  than  those 
colonies  or  portions  unconquered  are.  The 


ISRAEL  AND  TERRITORY. 


49 


hosts  of  India  enjoy  more,  fare  better  in  every 
grace  and  virtue  in  all  that  goes  to  adorn 
and  develop  mankind,  under  the  British  gov- 
ernment and  protection  than  they  ever  did  or 
would  under  self-government  So  the  French, 
Germans,  Italians,  Russians,  Spaniards  and  the 
numerous  progeny  of  emigrants  to  this  country, 
fare  better  in  every  way  with  Manasseli,  than 
they  did  in  their  own  lands.  Of  course,  both 
in  England’ s rule  and  America’ s,  there  are  many 
defects  ; but  taking  all  in  all,  the  good  will  out- 
weigh the  bad  ; and  more  so  as  the  years  roll  on. 

True,  an  arbitrary  purpose  and  an  individu- 
alism is  seen  on  the  surface,  yet  under  it  all 
there  is  the  hand  of  God.  The  farmer  is  free  as 
to  what  he  sows,  but  the  Divine,  without  inter- 
fering with  his  freedom,  regulates  the  harvest 
to  plenty  or  famine.  The  Saxon  people,  Eng- 
land and  America,  stand  in  a new  light  to  the 
world  by  the  teachings  of  the  Bible.  Being  Is- 
rael or  the  ten  lost  tribes,  they  become  at  once 
the  chosen  agents  of  God  for  the  glorious  pur- 
pose of  evangelizing  the  whole  world,  and  finally, 
by  reducing  the  whole  earth  to  the  plane  of  uni- 
versal liberty  and  peace. 

It  was  necessary  that  these  two  nations  should 
first  be  taught  the  art  of  mediation,  for  the  ends 
of  peace  ; that  they  should  learn  and  show  to 
the  world  that  national  disputes  and  grievances 
can  be  settled  without  an  appeal  to  the  sword. 
Hence  we  have,  and  what  is  much  better,  the 


50 


ISRAEL  AND  TERRITORY. 


world  lias,  Geneva  and  Alabama  and  the  fish 
bounty  treaty  of  Canada  and  the  United  States. 
Not  all  the  press  did  on  either  side,  nor  all  the 
carping  and  blustering  of  individuals,  could 
prevent  the  happy  consummation  of  both  these 
treaties.  To  God  be  praise,  for  they  are  pro- 
phetic harbingers  of  a better  day  coming. 

No  hand  nor  power,  nor  combination  of 
powers,  can  stop  the  onward  march  of  Israel  to 
her  God-ordained  goal.  Her  future  is  to  spread 
on  the  right  hand  and  on  the  left.  Island  after 
island,  colony  after  colony,  will  fall  into  her 
hand  for  mutual  benefit.  Russia  may  contest 
this  march,  and  will,  for  she  is  as  much  the  ap- 
pointed agent  of  contest  from  heaven  as  England 
is  to  advance.  In  a few  years  she  will  try  to 
take  the  place  of  England  among  the  nations,  as 
she  has  just  done  in  Afghan.  Russia  promised, 
no  doubt,  Shere  Ali,  that  they  would  and  could 
protect  him  against  England,  but  the  bargain 
was  outside  of  the  aims  of  Providence,  hence  it 
could  not  be  sustained.  It  is  ordained  of  heaven 
that  Afghan  fall  into  the  hands  of  England,  if 
England  be  Israel. 

Against  this  fate-like  division  of  the  world 
Russia  is  going  to  contend  and  fight  whenever 
she  gets  a chance.  It  would  pay  Russia  and 
many  other  countries  to  read  that  “ When 
the  Most  High  divided  to  the  nations  their  in- 
heritance,when  He  separated  the  sons  of  Adam, 
He  set  the  hounds  of  the  people  according  to  the 


ISRAEL  AND  TERRITORY. 


51 


children  of  Israel.'’’’ — Duet,  xxxii.  8.  These 
bounds  God  will  maintain  wlierever  they  run  ; 
whatever  country  they  cut  in  two,  no  matter, 
the  earth  must  finally  conform  to  this  divine 
geography.  This  purpose  is  strongly  set  forth 
by  Isaiah  xliv.  7,  ‘ ‘ And  who,  as  I,  shall  call, 
and  shall  declare  it,  and  set  it  in  order  for  Me, 
since  I appointed  the  ancient  people  ? and  the 
things  that  are  coming  and  shall  come  A This 
same  sturdy  fact  is  taught  by  Paul  when  speak- 
ing to  the  Athenians,  telling  them  that  God 
“hath  made  of  one  blood  all  nations  of  men  to 
dwell  on  the  face  of  the  earth,  and  hath  deter- 
mined the  times  before  appointed,  and  the 
bounds  of  their  habitations .”  National  desti- 
nies are  not  so  much  things  of  chance,  or  prizes 
for  the  sword  as  many  think.  God  promised  to 
David  when  both  Israel  and  Judah  were  pros- 
perously settled  in  Palestine  under  David’s 
reign,  that  He  would  appoint  a place  for  His 
people  Israel,  and  plant  them  there,  and  they 
should  not  be  moved,  neither  should  the  wicked 
afflict  them  as  aforetime. — 2d  Sam.  vii.  10.  This 
promise  God  has  kept.  He  has  given  them  the 
British  isles,  where  none  can  afflict  them,  as  they 
were  wont  to  do  when  Israel  was  scattered  in 
Asia  and  Europe.  God  has  found  Manasseli  a 
home  in  this  land  of  blessings  and  rich  acres. 

England,  by  a necessity,  was  forced  to  find 
new  countries  to  provide  for  her  multiplying 
population.  Then  she  is  forced  to  enter  other 


52 


ISRAEL  AND  TERRITORY. 


nations  as  a missionary.  She,  with  Manasseh, 
is  chiefly  responsible  for  the  evangelization  of 
the  world,  and  of  course  they  are  at  work  all 
over  the  world,  for  England  and  the  United 
States  send  out  more  missionaries  than  all  the 
world  beside.  Russia  needs  no  land  for  colo- 
nization, for  now  her  inhabitants  number  only 
thirty-four  to  the  square  mile,  while  England 
numbers  389.  If  we  take  in  all  the  territory 
under  Russia  and  England,  even  then  England 
has  more  to  the  square  mile  than  Russia.  Russia 
comprises  about  8,000,000  square  miles,  and 
England,  with  her  late  additions,  leaving  out 
the  United  States,  numbers  about  9,000,000. 
Joining  Ephraim  and  Manasseh  together,  they 
own  one-fourth  of  the  whole  world,  namely, 
about  13,000,000  square  miles  ; the  whole  earth 
numbers  51,340,800  square  miles.  Besides, 
Russia  is  not  a missionary  country.  She  neither 
sends  any  nor  accepts  any,  being  at  present  the 
only  nation  closed  to  missionary  operation  and 
toleration.  The  past  few  years  Russia  has 
gained  rapidly  in  territorial  power.  With  the 
conquest  of  Bokhara  and  portions  of  Turkistan, 
or  Independent  Tartary,  she  has  added  some 
800,000  square  miles. 

At  the  beginning  of  the  last  century  the  Rus- 
sian advance  forts  were  2,500  miles  distant  from 
those  of  England.  At  the  close  of  the  century 
the  distance  was  2,000.  Then  in  1810  it  was  re- 
duced to  1,000.  And  since  1855  it  has  been  re- 


ISRAEL  AND  TERRITORY. 


53 


duced  to  400.  And  now,  of  course,  they  want 
it  reduced  to  nothing  by  getting  control  of 
Afghan. 

How  wonderfully  clear  are  the  fulfilling  events 
of  the  prophecy.  This  king  of  the  north  is  to 
become  a strong  king,  who,  when  Israel  and 
Judah  are  settled  in  Palestine,  will  have  spirit 
and  power  to  attack  them.  So  He  is  ripening, 
growing  and  gathering  power  ready.  Russia 
now  comprises  nine  crowns,  eight  of  which  are 
crowns  of  conquest.  Russia’ s one  grand  desire 
is  to  possess  Palestine,  especially  Jerusalem. 
.The  Crimean  war  was  waged  for  rights  and  ex- 
tended privileges  in  this  holy  city.  To-day 
Russian  pilgrims  swarm  thither  by  the  thou- 
sands every  year.  A few  years  ago  she  built 
outside  of  the  Jaffa  gate  what  she  called  an 
hospice,  which  was  designed  to  be  nothing  more 
nor  less  than  a fort.  It  is  in  a position  com- 
manding the  whole  city,  and  is  a place  of  great 
strength.  Often  she  has  tried  to  possess  the  city 
and  land.  By-and-bv  she  will  be  permitted  by 
Providence  to  pour  her  troops  into  this  “Land 
of  unwalled  villages,”  and  when  having  nearly 
achieved  the  ambitious  plan  of  ages,  and  nearly 
realized  her  one  great  national  idea,  she  will 
perish,  to  rise  no  more,  “ on  the  mountains  of 
Israel. ’’  Her  history  is  set  forth  by  Ezekiel 
xxxviii.  and  xxxix.  chapters. 

Palestine  and  Jerusalem  have  borne  undeni- 
able evidence  for  prophecy  and  Providence.  The 


54  Israel  and  territory. 

whole  land  and  the  book  have  been  wonderfully 
agreed  during  the  past  eighteen  centnries.  How 
significant  and  telling  the  wailings  and  lamenta- 
tions of  the  devout  Jews,  who  crowd  under  the 
walls  of  the  mosque  of  Omar,  the  site  of  the 
ancient  temple.  Here,  each  returning  Sabbath, 
groups  of  Jews  may  be  heard  dolefully  crying : 
“■AU  bene,  Alt  bene;  bene  bethka ; bekarob, 
bimheira,  bimheira;  beyamenu , bekarob,  ’ ’ 
which,  being  interpreted,  means,  “Lord  build, 
Lord  build  ; build  Thy  house  speedily,  in  haste, 
in  haste ; even  in  our  day  build  Thy  house 
speedily.”  Yes,  mourning  brethren  of  Judah,- 
the  time  is  coming  when  the  house  shall  be 
built  and  the  voice  of  wailing  no  more  heard  in 
the  streets. 

Can  any  student  or  inquirer  after  the  truth 
fail  to  see  that  in  our  day  a prophecy  is  being 
fulfilled  ? Can  any  one  shut  their  eyes  to  the 
wonderful  fact  that  Israel  is  breaking  forth  on 
the  left  and  on  the  right  ? Cod  has  long  ago 
said  that  Israel  were  the  people  of  His  inheri- 
tance, and  that  Jacob  was  the  lot  of  His  inheri- 
tance, or  His  girdle,  or  cord,  as  the  word  lot 
means.  Then,  if  you  turn  your  attention  to 
Great  Britain  and  colonies,  including  Manasseh, 
you  will  see  this  girdle  or  measuring  line  around 
the  earth.  Let  me  aid  you  by  pointing  the  same 
out  for  you.  Look  at  the  eastern  hemisphere 
circle,  inclosing  the  Gentile  nations.  Begin  with 
Great  Britain ; pass  on  to  the  channel  islands, 


ISRAEL  AND  TERRITORY. 


m 


Gibraltar,  Malta,  Cyprus,  West  Coast  African 
colonies,  St.  Helena,  Cape  colonies,  Mauritius, 
Seychelles,  Perim,  Aden,  Ceylon,  India,  Bur- 
mah,  Straits  settlements,  Labuan,  Australian 
colonies,  Hong  Kong,  and  the  dominion  of  Can- 
ada. In  the  western  hemisphere  commence  the 
circle  with  Canada  and  United  States,  Fiji 
islands,  New  Zealand,  Falkland  islands,  British 
Guiana,  British  Honduras,  West  India  islands 
and  Newfoundland.  Ho  we  not  plainly  see 
that  Israel  is  possessing  “the  isles  of  the  sea,” 
“coasts  of  the  earth,”  “waste  and  desolate 
places?”  These  things  are  not  hid  in  a corner  ; 
they  proclaim  the  intentions  of  God,  an  Over- 
ruling Providence  ; and  who  and  where  the  lost 
ti’ibes  are.  A miracle  and  prophecy  are  fulfill- 
ing before  our  eyes. 


ISPAEL  AND  POPULATION. 

Discourse,  4. 


PROPHETIC  LATTER  DAYS — OUR  BEARINGS  IN 
THE  AGES — UNWISE  IMPATIENCE — ISRAEL  TO 
BE  ALWAYS  A NATION — HER  EMPIRE — HIS- 
TORIC CAREER  OF  AND  FUTURE  OF  ENGLAND, 
AMERICA  AND  JUDAH — RELATIVE  INCREASE 
OF  POPULATION — THE  INFIDEL  SAXON— JEW- 
. ISH,  BRITISH  AND  AMERICAN  INTERESTS  ONE 
— A FULL  END  OF  ALL  NATIONS  BUT  ISRAEL 
— FAMINE  HENCEFORTH  ONLY  FOR  THE  IIEA 
THEN — ARBITRATION  TO  BE  ENFORCED  BY" 
ISRAEL — AMERICAN  ABSORPTION — STARTLING 
FIGURES  OF  FUTURE  POPULATION — THE  BAL- 
ANCE OF  POWER. 


Yet  the  number  of  the  children  of  Israel  shall  be  as  the  sand 
of  the  sea,  which  cannot  be  measured  or  7iumbered  ; and  it 
shall  come  to  pass  that  in  the  place  where  it  was  said  unto 
them.  Ye  are  not  my  people,  there  it  shall  be  said  unto  them. 
Ye  are  the  sons  of  the  living  God.” 


PERIOD  of  time  is  frequently  referred  to 


in  the  scriptures  as  being  the  “latter 


days.”  It  is,  therefore,  very  important  for  the 
prophetic  student,  and  the  church  of  Christ  at 
large,  that  the  time  of  days  spoken  of  should  be 


Text-Hosea  i*  10, 


ISRAEL  AND  POPULATION. 


57 


known.  For  connected  with  these  days  are  a 
number  of  prophecies  waiting  fulfillment,  and 
they  are  of  such  a nature  that  their  fulfillment 
may  easily  be  discerned.  In  breadth  and  scope 
they  cover  much  territory  and  include  many 
people.  They  cannot  be  hid  in  a corner,  for  the 
parts  are  so  numerous  and  the  interests  so  great. 
The  fulfillment  of  these  prophecies  will  make  a 
radical  and  fundamental  change  in  Church  and 
State. 

I take  it  for  granted  we  are  now  entering  into 
the  time  of  the  latter  days — a time  that  precedes 
by  a natural  consequence  the  millennium.  It 
is,  therefore,  unwise  on  the  part  of  any  person 
to  claim  that  Christ  may  come  any  day,  and 
that  His  millennial  reign  may  be  begun  at  any 
moment.  It  is  but  fair  that  we  should  carefully 
consider  our  bearings  in  the  circle  of  Providence 
and  our  position  in  the  ages.  The  story  and 
work  of  redemption  are  grand,  full  of  interest 
and  thrilling  incidents,  still  we  must  take  things 
in  their  order.  Some  stories  we  read  are  very 
fascinating.  The  plot  culminates,  the  charac- 
ters and  incidents  converge  toward  and  center 
in  the  hero.  At  such  a point  we  are  often  car- 
ried away  with  our  sympathy  for  the  hero  ; we 
become  anxious  for  him,  and  desirous  to  know 
the  issues,  and  so  are  tempted  to  skip  a few 
pages  and  get  at  the  end  unwisely  and  unlaw- 
fully. Thus  I think  many  are  carried  away  by 
a loving  desire  for  the  millennium;  they  become 


58 


ISRAEL  AND  POPULATION 


anxious  for  the  return  of  the  Hero  of  Redemp- 
tion ; they  skip  a few  pages  of  Providence,  and 
come  to  the  end  too  soon. 

These  days  are  preparative,  and  in  such  a pre- 
parative stage  we  are  warranted  to  look  for  the 
fulfillment  of  certain  prophecies;  for  prophecies, 
indeed,  of  such  a nature  and  character  that  no 
Bible  student  need  be  mistaken  as  to  the  time, 
place  and  conditions  of  fulfillment.  We  have 
called  your  attention  to  one  of  these  prophecies, 
and  pointed  out  to  you  how  the  same  was  liter- 
ally fulfilling  before  the  eyes  of  all.  God,  in 
olden  times,  made  promises  to  Abraham,  the 
patriarchs  and  their  seed.  These  promises  were 
nothing  more  nor  less  than  prophecies.  He  at- 
tested the  same  by  His  own  oath.  He  called  to 
witness  the  sun,  moon,  stars,  sea,  night,  day, 
the  seasons,  seedtime  and  harvest.  These  He 
called  His  ordinances.  These  ordinances  may 
depart  from  before  Him,  but  the  seed  of  Israel 
should  not  cease  to  be  a nation.  They  were  not 
only  to  be  a nation,  but  a company  of  nations. 
To  this  end,  in  the  latter  days,  they  were  to 
come  in  possession  of  the  isles  of  the  sea,  the 
coasts  of  the  earth,  waste  and  desolate  places  ; 
to  inherit  the  seed  of  the  Gentiles,  and  cause 
their  desolate  cities  to  be  filled.  They  were  to 
possess  and  rule  over  the  heathen.  In  the  latter 
days  they  were  to  possess  Edom  and  Esau,  that 
is  Turkey,  and  so  come  in  possession  of  their 
own  land,  Palestine.  Now  I call  you  to  wit- 


ISRAEL  AND  POPULATION. 


no 


ness,  and  ask  you  if  these  tilings  are  so  ? Be- 
fore your  eyes,  before  mine,  before  the  eyes  of 
all  the  world,  God  is  fulfilling  His  promises 
made  to  the  fathers. 

The  very  exceptions  to  the  sweeping  and  com- 
prehensive possessions  of  the  seed  of  Jacob  are 
pyramidal  witnesses  to  the  same.  The  house  of 
Judah  was  to  become  homeless,  without  a na- 
tion and  without  a government,  after  they  left 
Palestine ; but  to  be  a people  known  by  the 
race  feature  and  by  their  unwavering  adherence, 
attachment  and  fidelity  to  the  Mosaic  worship. 
This  exception  all  can  see,  and  none  can  truth- 
fully deny.  They  have  had  money  and  men 
enough  to  buy  and  rule  a nation,  but  as  yet  they 
have  none.  Their  talent,  their  ability  and  their 
money,  have  been  the  chief  factor  in  the  rule, 
prosperity  and  greatness  of  many  nations  in  the 
past  as  well  as  now.  And  the  second  concep- 
tion is  not  less  grand  and  conclusive.  Let  any 
one  inquire  what  was  to  be  the  portion  of  the 
tribe  of  Manasseh,  and  they  will  find  that  Man- 
asseh  was  to  be  a distinct  people,  a great  people ; 
for  so  said  the  dying  patriarch  Jacob.  Now 
such  a people,  a«great  people,  we  hold  Manasseh 
to  be  at  this  day  in  the  people  of  the  United 
States.  Some  sixty  colonies  England  has  over- 
run, established  or  conquered,  and  she  is  busy 
at  work  yet  conquering  and  gathering  in.  But 
is  it  not  remarkable  that  she  has  never  lost  one 
of  the  many  save  the  United  States  ? Will  any 


60 


ISRAEL  AND  POPULATION. 


one  give  an  earthly  reason  for  this  marvelous 
exception  ? I presume  no  one  can.  There  is, 
however,  a divine  reason.  Moses,  when  giving 
his  prophetic  benediction  to  the  tribes  of  Israel, 
gives  us  an  insight  into  this  question.  Speaking 
of  Joseph  and  the  wonderful  blessing  in  store 
for  his  sons  Ephraim  and  Masasseh,  he  says : 
“His  glory  is  like  the  firstling  of  his  bullock, 
and  his  horns  are  like  the  horns  of  unicorns  ; 
and  with  them  he  shall  push  the  people  together 
to  the  ends  of  the  earth  ; and  they  are  the  ten 
thousands  of  Ephraim , and  they  are  the  thou- 
sands of  Manasseh .” — Deut.  xxxiii.  17.  And 
further  light  is  thrown  on  this  subject  when  we 
notice  what  Isaiah  says  in  the  forty -ninth  chap- 
ter. The  children  of  Israel,  when  settled  in 
some  isles,  would  lose  a portion  of  themselves, 
and  still  the  “children  which  thou  shalt  have 
after  thou  has  lost  the  other , shall  say  again  in 
thine  ears,  the  place  is  too  strait  for  me,  give 
place  to  me  that  I may  dwell.”  The  simple  and 
natural  interpretation  of  such  a passage,  is  that 
the  isles  referred  to  were  the  British  isles.  The 
children  lost  refer  to  Manasseh,  the  Pilgrims  and 
Puritans  who  came  from  England.  And  the  cry 
for  more  room  after  they  have  left,  shall  lead 
England  to  look  for  lands  in  which  to  colonize 
her  surplus  population,  all  of  which  she  has 
done  and  is  doing. 

Surely  in  these  things  there  is  something  more 
than  chance.  Yes,  there  is  a divine  purpose 


ISRAEL  AND  POPULATION. 


61 


fulfilled.  Seeing,  then,  that  Gfod  will  put  the 
land  into  Israel’s  hand,  there  will  run  another 
blessing  parallel  with  this — namely,  a pecu- 
liar increase  of  the  seed,  or  children  of 
Israel,  so  that  they  may  occupy  and  control 
these  lands.  These  two  prophecies  are  to  be 
fulfilling  on  a parallel  line  at  the  same  time. 
Are  they  so  fulfilling  ? We  answer  yes  ; and 
the  answer  all  the  world  may  verify,  for  the 
facts  are  of  such  a nature  that  if  they  are  not 
so  fulfilling  it  can  be  very  easily  disproved. 

The  prophet  tells  us  in  the  text  that  the 
children  of  Israel  are  to  be  numerous — to  be 
numerous  in  an  extraordinary  degree — so  much 
so  that  it  shall  appear  partly  miraculous  when 
such  increase  is  compared  to  other  people  or 
judged  by  the  common  methods  of  reasoning. 
Hosea  had  three  children  ; the  first  a son.  He 
called  him  Jezreel.  This  son  was  set  for  a wit- 
ness that  God  would  cause  to  cease  the  house  of 
Israel  in  Palestine — that  Israel  should  cease  to 
be  a nation  for  a time.  This  idea  Isaiah  points 
out  under  the  type  of  an  abandoned  wife.  God 
styles  Himself  the  Husband  of  Israel,  and  that 
He  had  given  the  wife  a bill  of  divorcement. 
Thus  the  two  prophets  agree,  and  history  rati- 
fies both. 

Hosea’ s second  child  he  calls  Lo-ruliamah. 
She  was  set  for  a witness  that  God  would  take 
away  His  mercy  from  the  house  of  Israel  for  a 
time,  and  that  God  would  utterly  take  them 


62 


ISRAEL  AND  POPULATION. 


away  out  of  the  land.  So  he  did ; for  a few 
years  after  this  we  find  the  children  of  Israel 
were  carried  captive  into  Assyria  by  Shalman- 
eser, and  the  Assyrians  were  brought  and  put 
in  their  place.  And  from  these  Assyrians,  who 
were  planted  in  the  cities  and  country  left  by 
the  children  of  Israel,  we  get  the  Samaritans, 
who  were,  as  you  see,  not  Jews  nor  Israelites  by 
generation — they  were  manufactured  Jews  only. 
“And  the  Lord  removed  Israel  out  of  His  sight, 
as  He  had  said  by  all  His  servants  the  prophets. 
So  was  Israel  carried  away  out  of  their  own 
land  to  Assyria  unto  this  day” — 2 Kings  xvii.  23. 
During  this  captivity,  which  is  even  in  force  till 
now,  barren  Israel,  the  divorced  one,  was  to 
have  more  children  than  the  married  one — 
namely,  Judah. 

We  find  that  the  third  child  born  to  Hosea 
is  called  Lo-ammi,  meaning  ye  are  not  my 
people.  This  child  pre-figured  the  casting  out 
of  the  Jews  ; that  they  would  refuse  to  accept 
God  in  Christ,  and  He  therefore  would  reject 
them.  Thus  the  Jews  became  wanderers  from 
their  own  land.  And  the  land  rests  in  desola- 
tion, enjoying  her  Sabbath  of  rest,  while  her 
sons  and  daughters  are  being  chastised  and 
trained  for  their  return. 

The  time  will  come  when  God  will  call  Israel 
to  Him,  and  have  mercy  upon  her,  when  the  di- 
vorced one  shall  be  restored  to  her  husband. 
“And  it  shall  be  at  that  day,  saith  the  Lord, 


ISRAEL  AND  POPULATION. 


63 


that  thou  shall  call  me  Ishi,  and  shall  call  me 
no  more  Baali.” — Hos.  ii.  16.  Now  Ishi  means 
husband,  and  Baali  stands  for  Lord.  Saxons 
have  been  looked  upon  as  being  infidels  by  the 
rest  of  the  world.  The  Mohammedans  and  Budd- 
hists never  reckoned  the  Saxons  as  being  the 
sons  of  God ; and  Catholic  Europe  and  Greek 
Russia  have  looked  upon  England  as  infidel  and 
heretical.  And  the  Saxons  themselves  never 
went  so  far  in  their  knowledge  as  to  know  who 
they  were,  their  origin  and  work.  But  the 
prophet  says  : “It  shall  come  lo  pass  that  in 
the  place  where  it  was  said  unto  them , Ye  are 
not  my  people , there  it  shall  be  said  unto  them , 
Ye  are  the  sons  of  the  living  God.”  And  the 
time  will  come  when  Lo-ruhamali  shall  become 
Ru-hamah,  which  means  to  have  obtained  mercy. 
And  Lo-ammi  shall  become  Ammi,  which  means 
that  this  is  my  people.  And  Jezreel,  which  was 
a sign  of  dispersion,  shall  be  the  sign  of  gather- 
ing. “Then  shall  the  children  of  Judah  and 
the  children  of  Israel  be  gathered  together,  and 
appoint  themselves  one  head,  and  they  shall 
come  up  out  of  the  land  ; for  great  shall  be  the 
day  of  Jezreel.”  Then  the  Jews  (Ammi)  will 
call  the  Saxons  their  sister,  long  lost  but  found 
at  last.  The  Saxons  (Ru-hamah)  will  call  the 
Jews  their  brother,  those  whom  in  past  they 
have  hated  and  persecuted  ; and  thought  them- 
selves far  removed  from  Jewish  blood.  Now 
they  both  will  acknowledge  a common  genera- 


64 


ISRAEL  AND  POPULATION. 


tion,  and  Abraham  their  father.  And  one  with 
his  eyes  half  open  can  see  this  part  of  the 
prophecy  fulfilling.  The  Jews,  England  and 
United  States,  from  this  and  henceforth,  are  one 
in  interest,  policy  and  destiny. 

These  being  the  latter  days,  let  us  look  for  the 
signs  of  the  multiplying  of  the  seed  so  that  they 
be  as  the  sea  sands  God  promised  to  Abraham, 
saying  : “That  in  blessing  I will  bless  thee,  and 
in  multiplying  I will  multiply  thy  seed  as  the 
stars  of  heaven  and  as  the  sand  which  is  upon 
the  seashore ; and  thy  seed  shall  possess  the 
gate  of  his  enemies.” — Gen.  xxii.  17.  Old  Jacob 
foretold  that  Joseph  would  be  a fruitful  bough, 
whose  branches  would  run  over  the  wall — that 
is,  colonize.  This  increase  is  to  be  seen  in  two 
ways.  Let  me  direct  your  attention  to  one  of 
these  way^s,  in  a special  manner,  because  it  is  so 
singular  and  unique,  so  distinct  and  discernable. 
In  Jeremiah — xxx.  10, 11 — we  find  a remarkable 
statement:  11  Fear  not , 0 Israel , for  I am 

with  tliee  ! saith  the  Lord , to  save  thee.  Though 
I make  a full  end  of  all  nations  whither  I have 
scattered  thee , yet  will  I not  make  a full  end  of 
thee ; but  I will  correct  thee  in  measare , and 
will  not  leave  thee  altogether  unpunished.'''1 
That  Israel  has  been  punished  and  corrected  no 
one  will  deny  who  is  acquainted  with  her  his- 
tory and  sojourn  from  the  time  she  was  carried 
captive  to  this  day.  But  has  the  other  part  of 
the  saying  been  fulfilled!  We  answer  yes  ; as 


IS  K A EL  AND  POPULATION.  05 

the  law  of  colonization  has  progressed.  The  an- 
cient Britons  are  no  more ; Saxon  Israel  has 
entirely  supplanted  them  ; just  as  Manasseh  in 
the  United  States  is  supplanting  the  aborigines 
or  Indians.  They  perish  and  disappear  like 
snow  before  the  rising  sun.  Not  all  we  can  do 
on  the  line  of  legislation,  philanthropy  and  re- 
ligion, is  sufficient  to  stay  the  ravages  of  this 
long-ago  declared  decree  of  heaven.  Go  to  Can- 
ada, and  you  find  they  are  perishing ; in  Newr- 
foundland  they  are  entirely  gone,  and  in  every 
other  province  they  are  fast  disappearing,  save 
such  as  are  saved  by  incorporation,  by  marriage, 
and  salt- stayed  by  the  power  of  Christianity  ; 
but  both  these  remedies  are  only  temporal — they 
perish  in  spite  of  all  in  the  heated  atmosphere 
of  Israel’s  civilization.  Some  few  tribes  may 
hold  their  own  and  seem  to  increase,  but  such 
does  not  invalidate  the  evidence  of  the  decree. 
For  they  have  perished  in  such  numbers,  and 
so  uniformly,  when  in  contact  with  Israel,  that 
history  proclaims  the  decree  fulfilled. 

The  native  inhabitants  of  Van  Dieman,  called 
Tasmanians,  have  entirely  become  extinct.  The 
Maoris  of  New  Zealand  are  rapidly  diminishing. 
Fifty  years  ago  they  were  200,000  strong  ; now 
only  about  50,000.  In  a few  more  years  they 
will  be  gone.  The  same  is  true  in  all  the  other 
Australian  provinces.  The  same  is  true  of  many 
isles  of  the  sea,  also  of  the  African  colonies.  In 
these  things,  so  exceptional,  we  can  surely  say, 


66 


ISRAEL  AND  POPULATION. 


with  the  magicians  of  old,  who  contended  against 
Moses,  “This  is  the  finger  of  God.”  Thus  we 
see  Israel  increasing,  by  the  law  of  diminution 
going  on  among  the  Gentiles.  Israel  in  the  lat- 
ter day  was  to  be  blessed  with  plenty  in  the 
orchard,  stall  and  field,  “For  I will  lay  no  more 
famine  upon  you,  saith  the  Lord.”  The  past 
year  we  learn  that  some  10,000,000  of  Chinese 
jierished  in  famine.  India,  in  one  part,  has  been 
greatly  reduced  in  number  by  the  same  scourge. 
This  country  will  be  partly  protected  from  the 
operation  of  this  law — for  no  doubt  a large  por- 
tion are  from  Abraham.  ‘ ‘ But  unto  the  sons  of 
the  concubines,  which  Abraham  had,  Abraham 
gave  gifts,  and  sent  them  away  from  Isaac,  his 
son,  while  he  yet  lived,  eastward,  unto  the 
east  country.” — Gen.  xxv.  6.  This  same  scourge 
does  not  follow  the  colonizing  of  other  nations. 
It  did  not  follow  Spain,  nor  the  Dutch,  nor 
France. 

If  you  turn  to  the  prophets  you  will  soon 
learn  how  they  are  to  increase  in  the  latter  days ; 
not  by  a comparison  on  the  line  of  diminution 
only,  but  in  and  from  themselves.  “Behold, 
the  days  come,  saith  the  Lord,  that  I will  sow' 
the  house  of  Israel  and  the  house  of  Judah  with 
the  seed  of  man  and  beast. ”-Jer.  xxxi.  27.  Have 
these  days  come  ? We  again  say  yes  ; and  these 
kind  of  prophecies  are  being  fulfilled  in  this  day, 
in  so  special  a manner  as  to  make  certain  the 
times  wre  live  in.  Through  Israel,  Judah  and 


ISRAEL  AND  POPULATION. 


67 


Manasseh,  the  earth  is  to  find  the  equilibrium  of 
peace.  The  Jews  will  furnish  the  money,  for 
in  the  increasing  ascendancy  and  multiplying 
power  and  authority  of  England  and  America, 
the  J ews  will  draw  closer  to  them  and  invest 
more  and  more  their  money  with  them,  because 
of  greater  security  and  profit.  The  balance  of 
power  and  even  compulsion  will  be  in  the  hands 
of  England  and  America,  to  force  arbitration  on 
disputing  nations,  and  they  will  do  so,  having 
set  the  precedents  themselves  in  the  Alabama 
and  fish  treaties.  At  present,  many  will  refuse 
this  idea,  and  point  to  the  famous  Monroe  doc- 
trine. Now  that  doctrine  has  had  its  time, 
nearly  , and  it  has  served  a good  purpose  for 
the  country.  The  mercantile  growth,  and  gen- 
eral producing  power  of  this  country  will  cause 
us  to  abandon  our  selfish  protection  policy  ; for 
of  all  other  people  on  the  face  of  the  earth,  we 
will  want  free  trade  ; for  we  will  have  the  great- 
est surplus  of  mercantile  and  agricultural  pro- 
ductions, and  in  a short  time  our  very  position 
and  ability  will  push  away  all  competitors. 
Once  our  mercantile  and  agricultural  interests 
are  cast  in  other  nations,  we  will  then  have  an 
interest  in  their  wars  and  peace,  and  will  be  led 
to  interfere. 

The  chief  way  in  which  the  balance  of  power 
will  fall  into  English  and  American  hands  is  in 
the  fulfilling  of  the  blessings  of  the  text : the 
multiplying  of  this  people,  first  by  natural  in- 


68 


ISRAEL  AND  POPULATION. 


crease,  and  second  by  incorporation  and  absorp- 
tion. Look  at  this  law  of  absorption ; liow  vigor- 
ous and  sure.  If  you  turn  into  a field  of  grass 
fowls,  pigs,  horses  and  cows,  you  get  chicken 
meat,  pork,  horseflesh  and  beef.  The  individu- 
alism in  each  creature  absorbs  and  converts  the 
same  field  of  grass  into  themselves.  So  into 
this  country  are  coming  people  of  every  nation 
and  race,  but  the  individualism  of  Manasseli 
will  in  due  time  make  them  all  Manassites.  The 
children  of  the  Russians,  Poles,  Spanish  and  so 
on,  become  American  in  taste,  manners  and 
sympathies.  They  are  been  grafted  into  the 
tree  of  Manasseh. 

But  look  at  the  law  of  increase  naturally. 
Take  the  population  of  several  countries  as 
given  in  the  last  census,  and  carefully  note  the 
relative  increase,  and  how  long  it  takes  each 
nation  to  double  its  number.  Russia,  eiglity-six 
millions,  doubles  every  100  years  ; Germany, 
forty-two  millions,  doubles  every  100  years  ; 
Turkey,  forty-seven  millions,  doubles  every  550 
years ; Austria,  thirty- seven  millions,  doubles 
every  100  years ; France,  thirty-six  millions, 
doubles  every  140  years  : Great  Britain,  thirty- 
three  millions,  doubles  every  55  years  ; United 
States,  forty  millions,  doubles  every  25  years ; 
Italy,  twenty-seven  millions,  doubles  every  125 
years  ; Egypt,  seventeen  millions,  doubles  every 
150  years;  Spain,  sixteen  millions,  doubles  every 
112  years ; English  colonies,  ten  millions,  dou- 


ISRAEL  AND  POPULATION. 


09 


bles  every  25  years.  Now  make  a calculation 
for  100  years,  from  1878  to  1978,  and  see  how 
these  countries  stand  in  population  and  tlieir 
relative  position.  Russia  will  have  one  hundred 
and  seventy-two  millions,  Germany  eighty-four, 
Turkey  fifty-six,  Austria  seventy  four,  France 
fifty-nine,  Great  Britain  one  hundred  and  thirty- 
seven,  Italy  forty-one,  Egypt  twenty-nine,  Spain 
twenty-eight,  United  States  six  hundred  and 
forty,  and  the  English  colonies  one  hundred 
and  sixty — and  that  is  not  reckoning  the  na- 
tives in  the  colonies,  only  the  decendants  of  the 
English.  Of  course  in  a country  like  India,  the 
natives  will  be  a considerable  number,  and  they 
might  properly  be  reckoned  in  with  the  colonial 
items,  and  so  swell  the  number  of  Israel’s 
power. 

Now  these  figures  show  a wonderful  conclu- 
sion. In  simple  language  we  find  that  in  1978, 
the  English-speaking  race,  or  Israelites,  will 
number  937  millions,  while  all  of  Russia,  Ger- 
many, Turkey,  Austria,  France,  Italy,  Egypt 
and  Spain,  will  only  number  543  millions.  Where 
then,  we  ask,  will  be  the  balance  of  power  ? And 
why  should  this  certain  law  come  into  opera- 
tion at  this  time,  if  it  be  not  the  blessing  fore- 
told by  the  prophets?  And  can  we  not  see  that 
these  are  the  latter  days,  and  that  God  is  fulfill- 
ing his  promises  to  Israel  ? 

The  blood  of  Abraham  and  the  faith  of  Abra- 
ham have  been  wonderfully  preserved  and  pro- 


70 


ISRAEL  AND  POPULATION. 


jected  down  through  the  centuries  with  telling 
effect.  And  on  this  line  the  Darwinian  theory 
; of  election  is  very  true,  for  the  survival  of  the 
fittist  is  the  proclaimed  law  of  heaven.  There 
is  power  in  land  possession,  and  there  is  power 
in  number,  and  if  these  two  factors  maintain 
their  force  for  one  hundred  years,  then  we  infer 
of  certainty  that  the  scepter  of  rule  and  destiny 
of  the  world  will  be  in  the  hands  of  Israel,  unless 
the  laws  of  nature  are  reversed,  and  the  promi- 
ses of  God  fail.  The  word  of  God  cannot  fail 
or  return  unto  Him  void ; it  must  accomplish 
that  wliereunto  He  sent  it  and  prosper  in  things 
designed,  or  as  Jeremiah — xxiii.  20 — says,  “The 
anger  of  the  Lord  shall  not  return  until  He  lias 
executed  and  till  He  has  performed  the  thoughts 
of  His  heart ; in  the  latter  days  ye  shall  consider 
it  perfectly.” 


ISRAEL  AND  LANGUAGE. 


Discourse,  5. 


LATTER  DAY  PROPHETIC  PROMISES  — TIME  OF 
ISRAEL’S  REVIVAL — PYRAMID  TESTIMONY — 
BRITISH  ISLAND  POPULATION  IN  1882 — AFFI- 
NITY BETWEEN  ENGLISH  AND  HEBREW — CELL 
OF  THE  HONEY  BEE — ORIGIN  OF  LANGUAGE — 
LION  OF  LANGUAGES — FOREIGN  TESTIMONY — 
ALL  TONGUES  INDIGENOUS  BUT  ENGLISH — THE 
PRE- MILLENNIAL  TOKENS. 


Text— Zeplianiali  iii*  9. 

“ For  then  will  / turn  to  the  people  a pure  language , that  they  may 
all  call  upon  the  name  of  the  Lord,  to  serve  Him  with  one 
consent 


IN  the  last  two  discourses  we  called  your  at- 
tention to  two  prophecies  that  are  now  ful- 
filling ; they  are  on  parellel  lines  of  time  and 
territory.  The  first  had  reference  to  the  rapid 
accumulation  of  the  lands  of  the  earth  by  Israel. 
Accepting  the  Anglo-Saxons  as  being  the  child- 
ren and  descendants  of  Jacob,  it  naturally  fol- 
lows that  the  prophetic  blessings  and  promises 
made  to  Abraham,  Isaac,  Jacob  and  their  heirs, 
should  find  a fulfillment  in  these,  the  latter 


72 


ISRAEL  ASD  LANGUAGE. 


days,  and  that  such  fulfillment  should  be  found 
in  the  English  nation,  among  the  Jews  and  in 
the  United  States.  It  is  easy  to  see  and  believe 
that  the  curses  prophetically  pronounced  on 
Judah  and  Israel  have  been  fulfilled,  especially 
on  the  house  of  J udali.  The  promises  to  the 
house  of  Israel  are  now  being  grandly  realized. 
England  is  in  possession  of  the  isles  of  the 
sea,  the  coasts  of  the  earth,  the  waste  and  deso- 
late places,  the  heathen  is  her  inheritance,  and 
she  is  inheriting  the  seed  of  the  Gentiles,  and 
causing  their  desolate  cities  to  be  inhabited. 
From  the  taking  of  Jamaica,  by  General  Penn, 
in  1655,  to  the  peaceful  cession  of  Cyprus,  the 
course  of  this  little  island  nation  has  been  on- 
ward and  upward.  And  if  her  conquests  and 
progress  are  not  amenable  to  prophecy,  for  an 
interpretation,  then  the  wonder  is  still  greater. 
The  facts  are  with  us,  and  must  be  accounted 
for  some  way.  The  second  had  reference  to  the 
multitudinous  seed  of  Israel  in  the  latter  days. 
Till  two  hundred  years  ago  the  Anglo-Saxons 
were  not  in  this  respect  distinct  from  other 
races  ; indeed,  for  centuries  they  were  distinct 
rather  for  their  weakness  in  multiplying  power 
and  number.  Many  other  races  have  exceeded 
them  in  this  particular.  But,  no  sooner  do  we 
come  abreast  of  the  latter  day  time  than  we  find 
the  laws  of  centuries  changed.  In  thermal 
science  it  is  an  axiom  that  heat  expands  all 
bodies,  and  of  course  that  cold  contracts  them. 


ISRAEL  AND  LANGUAGE. 


73 


But  to  this  general  rule  there  is  one  beautiful 
and  benevolent  exception  : it  is  in  water  ; for  if 
we  start  with  water  at  thirty-two  degrees,  we 
find  the  remarkable  phenomenon  of  cold  ex- 
panding all  below  thirty-two,  and  heat  expand- 
ing all  above.  If  we  take  water  at  212  degrees 
and  withdraw  from  it  the  heat,  it  will  continue 
to  contract  till  we  reach  tliirty-two ; then  the 
law  is  reversed,  and  the  water  expands.  Now 
the  reversion  of  this  law,  at  this  particular  point, 
is  wonderfully  expressive  of  divine  forethought 
and  benevolence.  By  such  a change  ice  is  made 
to  float  in  water,  and  so  save  our  lakes,  streams 
and  wells,  from  being  frozen  solid.  As  this  ex- 
ception is  to  thermal  science,  so  is  the  law  of 
reproduction  to  Israel  in  this  day.  This  people, 
who  have  been  behind  other  races,  now,  at  an 
appointed  time,  step  to  the  front.  The  law 
seems  to  be  reversed,  and  that  too  for  a benevo- 
lent purpose — for  the  very  purpose  that  they 
might  be  able  to  fulfill  the  mission  assigned 
them  in  these  last  days  to  occupy  the  new  lands 
and  evangelize  the  world.  One  prophecy  seems 
to  call  for  the  other,  for  what  would  be  the  use 
of  the  lands  without  the  people,  or  the  people 
without  the  lands  ? It  is  an  amazing  fact  that 
Queen  Victoria  should  bear  rule  over  one-third 
of  the  population  of  the  whole  earth,  and  that 
Israel,  including  Manasseh,  should  own  one- 
fourth  of  the  land. 

But  this  amazing  fact  is  made  reasonable  when 


74 


ISKAEL  AND  LANGUAGE. 


we  accept  the  Queen  as  being  of  the  seed  of 
David,  and  an  heir  to  the  promises  attaching  to 
David’ s throne,  and  when  we  accept  the  Anglo- 
Saxons  as  being  the  ten  lost  tribes  of  Israel. 
Then  prophecy,  Providence  and  facts,  are  a 
trinity — they  are  one  sublime  whole.  God, 
speaking  through  Moses,  said  He  would  punish 
to  reform  Israel  for  seven  times  — and  seven 
times,  prophetically  understood,  means  2,520 
years.  If  we  allow  that  Israel  were  carried 
captive  in  the  year  725  before  Christ,  then  Is- 
rael would  come  into  freedom  or  be  reformed 
about  1795,  because  if  we  add  725  to  1795,  we 
get  2520.  Up  to  this  point  they  were  to  be  robbed 
of  their  children  and  to  be  few  in  number.  (See 
Lev.  xxvi.  22. ) In  the  year  1795  Israel  were  to 
be  relieved  from  these  curses  ; and  about  this 
time  this  special  law  of  reproduction  came  into 
operation.  Or,  if  we  take  the  lamentations  of 
Hosea  vi.  1-3  : “Come  and  let  us  return  unto 
the  Lord,  for  He  hath  torn,  and  He  will  heal  us  ; 
He  hath  smitten,  and  He  will  bind  us  up  ; after 
two  days  will  He  revive  us  ; in  the  third  day  He 
will  raise  us  up,  and  we  shall  live  in  His  sight. 
Then  shall  we  know  if  we  follow  on  to  know  the 
Lord.  His  going  forth  is  prepared  as  the  morn- 
ing, and  He  shall  come  unto  us  as  the  rain,  as 
the  latter  and  former  rain  unto  the  earth.”  By 
this  passage,  our  day  and  the  special  providences 
of  this  period  are  mournfully  and  graphically 
referred  to.  Here  a day  stands  for  a thousand 


ISRAEL  AND  LANGUAGE. 


75 


years,  “for  a day  with  the  Lord  is  as  a thousand 
years  so  that  when  two  thousand  years  should 

have  passed  by,  Ephraim,  who  stands  for  Israel, 
was  to  be  revived  and  blessed  with  fruitful- 
ness sometime  during  the  third  day,  or  thousand 
years.  In  ancient  time  a day  was  counted  when 
it  had  a majority,  that  is  when  it  had  passed 
the  half.  The  prophet  here  says  we  were  to  be 
revived,  or  raised  up,  on  the  third  day.  So,  if 
you  again  take  these  three  thousand  year- days, ' 
you  will  find  that  two  of  them  are  to  be  com- 
pletely passed,  and  during  the  third  we  were  to 
be  raised.  The  number  we  have  given,  2520, 
exactly  meets  the  interpretation — 2000  complete, 
and  520  make  a majority  for  the  third  day  by  the 
twenty  over  the  half.  These  prophetic  figures 
tally  well  with  the  existing  state  of  things.  About 
the  beginning  of  this  century  England  assumed 
to  lead  the  world.  It  is  a remarkable  coinci- 
dence that,  in  the  last  century,  the  question  of 
how  to  multiply  the  population  was  a subject 
of  debate  and  legislation  in  the  British  parlia- 
ment. But  what  legislation  failed  to  do,  God 
in  His  providence  did  at  the  appointed  time. 

It  is  a curious  fact,  and  well  worth  noticing, 
that  the  famous  witness  of  the  Lord  of  Hosts  in 
Egypt,  the  great  pyramid,  forecasts  what  the 
number  of  Israel  and  Judah  would  be  in  the 
year  1882.  As  Israel  is  symbolized  in  the  grand 
gallery,  it  is  found  that  the  cubic  contents  of  the 
same,  in  inches,  is  about  36,000,000 ; thus  by 


76 


ISRAEL  AND  LANGUAGE. 


some  this  is  interpreted  to  mean  that  inches 
stand  for  individuals,  and  if  so,  then  England 
proper  will  have  this  number  in  1880.  Whether 
this  is  a true  interpretation  or  not,  we  all  know 
that  these  figures  will  be  about  right.  The 
queen’s  chamber  of  the  pyramid  symbolizes  the 
number  and  condition  of  the  Jews. 

From  these  two  prophecies,  so  sublimely  ful- 
filling, let  me  invite  your  attention  to  another 
that  is  now  maturing.  It,  too,  is  parallel  with 
the  other  two.  W e refer  to  the  peculiar  growth, 
power  and  progress  of  the  English  language 
After  Israel  went  into  captivity  they  were  to 
lose  their  language  and  take  or  form  another. 
“ For  with  stammering  lips  and  another  ton- 
gue will  He  speak  to  this  peopled — Is.  xxviii. 
11 . We  will  all  agree  that  the  English  language 
is  not  the  Hebrew  ; and  if  we  are  Israelites,  then 
indeed  God  is  speaking  to  us  in  another  tongue, 
for  few  of  us  read  His  word  in  Hebrew.  It  is 
read  to  the  millions  in  the  English  ; hence  the 
millions  hear  God  speak  to  them  in  another 
tongue  than  that  of  Hebrew.  Between  the  Eng- 
glish  and  Hebrew  languages  there  is  an  intimate 
relation,  especially  back  a few  years,  before  the 
English  had  grown  so  much.  The  Hebrew  was 
a very  limited  language  ; not  numbering  more 
than  7,000  words.  The  English  is  now  said  to 
number  about  80,000.  The  most  lavish  writer 
does  not  use  over  10,000  ; the  common  average 
is  about  3,000’.  In  the  English  we  have  not  less 


ISRAEL  AND  LANGUAGE. 


77 


than  1,000  Hebrew  roots.  This,  comparing  the 
languages  a few  years  back,  is  a large  percent- 
age. In  names  of  persons  and  places  the  He- 
brew is  very  prominent  in  England 

I take  it  for  a fact  that  language  is  of  divine 
origin.  Men  have  written  on  the  origin  of  lan- 
guage from  every  standpoint ; the  majority  of 
them  trying  to  account  for  its  existence  without 
allowing  so  noble  a source.  The  first  man,  Adam, 
I believe,  could  talk  as  easy  and  naturally  as  he 
could  see  and  hear  and  taste.  Speech  was  a 
part  of  his  endowment.  There  is  nothing  more 
wonderful  in  a man  talking  than  a bird  singing, 
save  that  speech  is  a higher  order  of  utterance. 
Dumb  nature  performs  marvels  every  day  as 
mighty  and  wonderful  as  man’ s talking.  The 
honey-bee  builds  its  cells,  ignorant  of  the  fact 
that  such  construction  is  the  solution  of  a prob- 
lem which  had  troubled  men  for  centuries  to 
solve.  At  what  point  shall  certain  lines  meet 
so  as  to  give  the  most  room  with  the  least  ma- 
terial and  have  the  greatest  strength  in  a build- 
ing % This  problem  is  said  to  have  been  worked 
out  by  a Mr.  McLaughland,  a noted  Scotch 
mathematician,  who  arrived  at  his  conclusion  by 
laborious  and  careful  fluxionary  calculation.  To 
his  surprise,  and  the  surprise  of  the  world,  such 
lines  and  such  a building  were  found  in  the  com- 
mon bee  cell.  Now  I hold  that  the  same  Creator 
who  gave  to  the  bee  the  mathematical  instinct 
could  endow  man  with  the  instinct  of  speech. 


78  ISRAEL  AND  LANGUAGE. 

Even  to  animal  instinct  we  find  a cer- 
tain variation  and  permitted  latitude  in  what 
is  called  adaptive  instinct.  So  in  man  we 
find  this  same  instinct  of  adaptation  in  a higher 
sense.  The  instinct  comes  into  play  when  we 
suppose  a number  of  persons  separated  from 
others,  each  living  in  different  quarters  of  the 
globe.  In  such  a condition,  though  of  the  same 
language  when  first  separated,  they  would  not 
remain  so  long — that  is,  in  the  primitive  state  of 
societies.  Thus,  among  the  tribes  of  Africa,  at 
this  day,  languages  are  widening  and  varying 
from  a once  common  center.  So  Israel  in  cap- 
tivity would  lose  the  Hebrew  gradually.  The 
language  of  the  people  among  whom  they  set- 
tled was  the  Sanskrit,  from  which  a score  of 
languages  have  come — the  German,  French  and 
Italian,  Saxon  and  others.  The  Saxon  of  to-day, 
compared  with  the  Saxon  of  2,000  years  ago,  is 
very  different ; so  much  so  that  for  us  to  learn 
and  speak  it  would  be  equal  to  learning  a new 
language.  Thus  the  English  language  is  a thing 
of  growth.  In  the  year  1362  the  Saxon  was 
made  the  court  language  of  England.  From 
that  time  onward  its  growth  has  been  wonderful. 

The  prophetic  outlines  and  divine  place  of 
this  language  may  be  seen  in  the  germal  foun- 
dations, which  give  unto  it  such  vigor,  tenacity 
and  capabilities  of  expansion.  All  the  features 
of  this  language  g*o  to  show  that  it  is  destined 
to  be  the  medium  of  a world’ s intercourse,  and 


ISRAEL  AND  LANGUAGE. 


79 


that  it  very  suitably  belongs  to  Israel,  in  whose 
hand  will  be  the  destiny  of  the  world.  It  is  the 
lion  of  languages.  It  will  grow  anywhere,  and 
by  reason  of  its  tenacity  when  once  it  gets  a 
foothold  it  abides.  It  is  peculiarly  suited  to 
the  humanities  of  every  race,  clime  and  con- 
dition ; there  is  no  limit  to  its  expansive  adapt- 
ability. It  is  in  a special  manner  voracious  in 
the  destruction  of  other  languages ; wherever 
it  goes,  it  sounds  the  death-knell  of  all  the  rest. 

Soon  as  this  language  entered  Britain,  it  be- 
gan its  work  of  destruction.  Before  it  has  dis- 
appeared the  real  British,  the  Cymric  or  Welsh, 
Erse  or  Irish,  the  Gaelic  of  Scotland,  and  the 
Manx  of  the  isle  of  Man.  The  British  Keltic  is 
entirely  gone  ; the  rest  are  only  local.  Besides 
these  it  ousted  from  the  island  the  Norse,  the 
Norman-French  and  several  other  tongues  that 
tried  to  transplant  themselves  on  English  soil. 
It  is  at  work  in  every  part  of  the  globe  planting 
itself  and  displacing  others.  A few  years 
ago  French  was  the  language  best  suited  for  a 
traveler  on  the  continent.  But  this  has  changed. 
Now  the  English  is  by  far  superior.  And  why 
is  it  that  the  English  is  supplanting  all  others  1 
To  answer  such  a question  in  a scientific  way, 
one  cannot  do  better  than  quote  from  the  great 
and  learned  German  philologist,  Prof.  Grimm, 
of  Berlin.  He  says  of  it : “It  has  a thorough 

power  of  expression,  such  as  no  other  language 
ever  possessed.  It  may  truly  be  called  a world- 


80 


ISRAEL  AND  LANGUAGE, 


language,  for  no  other  can  compare  with  it  in 
richness,  reasonableness  and  solidity  of  texture.” 
But,  perhaps  the  most  definite  and  distinct  tes- 
timony given  by  a foreigner  touching  the  future 
ubiquity  of  the  Anglo-Saxon  race  and  language, 
is  that  put  forward  by  Prevost  Paradol,  a 
learned  Frenchman.  He  says  “that  neither 
Russia  nor  united  Germany,  supposing  that  they 
should  attain  the  highest  fortune,  can  pretend 
to  impede  that  current  of  things,  nor  prevent 
that  solution,  relatively  near  at  hand,  of  the 
long  rivalry  of  European  races  for  the  ultimate 
colonization  and  domination  of  the  universe. 
The  world  will  not  be  Russian,  nor  German,  nor 
French,  alas!  nor  • Spanish.”  He  concludes 
that  it  will  be  Anglo-Saxon. 

A British  poet  has  presented  in  poetry  the 
special  features  of  several  of  the  European 
languages,  which  we  give  : 

“Greek’s  a harp  we  love  to  hear; 

Latin  is  a trumpet  clear ; 

Spanish  like  an  organ  swells ; 

Italian  rings  its  bridal  bells ; 

France,  with  many  a frolic  mien. 

Tunes  her  sprightly  violin  ; 

Loud  the  German  rolls  his  drum 
When  Russia’s  clashing  cymbals  come ; 

But  Britain’s  sons  may  well  rejoice, 

For  English  is  the  human  voice.” 

There  are  eight  languages  in  the  bounds  of 
Christian  civilization  that  may  be  accounted 
powerful,  because  they  are  the  tongues  of  vig- 


ISRAEL  AND  LANGUAGE. 


81 


* 

orous  people ; they  are  the  English,  Russian, 
German,  French,  Spanish,  Italian,  Portuguese 
and  Scandinavian.  But  of  these  all  are  indige- 
nous, except  the  English,  so  that  they  die  if 
transplanted.  Look  at  this  country  and  behold 
what  a cemetery  it  is  for  languages.  Once  the 
French  had  strong  hold  and  promised  to  abide 
here  ; but  it  is  now  nearly  gone,  even  from  the 
State  of  Louisiana  and  Canada,  the  last  places 
of  retreat. 

If  we  take  note  of  the  population  according  to 
these  several  languages,  we  shall  see  the  pro- 
phetic future  of  the  English.  It  is  spoken  by 
about  ninety  millions,  Russian  seventy-five, 
German  fifty  six,  French  forty,  Spanish  thirty- 
eight,  Italian  twenty-nine,  Portuguese  fourteen, 
and  Scandinavian  nine.  Within  the  control  of 
the  governments  of  these  languages  we  find  Eng- 
land to  have  rule  over  255,000,000  people,  who 
do  not,  as  yet  speak  English,  and  we  find  that 
the  other  seven  have  only  seventy -five  millions 
outside  of  themselves ; here  is  an  important 
difference.  If  we  look  at  them  by  territorial 
limits,  leaving  out  Russia,  we  find  the  English 
language  to  own  13,382,686  square  miles,  Ger- 
many 449,684,  French  571,578,  Spanish  4,694,- 
811,  Italian  114,466,  Portuguese  4,028,311,  and 
Scandinavian  1,308,830.  The  aggregate  number 
of  square  miles  possessed  by  these  six  lan- 
guages, is  11,167,620,  which  altogether,  you  see, 
own  2,215,066  miles  square  less  than  the  Eng- 


82 


ISRAEL  AND  LANGUAGE. 


lish.  The  balance  itself  is  more  than  Germany, 
France  and  Spain  put  together.  The  English 
language  is  divided  only  into  two  governments, 
but  the  other  six  are  divided  into  twenty-six,  all 
of  which  governments  are  bitter  one  toward  the 
other ; each  trying  to  supplant  one  another, 
while  England  and  the  United  States  are  at 
peace,  and  will  ever  remain  so.  In  one  hundred 
years  from  now  the  English  language  will  be 
spoken  by  a thousand  million  people.  Thus  we 
need  no  stretch  of  fancy  to  see  that  what  the 
prophet  speaks  of  in  the  text  will  be  accom- 
plished in  due  time. 

This  language  will  soon  be  universal ; by 
common  consent  it  will  become  the  language  of 
the  world.  All  the  changes  going  on  among 
nations  forecast  its  ubiquity.  China,  by  an  im- 
perial decree,  has  just  added  to  her  language 
700  English  words.  Her  sons  by  the  thousand 
are  with  us,  and  by  the  thousand  they  are  learn- 
ing our  mother  tongue.  The  Japanese,  till  a 
few  years  ago,  carried  on  their  foreign  corres- 
pondence through  the  Dutch,  but  now  they 
have  changed  to  the  English.  Besides,  in  the 
50,000  schools  in  Japan  English  is  being  taught. 
If  science  has  an  answer  for  this  strange  phe- 
nomenon, so  have  we.  Ours  is,  that  it  is  the 
will  of  heaven.  Confusion  of  tongues  came  at 
Babel  as  a punishment.  By  this  means  Heaven 
scattered  the  unwilling  descendants  of  Noah. 
When  Noah  came  forth  from  the  ark  God  bade 


ISBAEL  AND  LANGUAGE. 


83 


him  multiply  and  replenish  the  earth  ; that  is, 
fill  it  up.  Babel,  however,  was  built  as  a monu- 
ment of  centralization,  for  the  builders  gave  as 
a reason  for  building  it,  “Lest  we  be  scattered 
abroad  upon  the  face  of  the  earth.”  By  a con- 
fusion of  tongues  they  were  scattered.  Since 
then  we  have  had  some  1,500  distinct  languages 
and  some  3,500  colloquials,  or  say  5,000  different 
forms  of  speech.  At  the  present  time  600  of 
the  primary  are  dead,  so  that  there  are  about 
900  languages  now  spoken  on  all  the  earth,  with 
about  2,500  colloquials. 

When  these  means  have  answered  their  end, 
namely,  to  make  us  occupy  all  parts  of  the 
earth,  then  they  will  die  out.  It  then  follows 
that  as  the  world  fills  languages  must  disappear. 
So  they  do.  The  English  and  German  were  the 
last  languages  to  come  into  existence.  No  new 
ones  are  now  being  made.  Alphabets  are  in- 
creasing, because  missionaries  are  reducing 
spoken  languages  among  the  heathen  into  a 
written  form.  The  Bible  is  translated  into  two 
hundred  different  tongues.  This  itself  will  only 
lead  the  millions  back  to  English.  All  ship 
papers  are  now  made  out  in  English  excepting 
the  French,  and  no  doubt  they  will  soon  have  to 
follow  in  the  wake. 

The  day  of  pentecost  foreshadowed  the  univer- 
sality of  some  language.  Pentecost  was  a type, 
and  the  English  is  the  ante-type.  The  strangers 
from  Phrygia,  Pamphylia,  Libya,  Pontus  and 


84 


ISRAEL  AND  LANGUAGE. 


Cappadocia,  mingled  with  the  Partliians,  Medes, 
Elamites,  Cretes  and  Arabians.  They  all  heard 
the  gospel  in  their  own  tongue.  The  different 
tongues  made  a wall  of  division,  making  them 
strangers  one  with  another;  but  the  Holy  Ghost 
took  away  this  wall  and  they  were  all  face  to 
face,  able  to  understand  one  another.  The  same 
power  that  here  multiplied  the  gift  of  tongues 
— giving  to  some  several — surely  could  give  to 
Adam  one.  Away  with  a faith  that  cannot  give 
God  credit  with  being  the  author  of  language. 

No  sooner  do  we  see  England  in  guardian 
possession  of  Syria  than  the  idea  enters  into  the 
scheme  of  reform  of  extending  the  English  lan- 
guage. The  board  of  directors  of  the  Syrian 
Protestant  college  at  Beyrout  have  shown  their 
appreciation  of  the  new  era  of  British  influence 
by  a recent  vote,  which  is  to  the  effect  that  on 
the  first  of  January,  1879,  all  instruction  in  the 
college  shall  be  through  the  English  language. 
The  Arabic  will  only  be  taught  as  any  other 
dead  language.  This  remarkable  action  shows 
that  British  influence  in  Syria  is  hereafter  to  be 
more  than  simply  diplomatic  ; it  is  to  be  an  all- 
pervading  and  controlling  power,  affecting  every 
interest  of  society.  Truly  another  pentecostal 
day  is  drawing  nigh — a day  when  all  the  world 
shall  hear  the  gospel  in  the  language  of  Israel. 
In  all  these  things  we  see  the  lively  tokens,  and 
pre- millennial  agencies  hastening  on  the  day  of 
the  Lord. 


ISRAEL  AND  GENTILE  FULLNESS. 


Discourse , 6 . 


MEANING  OF  GENTILE  FULLNESS — BLESSINGS 
THROUGH  JUDAH  AND  EPHRAIM — BEST  RE- 
LIGION— JEWS  OUTWITTED — WHY  BENJAMIN 
WAS  KEPT  AT  JERUSALEM — FRENCH  PROTES- 
TANTISM—GENTILE  FULLNESS  CONTEMPOR- 
ARY WITH  TO-DAY — WHAT  IT  IS — EXCEP- 
TIONAL TURKEY. 


Text— Romans  ii*  12  Z 

“ Now  if  the  fall  of  them  be  the  riches  of  the  world , and  the 
diminishing  of  them  the  riches  of  the  Gentiles , how  much 
more  their  fullness D 


AUL,.  the  author  of  this  epistle  to  the 
Romans,  tells  us  that  he  was  an  Israelite 
of  the  seed  of  Abraham  and  of  the  tribe  of  Ben- 
jamin. The  fact  so  conveyed  it  is  necessary 
that  we  keep  in  mind,  if  we  would  interpret 
aright  this  epistle.  He  introduces  to  our  notice 
three  parties : the  Jews,  who  include  at  this 
time  the  tribes  of  Judah  and  Levi ; the  Israel- 
ites, who  embraced  the  tribe  of  Benjamin  ; and 


86 


ISRAEL  AND  GENTILE  FULLNESS. 


the  other  nine  tribes  that  had  been  in  cap- 
tivity for  about  eight  hundred  years — the  whole 
together  are  generally  known  as  the  ten  lost 
tribes.  In  the  third  party  we  have  the  Gentiles. 
This  word  gentile  usually  denotes  and  includes 
the  non- Jewish  nations  and  people.  The  Hebrew 
word  goyim,  in  early  Bible  history,  was  equiv- 
alent to  our  word  nation.  It  finally  began  to 
denote  any  people  who  • were  not  of  the  sacred 
seed  of  Abraham.  The  Greek  word  so  rendered 
is  ethnos , which  means  a multitude  or  nation. 
In  the  New  Testament  another  word  is  some- 
times used  in  a more  limited  sense,  namely, 
hellenes , which  is  translated  Greeks.  Ignorance 
of  these  three  parties,  their  place  in  Providence, 
and  relation  one  to  the  other,  has  given  rise  to 
much  needless  controversy  and  division  in  the 
domain  of  theology.  Men  have  argued  for  an 
election  and  a reprobation,  laying  great  stress  on 
* the  ninth,  tenth  and  eleventh  chapters  of  Rom 
ans,  that  is  in  no  wise  taught.  The  election 
Paul  deals  with  is  a literal  one,  having  reference 
to  a distinct  people,  whom  God  had  elected  for 
a special  work  in  this  world.  This  people  God 
calls  “His  people,”  “His  inheritance,”  “His 
chosen,”  “His  witnesses,”  “His  servants.” 
“This  people  have  I formed  for  myself  ; they 
shall  shew  forth  my  praise.” — Isa.  xliii.  21. 
Hence  exclaims  the  psalmist,  “Blessed  is  the 
nation  whose  God  is  the  Lord  ; and  the  people 
whom  he  hath  chosen  for  His  own  inheritance.” 


ISRAEL  AND  GENTILE  FULLNESS. 


87 


It  will  be  evident  to  any  careful  Bible  reader 
that  God  called  Abraham  from  Ur,  in  Chaldea, 
from  His  own  kindred,  for  a special  design. 
Through  Abraham’s  seed  Jehovah  designed  that 
blessings,  temporal  and  spiritual,  should  flow  to 
all  nations.  He  selected  this  seed  for  His  own 
training,  instruction  and  culture,  to  the  end  that 
they  might  train,  instruct  and  evangelize  the 
rest  of  mankind.  Through  Judah  was  to  come 
spiritual  blessings,  because  from  him  was  the 
Messiah  ; and  through  Ephraim,  as  representa- 
tive of  the  ten  tribes,  was  to  come  temporal 
blessings.  And  this  in  the  past  has  been  the 
order  of  providential  procedure  ; it  is  the  pres- 
ent order,  and  it  is  to  be  the  future.  Look  and 
verify  this  statement  and  order,  by  an  exami- 
nation of  the  nations  of  the  earth  at  this  time, 
by  asking  yourselves  the  question  : What  form 
of  religion  among  the  many  on  earth  is  best 
suited  to  develop  man,  to  conserve  his  truest 
interest  and  crown  him  with  the  greatest  meas- 
ure of  peace,  plenty,  liberty  and  security. 
Surely  to  this  question  there  can  be  but  one 
answer — it  is  the  religion  of  our  Lord  Jesus 
Christ.  And  it  is  evident  that  Christ  came  of 
the  tribe  of  Judah.  If  we  seek  among  the 
nations  for  the  best  form  of  civilization  and  the 
best  government,  we  shall  find  the  same  to  be  in 
the  bounds  of  Israel  and  Manasseh — England 
and  America.  Here  we  shall  find  individualism 
the  best  developed,  and  liberty  the  fullest 


88 


ISKAEL  AND  GENTILE  FULLNESS. 


grown.  In  this  conclusion  the  intelligent  of 
every  other  nation  will  concur.  ■ W e assume  no 
risk  in  making  this  statement.  Thus  without 
doubt  the  world  at  large  is  greatly  indebted  to 
the  religion  of  Jesus,  who  was  of  Judah  ; and 
to  the  Anglo-Saxons  for  the  best  and  purest 
forms  of  political  organizations  or  governments. 
The  Anglo-Saxons  being  the  ten  lost  tribes,  it 
therefore  follows  that  God  has  carried  out  the 
design  included  in  Abraham’s  call,  and  the 
promise  made  that  in  his  seed  should  all  the  na- 
tions of  the  earth  be  blessed.  To  us  it  seems  to 
have  been  in  a roundabout  way.  Had  Israel 
been  obedient  to  God  in  Palestine,  and  had 
Judah  received  Jesus  as  the  true  Messiah,  the 
state  of  the  nations  most  certainly  would  have 
been  very  different  to  what  it  is  now.  Still, 
through  all,  and  for  all,  the  purpose  of  Heaven 
has  been  carried  forward. 

In  studying  Providence  it  is  well  always  to 
remember  that  God  is  not  dependent  upon  the 
harmonious  co-operation  of  His  creatures  for 
the  accomplishment  of  His  purpose.  He  can 
gain  His  ends  either  through  our  hate  or  love, 
resistance  or  co-operation.  When  the  Jews 
had  crucified  Christ  they  naturally  thought  they 
had  cut  short  His  career  and  cut  off  His  influ- 
ence ; for  so  it  would  appear  by  all  human 
reasoning.  Even  the  disciples  did  not  see  how 
He  could  be  the  Messiali  and  Deliverer  of  Is- 
rael when  He  allowed  Himself  to  be  crucified. 


ISRAEL  AND  GENTILE  DULLNESS.  80 

The  hope  of  Israel  was  buried  with  the  dead 
Christ.  They  had  hoped  that  it  had  been  He 
who  should  have  redeemed  Israel ; but  this 
hope  was  then  dead.  But  by  His  resurrection 
they  saw  through  the  secret  of  Providence,  and 
they  saw  that  God  was  fruitful  in  devising  a 
way  of  escape,  and  able  to  bring  to  pass  His 
own  glorious  purpose.  So  Peter  voices  their 
experience  when  he  says,  “Blessed  be  the  God 
and  Father  of  our  Lord  Jesus  Christ,  which,  ac- 
cording to  His  abundant  mercy,  hath  begotten 
us  again  unto  a living  hope  by  the  resurrection 
of  Jesus  Christ  from  the  dead.”  The  Jews 
soon  found  out  they  had  made  a mistake  in 
crucifying  Jesus,  for  the  risen  Christ  was 
mightier  than  the  teaching  Jesus.  They  had 
crushed  a seed  to  the  earth  which  sprang  forth 
in  renewed  beauty  and  grace  ; whose  death  was 
life  and  whose  loss  was  gain.  In  common  par- 
lance they  had  been  outwitted.  They  slew  a 
man  and  He  rose  a God.  They  in  wrath  offered 
a sacrifice  once  and  for  all,  even  for  the  very  sin 
in  which  they  were  then  indulging.  They  un- 
knowingly abolished  death,  and  brought  life 
and  immortality  to  light.  The  critical  and  un- 
believing Sadducees,  who  denied  another  life 
than  this,  gave  aid  in  proving  another  and  a 
better  ; for  Christ  risen  condemned  their  unbe- 
lief. The  proud  and  ritualistic  Pliarasee,  who 
loved  the  temple  and  its  gorgeous  ceremony, 
destroyed  one  and  made  the  other  of  none  avail, 


90 


ISRAEL  AND  GENTILE  FULLNESS. 


for  in  the  planted  death  of  Jesns  they  laid  the 
foundation  of  another  and  grander  temple — one 
composed  of  living  stones — and  made  the  temple 
service  meaningless  ; for  the  anti- type  had  swal- 
lowed up  the  tpye,  the  real,  the  ideal.  In  all 
this  they  had  reasoned  on  a human  plane,  which 
is  not  high  enough  to  wholly  overlook  and  ex- 
plore the  kingdom  of  God.  Paul  in  1 Cor.  ii. 
7,  makes  this  matter  plain:  “But  we  speak 

the  wisdom  of  God  in  a mystery  ; even  the  hid- 
den wisdom  which  God  ordained  before  the 
world  unto  our  glory,  which  none  of  the 'princes 
of  this  world  Jcnew;  for  had  they  Tcnown  it  they 
would  not  have  crucified  the  Lord  of  Glory.” 
Jesus  committed  His  life  to  the  wave-tide  of 
their  rage,  and  was  floated  to  death  and  victory. 
On  the  man  side  there  was  purpose  and  hate, 
and  for  this  they  were  responsible ; and  on  the 
Divine  side  we  have  wisdom  and  love  working 
out  the  salvation  of  a lost  race. 

Jesus  came  to  His  own  and  they  did  not  re- 
ceive him.  Who  were  Iris  own  ? We  answer, 
the  Jews  ; for  he  was  of  Judah.  But  if  His  own 
did  not  receive  Him,  we  ask  who  did  ? The  an- 
swer is,  that  Israel  received  him.  The  Israelites 
in  the  land  at  that  time  were  the  tribe  of  Ben- 
jamin. They  had  been  providentially  selected 
for  this  work,  nearly  a thousand  years  before. 
This  one  tribe  of  Benjamin  has  a very  peculiar 
history ; and  if  you  will  study  it  over  it  will 
greatly  serve  to  confirm  your  faith  in  the  divine 


ISRAEL  AND  GENTILE  FULLNESS. 


91 


inspiration  of  tlie  Bible  and  the  unity  and  fore- 
thought of  Providence.  The  original  theocracy 
of  Israel  consisted  of  twelve  tribes.  This  the- 
ocracy was  divided  under  Rehoboam,  Solomon’s 
son  and  successor.  Ten  tribes  seceded,  and 
formed  a kingdom,  which  is  ever  after  called  the 
Kingdom  of  Israel ; their  first  king  was  Jero- 
boam. But  it  is  very  singular  to  notice  that 
one  of  these  ten  tribes  is  lent  to  the  kingdom  of 
Judah,  and  this  one  tribe  is  Benjamin.  In  this 
was  the  divine  provision  for  the  time  of  Christ. 
We  find  in  the  first  book  of  Kings,  eleventh 
chapter,  that  Solomon  displeased  the  Lord  by 
his  wicked  ways,  and  the  Lord  said:  “For  as 

much  as  this  is  done  of  thee,  and  thou  hast  not 
kept  My  covenant  and  My  statutes  which  I 
have  commanded  thee,  I will  surely  rend  the 
kingdom  from  thee,  and  I will  give  it  to  thy 
servant  (Jeroboam  was  Solomon’s  servant  at 
this  time) ; notwithstanding  in  thy  days  I will 
not  do  it,  for  David  thy  father’s  sake;  but  I will 
rend  it  out  of  the  hands  of  thy  son.  Howbeit  I 
will  not  rend  away  all  the  Jcingdom , but  will 
give  one  tribe  to  thy  son,  for  David  My  ser- 
vant's sake,  and  for  Jerusalem' s sake,  which  I 
have  chosen."  All  the  kingdom  evidently 
meant  the  ten  tribes.  The  same  truth  Ahijah, 
the  Shilonite,  taught  when  he  rent  his  new  gar- 
ment into  twelve  pieces,  and  gave  to  Jeroboam 
ten.  “And  he  said  to  Jeroboam,  Take  thee  ten 
pieces,  for  thus  saith  the  Lord,  the  God  of 


ISRAEL  AND  GENTILE  FULLNESS. 


yy 


Israel : Behold,  I will  rend  the  kingdom  out  of 

the  hands  of  Solomon  and  will  give  ten  tribes  to 
thee.”  Then  comes  in  the  reserve  clause  again  : 
“But  he  shall  have  one  tribe  for  My  servant 
David’s  sake,  and  for  Jerusalem’s  sake,  the  city 
which  I have  chosen  out  of  all  the  tribes  of  Is- 
rael.” And  the  reason  for  the  reservation  of 
this  tribe  is  clearly  expressed  in  verse  thirty- 
six  : “ And  unto  his  son  will  I give  one  tribe, 

that  David  My  servant  may  have  a light  always 
before  Me  in  Jerusalem.”  Now  it  is  plain  why 
this  tribe  was  an  exception.  The  city  of  Jeru- 
salem, God  says,  He  had  chosen  out  of  all  the 
cities  of  Israel ; -because  to  this  city  would  the 
Messiah  come.  And  beautifully  agreeing  with 
the  forethought  is  the  fact  that  when  the  tribes 
had  their  lots  assigned  them  in  Palestine,  the 
city  of  Jerusalem  fell  in  the  portion  of  Benjamin. 

The  tribe  then  were  owners  of  the  city,  and 
they  received  Christ.  The  disciples  and  first 
followers  and  converts,  were  chiefly  from  this 
tribe  of  Benjamin.  After  this  tribe  received 
Christ,  then  their  work  was  done  in  Jerusalem. 
So  they  were  to  separate  from  the  kingdom  of 
Judah,  and  seek  out  their  own  brethren  and 
unite  with  them.  The  time  of  their  separation 
had  been  foretold  by  the  prophet,  and  pointed 
out  by  the  Saviour.  The  time  of  their  depart- 
ure would  be  coincident  with  the  siege  and  de- 
struction of  their  beloved  city.  So  cried  Jere- 
miah down  through  the  centuries,  “Oh,  ye 


ISRAEL  AND  GENTILE  FULLNESS. 


93 


children  of  Benjamin,  gather  yourselves  to  liee 
out  of  the  midst  of  Jerusalem,  and  blow  the 
trumpet  in  Tekoa,  and  set  up  a sign  of  lire  in 
Betli-haccerem,  for  evil  appeareth  out  of  the 
north  and  great  destruction.” — Jer.  vi.  1.  If 
any  of  you  are  mindful  to  examine  history,  you 
will  find  that  war  came,  that  the  destruction  was 
terrible,  and  more,  you  will  find  that  the  Ben- 
jaminites  escaped.  These  points  profane  his- 
torians thoroughly  confirm.  Having  fulfilled 
their  God-appointed  mission  with  the  kingdom 
of  Judah  and  in  Jerusalem,  heaven  gave  them 
to  be  liglit-bearers  to  the  whole  world  ; first  to 
specially  find  their  own  brethren  of  the  house  of 
Israel,  and  carry  them  the  gospel,  and  they 
would  carry  it  unto  all  the  earth.  Thus  the 
Saviour  said  “Go  not  in  the  way  of  the  Gen- 
tiles, and  into  any  city  of  the  Samaritans  enter 
ye  not.  But  go  rather  to  the  lost  sheep  of  the 
house  of  Israel.  ’ ’ Peter  in  his  epistle  tells  where 
these  lost  sheep  were  scattered.  Agreeable  to 
the  Saviour’s  command  they  went  forth,  and 
preached  as  they  went,  and  so  carried  the  gos- 
pel of  Jesus  with  them.  As  a tribe  they  finally 
settled  in  Normandy,  and  gave  to  France  her 
Protestantism,  which,  from  that  day  to  this, 
Catholicism  has  not  been  able  entirely  to  uproot, 
though  it  has  made  several  desperate  attempts. 
They  finally,  however,  as  a tribe,  under  the 
Norman  conquest  entered  England  and  united 
with  the  other  nine  tribes.  Their  advent,  and 


94 


ISRAEL  AX  I)  GENTILE  FULLNESS. 


tlie  way  they  came,  is  very  graphically  symbol- 
ized in  the  unicorn  on  the  royal  arms  of  England. 
The  unicorn  is  looking  westward,  and  is  at- 
tached to  the  crown  by  a chain — showing  that  it 
came  from  the  East. 

With  these  facts  in  one’s  mind,  read  those 
difficult  passages  of  Romans,  and  all  will  be 
plain.  Take  for  instance  Romans  xi.  17  : “And 
if  some  of  the  branches  be  broken  off,  and  thou, 
being  a wild  olive  tree,  wert  grafted  in  among 
them,  and  with  them  partakest  of  the  root  and 
fatness  of  the  olive  tree.”  Here  it  is  manifest 
that  we  have  three  parties  mentioned.  The 
branches  broken  off  mean  Judah  and  Levi,  the 
wild  olive  stands  for  the  Gentiles,  the  people  in 
among  whom  they  were  grafted,  or  root  of  whose 
fatness  they  were  partakers,  mean  the  Israelites. 
The  hope  of  Jewish  restoration  is  nicely  set 
forth  in  verse  24,  “For  if  thou  wert  cut  out  of 
the  olive  tree,  which  is  wild  by  nature,  and  wert 
grafted  contrary  to  nature  into  a good  olive  tree, 
how  much  more  shall  these,  which  be  the  natural 
branches,  be  grafted  into  their  own  olive  tree.” 
Again,  the  wild  olive  stands  for  the  Gentiles, 
the  good  olive  tree  for  Israel,  the  branches 
broken  off,  but  which  may  be  grafted  in  again, 
for  the  Jews.  Thus  to  this  theory  of  interpre- 
tation the  whole  Bible  responds  easily  and 
reasonably.  With  this  kind  of  interpretation 
one  need  not  twist  and  distort  the  sacred  word 
in  order  to  understand  it.  I trust  the  day  is 


ISRAEL  AND  GENTILE  FULLNESS. 


95 


near  when  men  will  expound  the  sacred  Scrip- 
tures by  the  rules  of  common  sense. 

The  calamity  that  happened  to  the  nine  tribes 
of  Israel  in  being  carried  captive  has  been  turned 
into  good  by  our  Heavenly  Father ; into  good 
for  them  and  all  the  world.  “Therefore  the 
Lord  removed  Israel  out  of  His  sight,  as  He  had 
said  by  all  His  servants  the  prophets.  So  was 
Israel  carried  away  out  of  their  own  land  to 
Assyria  unto  this  day.’.’ — 2d  Kings,  xvii.  23. 
Keeping  back  the  tribe  of  Benjamin  is  a marvel 
of  goodness.  And  with  Paul  we  may  exclaim  : 
“Now  if  the  fall  of  them  be  the  riches  of  the 
world,  and  the  diminishing  of  them  the  riches  of 
the  Gentiles,  how  much  more  their  fullness.”  If 
Israel  has  been  able  to  contribute  so  much  of 
Christianity  to  the  world,  and  evolve  in  her  im- 
perfect state  such  an  equitable  form  of  gov- 
ernment, what  will  her  contribution  be  when 
gathered,  restored  and  once  again  put  into  a 
theocratic  relation  to  God  ? ‘ ‘ For  if  the  casting 

away  of  them  be  the  reconciling  of  the  world, 
what  shall  the  receiving  of  them  be,  but  life 
from  the  dead  3”  This  people  who  have  been 
scattered  among  the  Gentiles,  God  is  collecting- 
out  from  among  them  for  His  own  glorious  pur- 
pose and  work.  Thus  scattered  they  have  been 
a mystery — a mystery  among  the  Gentiles. 
Paul  to  the  Colossians  says  : “To  whom  God 
would  make  known  what  is  the  riches  of  the 


96 


ISRAEL  AND  GENTILE  FULLNESS. 


glory  of  this  mystery  among  the  Gentiles,  which 
is  Christ  in  you  the  hope  of  glory.” 

When  will  the  fullness  of  the  text  take  place  ? 
We  answer,  Before  long.  The  fullness  here 
stands  over  against  the  Gentile  fullness.  In  the 
three  last  discourses  we  called  your  attention  to 
Israel’s  maturing  fullness  in  land,  people  and 
language.  And  now',  if  you  will  consider  the 
state  of  the  Gentile  nations,  it  will  he  apparent 
to  you  that  the  time  of  Gentile  fullness  is  now 
present.  These  Gentile  nations  are  now  over- 
flowing. Take  China  with  her  teeming  millions, 
and  ask  why  she  has  not  peopled  the  world  ? 
for  surely  she  could  have  done  so  long  ago. 
But  she  barred  her  own  doors  by  making  it  un- 
lawful for  any  of  her  subjects  to  leave  the  flow- 
ery kingdom — forbidding  heaven  to  such  as 
should  die  outside.  Now,  however,  she  must 
permit  emigration  or  perish  by  famine.  Take 
the  countries  of  Europe,  and  is  it  not  strange 
that  Israel’ s fullness  of  land,  people  and  lan- 
guage, is  made  the  fuller  by  these  nations  con- 
tributing toward  the  same.  The  fullness  of  the 
Gentiles  is  made  to  flow  into  the  fullness  of  Israel, 
These  countries,  outside  of  Israel  England,  have 
no  colonies  to  send  their  overflow  to,  hence 
they  are  filling  up  the  domain  of  Israel  and  so 
hastening  on  her  fullness.  The  French,  Ger- 
mans, Italians  and  Spaniards,  forsake  their  land 
and  language,  thus  adding  to  Israel’s  fullness, 
for  they  chiefly  settle  down  within  the  bounds 


ISRAEL  AND  GENTILE  FULLNESS. 


97 


of  Israel.  To  this  Gentile  fullness  there  was  to  be 
one  strange  exception — that  was  in  the  Turkish 
nation.  This  nation  is  set  forth  by  the  prophets 
under  the  figure  of  the  river  Euphrates.  In  their 
first  appearance  they  were  to  be  very  numerous. 
In  the  eleventh  century  they  began  to  invade 
Europe.  The  historian  Gibbon,  speaking  of 
them,  says:  “Myriads  of  Turkish  horsemen 
overspread  the  whole  Greek  empire,  until  at 
last  Constantinople  fell  into  their  hands.”  From 
1453  till  now  have  they  held  this  grand  capital. 
John,  in  Rev.  ix.,  pictures  this  invasion,  and 
speaks  of  the  number  of  horsemen.  He  speaks 
of  them  as  having  power  in  their  mouths  and 
tails.  This  language  is  very  expressive  when  we 
remember  the  Moslem’s  war  cry,  which  was, 
“ The  sword  of  Mohammed  and  of  God.”  And 
in  one  of  the  first  of  their  great  battles  they  lost 
their  standard,  but,  not  long  baffled,  the  com- 
mander-in-chief cut  off  the  tail  of  his  beautiful 
steed,  and,  putting  it  on  the  end  of  a pole, 
hoisted  it  as  a standard.  This  ensign  they  long 
used.  This  kingdom,  however,  is  to  dry  up — 
that  is,  to  disappear  gradually,,  as  a river  dries 
up.  All  this  is  taking  place.  Turkey  sends 
emigrants  nowhere.  They  are  literally  dying 
out.  In  number  they  are  fewer  each  year.  Tur- 
key will  pass  away  for  want  of  Turks.  Her 
territory  will  be  taken  away  from  her  gradually. 
How  remarkable  the  dealings  of  Providence 
with  men  and  nations ! 


98 


ISRAEL  AND  GENTILE  FULLNESS. 


Up  to  the  point  of  Gentile  fullness,  Israel  was 
to  be  partly  blind,  for  God’ s plans,  through 
Israel,  were  to  remain  a mystery  for  a time. 
“ For  I would  not,  brethren,  that  ye  should  be 
ignorant  of  this  mystery,  lest  ye  should  be  wise 
in  your  own  conceits  ; that  blindness,  in  part, 
is  happened  to  Israel  until  the  fullness  of  the 
Gentiles  be  come  in.”  Our  idea  is  that  the 
Gentile  fullness  is  now  in,  and  if  so,  it  is  natural 
then  that  Israel  should  be  found  and  about  this 
time  have  her  eyes  opened.  Up  to  this  time  of 
fullness,  Jerusalem  was  to  be  trodden  down. 
“And  they  shall  fall  by  the  edge  of  the  sword, 
and  be  led  away  captive  into  all  nations ; and 
Jerusalem  shall  be  trodden  down  of  the  Gentiles, 
until  the  times  of  the  Gentiles  be  fulfilled.” — 
Luke  xxi.  23.  Now,  the  Jews  did  fall  by  the 
edge  of  the  sword, as  the  Saviour  foretold  ; they 
were  carried  captive  into  all  nations  ; Jerusalem 
has  been  trodden  under  foot.  Thus,  then,  do 
we  see  three  parts  of  His  prophecy  literally  ful- 
filled ; and  so  surely  will  the  fourth  part  be, 
which  is,  that  in  connection  with  Gentile  full- 
ness this  treading  shall  cease,  and  proud,  im- 
perial Salem  shall  lift  her  head  once  more  free 
from  tyrant  hands  and  heathen  tramping,  to 
become  the  city  of  God  and  His  chosen  ones. 

When  Moses  was  sent  to  deliver  the  children 
of  Israel  from  Egyyt,  he  was  equipped  with 
miraculous  power — that  he  might  convince 
Pharaoh  and  the  Egyptians  what  was  the  will 


ISRAEL  AND  GENTILE  FULLNESS. 


99 


of  Jehovah — but  not  more  so  than  are  the  pro- 
phetic students  of  this  day  ; for  the  presence  of 
the  Divine  gleams  forth  all  around  in  the  mira- 
cles of  prophecy  now  so  wonderfully  fullilling 
in  this  our  day. 


DREAM  IMAGE  OF  NEBUCHADNEZZAR. 


Discourse , 7. 


FUTURE  HISTORY  OF  THE  WORLD  — THE  DE- 
STRUCTION OF  THE  PAPACY  COMMENCED — 
IRELAND  TO  BE  FREE  AND  INDEPENDENT  OF 
ENGLAND  AND  ROME — FUTURE  GLORY  OF 
BRITAIN  AND  THE  UNITED  STATES. 


“ Thou , O,  King , sawest  and  beheld  a great  image . This  great 
image  whose  brightness  was  excellent , stood  before  thee ; and 
the  form  thereof  was  terrible T 


BOUT  2,500  years  ago  the  kingdom  of 


Babylon  was  strong,  great  and  prosper- 
ous. The  king  of  this  vast  empire  is  known  in 
history  as  Nebuchadnezzar.  His  reign  had  been 
marked  with  great  victories  over  the  surround- 
ing nations.  The  mighty  Empire  of  Assyria  he 
had  conquered.  Egypt  he  had  wasted  and 
almost  destroyed.  Palestine  he  had  reduced  to 
strange  and  pitiable  desolation,  having  carried 
the  Jewish  inhabitants  captive  into  the  region  of 
Babylon.  Among  these  captives  we  find  Daniel, 
the  prophet  of  Judah.  In  the  second  year  of 


Text-Dan.  ii«  31* 


DREAM  IMAGE  OF  NEBUCHADNEZZAR.  101 


Nebuchadnezzar’s  consolidated  reign,  as  king 
over  Babylon  and  Assyria,  he  dreamed  a dream 
which  gave  him  much  anxiety  of  mind  and 
troubled  him  very  much , This  dream  he  could 
not  remember  nor  explain,  save  that  it  had  left 
a terrible  impression  on  his  mind.  The  wise 
men  were  confounded,  for  they  could  neither 
declare  the  vision  or  its  meaning.  The  king,  in 
his  rage,  decreed  them  all  to  death.  At  this 
point  appears  Daniel,  one  of  the  captives  of 
Judah.  Moved  of  God,  he  presents  himself 
before  the  king,  and  made  known  to  him  the 
vision  and  interpretation. 

The  king  had  seen  a great  metallic  image,  ex- 
cellent in  brightness  and  terrible  in  form.  It 
was  a human  figure  of  massive  proportions, 
standing  erect  with  outstretched  arms,  and  of  a 
mixed  and  strange  composition.  The  head  was 
of  fine  gold.  The  breast  and  arms  were  of  silver. 
The  belly  and  thighs  of  brass.  The  legs  of  iron, 
the  feet  part  of  iron  and  part  of  clay.  While 
the  king  was  gazing  on  this  monstrous  figure 
■with  intense  interest,  his  attention  is  arrested  by 
the  appearance  of  a small  stone — this  stone  was 
alone  ; there  appeared  no  hands  handling  it  or 
moving  it.  It  was  cut  out  of  the  mountain  with 
out  hands.  In  this  stone  there  appears  to  be  a 
good  deal  of  the  supernatural.  At  once  this 
little  stone  assaults  the  image,  beginning  at  the 
feet.  The  battle  is  surely  unequal ; the  battle 
continues,  and  during  the  struggle  the  stone 


102  DREAM  IMAGE  OP  NEBUCHADNEZZAR. 


actually  grows ; the  image  falls  to  pieces,  the 
feet,  thighs,  breast  and  head,  and  victory  is  with 
the  stone.  By  the  time  the  image  is  wholly  de- 
stroyed the  stone  has  become  a mountain.  Or, 
as  Daniel  said  to  Nebuchadnezzar : “Thou 

sawest  till  that  a stone  was  cut  out  without 
hands,  which  smote  the  image  upon  his  feet, 
that  were  of  iron  and  clay,  and  brake  them  to 
pieces.  Then  was  the  iron,  the  clay,  the  brass, 
the  silver  and  the  gold  broken  to  pieces  together, 
and  became  like  the  chaff  of  the  summer  thresh- 
ing-floors ; and  the  wind  carried  them  away, 
that  no  place  was  found  for  them;  and  the  stone 
that  smote  the  image  became  a great  mountain, 
and  filled  the  whole  earth.” 

In  this  vision  and  interpretation  we  have  a 
line  of  history  laid  bare,  so  clearly  that  we  need 
not  err.  The  beginning  is  the  time  and  kingdom 
of  Nebuchadnezzar.  The  image  stands  for  four 
great  earthly  monarchies,  extending  down 
through  the  centuries  even  to  this  time  and  day 
— and  a little  further — for  these  monarchies  are 
not  yet  wholly  destroyed,  and  the  stone-king- 
dom does  not  yet  fill  the  world.  Of  this  fifth, 
or  stone-kingdom,  there  is  to  be  no  end  by  con- 
quest, or  decay,  or  succession.  Daniel  says  that 
this  kingdom  shall  not  be  left  to  other  people — 
that  is,  it  shall  never  be  succeeded. 

The  peculiar  features  of  the  stone-kingdom 
make  it  interesting  to  ascertain  what  kingdom, 
monarchy,  and  people  stand  for  it,  for  such 


DREAM  IMAGE  OF  NEBUCHADNEZZAR.  103 


kingdom,  though  small  at  the  beginning,  is  to 
grow,  prosper  and  continue  to  the  end  of  time. 
Guided  by  the  Scriptures  and  History,  let  us 
look  for  these  four  earthly  monarchies:  and  the 
better  to  accomplish  our  task,  let  us  stretch  the 
giant  figure  on  his  back — then  his  head  of  gold 
will  rest  in  Babylon,  his  silver  breast  and  arms 
will  take  in  Media  and  Persia,  his  belly  and 
thighs  will  take  in  Greece,  and  his  legs  and  feet 
will  take  in  Pome.  Thus,  then,  the  gold  head 
stood  for  Babylon,  and  is  now  in  this  day  rep- 
resented and  found  in  Russia — for  Russia  is  a 
continuation  of  Babylon.  The  Czar  is  on  the 
line  of  Nebuchadnezzar.  This  gold  headed 
kingdom  will  be  the  last  destroyed — the  de- 
struction begins  at  the  feet.  Russia,  therefore, 
has  yet  a lease  of  life  and  prosperity;  but  finally 
she  too  will  yield  the  contests  and  disappear  be- 
fore the  stone-kingdom.  The  gold  stands  for 
work  and  endurance — as  the  head  is  significant 
of  supremacy  ; but  the  stone  will  finally  de- 
stroy it. 

The  silver,  next  in  value  and  endurance,  of 
which  arms  and  breast  stand  for  Persia.  Cen- 
turies ago  Persia  was  the  great  power  of  the 
earth.  At  one  time  it  would  seem  as  if  she  never 
would  decay,  or  ever  have  a rival.  But  her  day 
came,  and  she  has  dwindled  down  to  the  little 
kingdom  and  monarchy,  the  Persia  of  to-day. 
Her  power  is  gone,  she  is  consumptive,  and  will 
soon  disappear  as  a separate  kingdom.  The 


104  DREAM  IMAGE  OF  NEBUCHADNEZZAR. 

present  visit  of  the  King  of  Persia  to  the  Czar,  at 
St.  Petersburg,  is  not  without  meaning.  The 
gold  head  of  Russia  will  need  the  assistance  of 
the  arms  of  Persia  by  and-by. 

The  brass  parts  stand  well  and  appropriately 
for  ancient  Greece — an  empire  once  so  gigantic 
and  powerful,  a people  so  polished  and  learned, 
but  long  ago  their  time  and  work  and  place  were 
marked  out.  And  now  the  time  is  nearly  gone 
and  work  done,  hence  they  will  soon  disappear. 
The  present  little  kingdom  of  Greece  is  all  that 
is  left.  Brass  is  in  itself  corrosive,  so  the  Greek 
empire  has  gradually  eaten  itself  away.  What 
sublime  lessons  the  prophets  of  old  taught  us. 

The  iron  and  clay  of  which  were  the  legs  and 
feet,  stand  for  the  great  Roman  Empire,  which 
in  its  day  was  so  solid  and  grand  with  its  law 
and  order,  its  soldiers  and  statesmen.  This  em- 
pire that  tried  the  hopeless  experiment  of  mix- 
ing clay  and  iron — that  is  church  and  State,  as 
inaugurated  by  Constantine.  This  nation  that 
tried  to  fuse  together  Paganism  and  Christianity. 
This  nation  that  tried  to  stand  on  two  equal 
feet,  and  to  encompass  the  whole  of  man,  body 
and  spirit.  Well  might  Daniel  say  of  this  brit- 
tle empire  that  it  should  be  partly  strong  and 
partly  weak.  In  conscience  and  the  empire  of 
the  soul,  Christ  alone  is  King.  No  wonder  that 
the  Roman  Empire  has  disappeared.  The  iron 
part  is  now  entirely  gone.  The  Pope  and  the 
church  of  Rome  foolishly  arrogate  to  themselves 


DREAM  IMAGE  OF  NEBUCHADNEZZAR.  105 


to  be  this  kingdom.  They  still  try  and  believe 
in  mixing  the  iron  and  clay — they  yet  claim 
authority  in  the  spirit  realm.  Obedience  to 
Christ  and  the  Pope  cannot  be,  on  the  Spiritual 
or  clay  side.  No  man  can  supremely  serve  two 
masters.  On  the  iron  side  no  man  can  be  loyal 
to  his  country  and  the  Pope  at  the  same  time. 
No  man  can  serve  two  masters  at  the  same  time, 
both  of  which  claim  and  demand  supremacy. 
These  things  cannot  be  mixed.  “And  whereas 
thou  sawest  iron  mixed  with  miry  clay,  they 
shall  mingle  themselves  with  the  seed  of  men, 
but  they  shall  not  cleave  one  to  another.  Even 
as  iron  is  not  mixed  with  clay.” 

How  true  the  prophetic  utterances  of  the 
prophet.  The  Catholics  and  Protestants  do  not 
mix  easily,  not  socially,  not  politically,  not  edu- 
cationally. How  are  we  to  mix  freely  with 
those  who  think  we  are  heretics  and  damnable  ? 
How  can  we  socially  mix  with  a people  so  lordly 
in  their  claims,  and  deficient  in  character  as 
many  are  ? A people  who  when  true  to  their 
profession  must  be  our  secret  or  open  enemies. 
Who  sink  their  manhood  and  parental  claims, 
so  as  to  depend  upon  the  priest  for  forgiveness 
and  on  him  for  instruction.  Thus  at  the  priest’s 
command  the  coming  generations  are  divided 
and  embittered  in  the  fact  of  separate  schools 
for  Catholics  and  Protestants.  These  men  of 
clay  and  lordly  air,  claim  rights  superior  to  the 
State,  despising  the  State  provision  for  educa- 


106  DREAM  IMAGE  OF  NEBUCHADNEZZAR. 

tion.  Daniel  said  ‘ £ the  dream  is  certain,  and 
the  interpretation  thereof  sure.”  If  so,  as  sure 
as  the  iron  part  has  disappeared,  so  will  the  clay. 

Now  a clearer  view,  a purer  faith  and  greater 
liberty  are  dawning  upon  our  Catholic  friends, 
which  is  making  many  of  them  feel  too  manly 
and  noble  to  be  longer  slaves  to  priest  or  Pope. 
Bereft  of  temporal  power,  they  henceforth  will 
have  to  win  and  fight  their  way,  as  others,  on 
the  purity  of  their  doctrines  and  practice.  In 
such  a strife,  we  can  but  wish  them,  and  all  who 
love  the  Lord  Jesus  Christ,  great  success. 

Thus  in  the  short  outline  of  these  four  king- 
doms we  see  enough  to  show  us  that  God  has 
kept  His  word.  How  marvelous  are  His  ways, 
how  complete  His  work. 

Let  us  now  look  at  this  stone  kingdom.  This 
fifth  Kingdom  is  as  much  material  and  politi- 
cal as  the  other  four,  and  stands  for  a king, 
country  and  people.  It  does  not  come  into  ex- 
istence until  the  image  is  perfect.  For  it  is 
while  Nebuchadnezzar  was  looking  at  the  image 
he  saw  the  stone  cut  out  of  the  mountain — its 
growth  was  gradual.  Its  work  was  to  destroy 
this  image  and  fill  the  world.  As  these  king- 
doms became  weaker  and  smaller,  it  would  be- 
come stronger  and  larger. 

What  king,  country  and  people  respond  to 
this  kingdom  ? The  answer  is  as  easy  as  to  find 
the  other,  if  we  keep  our  minds  free  from  pre- 
judice and  open  to  truth. 


DREAM  IMAOE  OF  NEBUCHADNEZZAR.  H)7 


First,  this  kingdom  was  of  divine  origin. 
Second,  it  was  small  at  first.  Third,  the  more 
it  fights  the  more  it  grows.  Fourth,  it  breaks 
in  pieces  this  image,  beginning  at  the  feet.  It  is 
in  fact  the  sworn  enemy  of  all  the  four  king- 
doms. Fifth,  it  is  to  fill  the  world  and  thus  be- 
come a universal  kingdom  and  monarchy.  In 
this  latter  sense  it  will  be  a fit  type  of  the  king- 
dom of  Christ. 

Just  such  a kingdom  as  this  did  God  repeat- 
edly promise  to  Abraham  and  his  descendants. 
David’ s throne  and  seed  royal  are  to  be  estab- 
lished before  Him  forever.  He  promised  to 
David’s  throne  perpetuity,  and  that  David’s 
seed  should  always  be  on  the  throne — not  in  a 
spiritual  sense  as  some  think — but  naturally  and 
actually  in  this  world. 

God  promised  to  Israel,  as  a people  and  a 
kingdom,  such  pre-eminence  in  origin,  power 
and  growth.  The  answer  then  is  simple  and 
plain— England,  as  representing  the  Lost  Tribes 
of  Israel,  and  Queen  Victoria,  being  a direct  de- 
scendant from  David.  For  she  came  of  James 
VI.,  of  Scotland — he  from  Bruce  and  Duncan, 
and  Malcolm,  and  Kenneth,  and  Kenneth 
through  the  kings  of  Argyleshire,  Alpin,  and 
Donald,  and  Fergus.  Then  through  the  long 
line  of  Irish  Kings  from  Earca  to  Heremon,  of 
Tara,  and  he  married  Tea  Tephi,  the  daughter  of 
Zedekiah,  who,  through  Jeremiah,  the  prophet, 
had  been  hid  from  the  destroying  vengeance  of 


108  DREAM  IMAGE  OE  NEBUCHADNEZZAR. 

Nebuchadnezzar.  He  killed  all  her  brothers  and 
kindred,  and  put  out  the  eyes  of  Zedekiah  and 
took  him  a captive  to  Babylon,  where  he  died. 

Look  also  at  the  British  nation,  learned  as 
they  are,  yet  no  historian  can  tell  who  the  Eng 
lisli  were  originally.  Sharon  Turner,  the  best 
and  most  trustworthy  on  the  origin  of  the  Sax- 
ons, fails  to  solve  the  question.  He  traces  them 
into  Central  Asia,  but  there  he  stops.  They 
here  form  part  of  the  Aryan  race,  speaking  the 
Sanscrit  language,  from  which  came  the  Greek 
and  Latin.  And  from  this  place  and  people 
came  forth  the  Goths,  and  their  language,  and 
also  the  Saxons  and  their  language  came  to 
view  here.  The  German  and  Saxon,  both  seem 
to  come  forth  from  the  Aryan  stock. 

The  very  place  the  Saxons  came  from  is  the 
very  place  where  the  Lost  Tribes  were  carried 
captive  to  by  the  King  of  Assyria,  about  725 
years  before  Christ,  as  we  read  in  the  second 
book  of  Kings,  seventeenth  chapter.  Take  the 
very  word  Saxon.  This  word  comes  from  the 
Sanscrit : Saka  Suna.  Saka  means  era,  epoch 
or  date,  and  Suna  means  void,  without.  Hence 
the  word  Saxon  means  a people  whose  origin  is 
unknown — void  of  date.  True,  Nebuchadnezzar 
saw  no  hands  cutting  the  little  stone  out  from 
the  mountain.  The  origin  of  the  English  nation 
is  hid  because  God  cast  away  His  people  for  a 
time — not  forever.  It  is  this  view  of  the  stone 
kingdom  that  corresponds  to  the  prophets,  to 
history,  especially  to  the  English  history. 


DREAM  IMAGE  OE  NEBUCIIADNEZZAft.  109 


The  very  island  itself  is  insignificant,  and  no 
doubt  was  once  joined  to  the  continent  of  Eu- 
rope. The  formation  on  both  sides  of  the  Eng- 
lish Channel,  that  is,  on  the  French  and  English 
coast,  are  the  same,  namely,  chalk.  The  ocean 
in  time  past  washed  through  a passage,  and  thus 
prepared  a place  for  exiled  Israel  to  rest  in,  and 
renew  their  strength. 

Why  should  this  small  island  and  few  and 
scattered  people  become  so  powerful,  so  as  to 
sweep  the  sea,  and  dictate  on  land,  con^an^y 
engaged  in  war,  and  though  small,  -inning  vic- 
tory upon  victory,  and,  like  t1-0  stone,  growing 
stronger  and  stronger,  a far  fighting  the  whole 
of  Europe,  giving  liberties  in  religion  that  often- 
times imperiled  her  safety  at  home,  opening  her 
ports  to  all  the  world,  and  venturing  to  compete 
in  trade  with  all  nations  ? 

How  came  they  to  take  India,  a country  of  so 
vast  an  extent,  powerful,  rich  and  chivalrous  a 
country,  at  that  time  composed  of  sixteen  sep- 
arate and  powerful  nations,  speaking  thirty-six 
different  languages,  and  numbering  in  popula- 
tion some  200,000,000  ? 

With  all  her  faults,  still  to  her  the  world 
owes  much.  She  has  stood  for  liberty  in  person 
and  conscience.  The  world  has  little  to-day 
which  ennobles  men  and  nations  but  what  she 
lias  produced  or  aided  in  producing. 

The  two  feet  of  the  image  stand  for  France, 
the  right  foot,  and  Spain  the  left.  On  these 


110  DREAM  IMAGE  OF  NEBUCHADNEZZAR. 

two  feet  long  stood  Rome,  as  all  know.  When 
these  two  feet  were  broken,  then  soon  followed 
the  downfall  of  Rome  as  an  empire,  and  as  they 
are  conquered  for  Jesus,  so  will  the  empire  of 
Rome,  as  a church,  fall. 

In  the  year  1346  took  place  the  battle  of 
Cressey,  led  by  Edward  III.  Then  the  little 
stone  fell  on  the  right  foot,  and  since  then  it  has 
%llen  on  that  same  foot  victoriously  218  times. 
On  the  left  foot,  Spain,  thirty-five  times.  All 
tiA**  tiir.Q  this  stone  has  been  growing.  In  1665 
the  English,  -,naer  General  Penn,  took  Jamaica, 
and  every  four  yt*>rs  since  they  have  added  a 
colony.  Now  that  litAU,  stone  bares  rule  over 
fifty-five  colonies,  one  empire,  namely,  India, 
and  one  dominion,  Canada.  And  yet,  mighty 
as  England  was,  she  could  not  subdue  the 
American  provinces,  feeble  and  scattered  colon- 
ists as  they  were.  Then  they  sought  to  fight 
against  Providence.  Old  Jacob  blessed  the  sons 
of  Joseph,  Ephraim  and  Manasseh,  and  then 
predicted  their  destiny,  saying  of  Manasseh, 
“ He  also  shall  become  a people,  and  he  also 
shall  be  great ; but  truly  his  younger  brother 
shall  be  greater  than  he,  and  his  seed  shall  be- 
come a multitude  of  nations.”  So  they  are  ; 
and  so  Manasseh  is  a great  people  in  the  Ameri- 
can nation. 

This  stone,  cut  out  of  the  mountain,  has  much 
to  do.  and  destroy  ; it  is  still  watching  the  head 
of  gold.  Israel  and  Babylon  are  still  face  to 


DREAM  IMAGE  OF  NEBUCHADNEZZAR.  Ill 


face.  Greece  will  first  disappear,  although 
England  is  trying  to  revive  it.  Next,  Persia 
will  go,  then  Babylon,  or  head  of  gold.  Russia 
will  have  grown  to  giant  like  proportion,  and 
will  finally  measure  swords  with  England.  The 
stone  will  win.  England  will  then  move  her 
royal  residence  and  throne  to  Jerusalem.  Every 
country  and  province  may  then  be  independent 
like  Canada,  but  federated  to  the  central  gov- 
ernment. Ireland  will  then  be  free,  yes,  doubly 
free  ; free  from  Rome  and  free  from.  England  as 
a state,  but  still  federated  to  the  central  govern- 
ment. It  is  thus  this  stone  will  fill  the  earth. 
America  will  federate,  the  central  government 
will  be  destroyed.  State  rights  increase.  These 
are  some  of  the  things  suggested  and  taught  by 
this  vision. 


LITTLE  HORN  AND  TURKEY. 


Discourse,  8, 


THE  TURKS  THE  ISHMAELITES — ENGLAND  AND 
RUSSIA  TO  PARTITION  THE  MOHAMMEDAN 
EMPIRE — WHY  ENGLAND  SYMPATHIZES  WITH 
TURKEY. 


“ And  out  of  one  of  them  came  forth  a little  horn,  which  waxed 
exceeding  great,  toward  the  South , and  toward  the  East , and 
toward  the  pleasant  land." 


EBUCIIABNEZZAR  liad  a dream  in  which 


he  saw  a great  metallic  image  of  human 


form.  The  head  of  gold  stood  for  Babylon,  the 
silver  arms  and  breast  for  Persia,  the  brass  belly 
and  thighs  for  Greece,  the  iron  legs  and  feet  of 
iron  and  clay  for  Rome.  To  all  this  we  find 
history  has  faithfully  and  beautifully  responded. 

A few  years  after  this  we  find  that  Daniel  has 
a dream,  which  is  interpreted  to  him  by  an 
angel.  From  it  we  learn  that  the  ten  toes  sym- 
bolized ten  kingdoms  which  were  to  arise  out  of 
the  Roman  empire. 

Tn  the  chapter  from  which  we  take  our  text. 


Text— Daniel  viii.  9, 


LITTLE  HORN  AND  TURKEY.  113 

we  are  introduced  into  tlie  secrets  of  a vision 
which  Daniel  had.  The  place  of  the  vision  is 
on  the  banks  of  the  river  Ulai,  in  the  province 
of  Elam,  and  in  the  gorgeous  palace  of  Shushan ; 
a place  and  palace  made  famous  and  familiar  to 
us  by  the  doings  of  King  Ahasuerus  and  Queen 
Esther.  In  other  words  the  scene  is  changed 
from  the  palace  of  Babylon  to  the  palace  of 
Persia. 

In  this  vision  Persia  is  typified  by  a ram,  the 
two  horns  of  which  represented  Persia  and 
Media,  for  they  formed  one  empire  at  this  time 
under  the  powerful  rule  and  reign  of  Cyrus,  who, 
coming  from  the  East,  pushed  his  conquests 
“westward  and  northward,  and  southward.” 
“The  two  horns  were  high  ; but  one  was  higher 
than  the  other,  and  the  higher  came  up  last.” 
From  history  we  know  that  Media  conquered 
Persia,  and  we  know,  also,  that  finally  Persia 
gained  ascendency,  so  that  the  higher  came  up 
last,  and  is  even  in  existence  to-day  as  the  small 
kingdom  of  Persia,  but  Media  has  long  since 
disappeared. 

While  the  seer  Daniel  was  considering  behold 
an  he-goat  came  from  the  West.  This  goat  had 
a notable  horn  between  his  eyes.  Horn  gener- 
ally symbolizes  power ; here  it  symbolizes  a 
king  of  peculiar  power,  Daniel  tells  us.  Goat 
like,  it  bounded  over  the  earth  rapidly,  pushing 
and  goring  its  adversaries.  Can  any  one  at  all 
acquainted  with  history,  fail  to  see  how  fitly 


114 


LITTLE  Horn  and  turkey. 


and  grandly  this  description  of  the  goat  fore- 
casts the  origin  and  progress  of  the  Greek  em- 
pire ? 

Substitute  Alexander  the  Great  for  the  nota- 
ble horn,  and  you  at  once  mate  history  and  this 
vision.  Surely  God  has  not  left  Himself  with- 
out witnesses.  “ Then  the  magicians  said  unto 
Pharaoh,  this  is  the  finger  of  God.”  So  we  may 
freely  say  unto  the  historians  and  students  of 
history,  truly  in  these  things  we  see  the  finger 
of  God 

Could  any  historian  describe  more  faithfully 
and  accurately,  the  invasions,  conquests  and 
victories  of  Alexander  the  Great,  especially  his 
assault  on  the  Persians  ? How  marvelous  and 
simple  the  description  by  Daniel:  “And  he 

came  to  the  ram  that  had  two  horns  (Persia), 
which  I had  seen  standing  before  the  river,  and 
ran  unto  him  in  the  fury  of  his  power  ; and  I saw 
him  come  close  unto  the  ram,  and  he  was  moved 
with  choler  against  him,  and  smote  the  ram, 
and  brake  his  two  horns  ; and  there  was  no 
power  in  the  ram  to  stand  before  him,  but 
he  cast  him  down  to  the  ground,  and  stamped 
upon  him  ; and  there  was  none  that  could  de- 
liver the  ram  out  of  his  hand.” 

And  with  the  same  majestic  simplicity  we 
have  the  downfall  of  Alexander  and  the  division 
of  his  empire  described.  Listen  ! “ Therefore 

the  he-goat  waxed  very  great  ; and  when  he  was 
strong  the  great  horn  was  broken  ; and  for  it 


LITTLE  HORN  AKD  TURKEY. 


115 


came  up  four  notable  ones  toward  the  four 
winds  of  heaven.” 

To  fully  understand  the  sacred  writer  here, 
you  must  call  to  mind  a little  of  history,  more 
and  better,  for  all  knowledge  only  aids  us  the 
better  and  better  to  read  the  Bible. 

What  beast,  save  the  goat,  could  characterize 
Alexander  and  his  reign.  He  was  the  son  of 
Philip  of  Macedon,  born  356  B.  C.,  and  died  in 
323.  He  began  his  reign  at  twenty  years  of  age, 
and  closed  it  in  twelve  years  and  eight  months. 
No  man  in  the  same  time  ever  fought  so  many 
battles,  won  so  many  victories  and  subdued  so 
many  people.  No  man,  before  or  since,  ever 
ruled  over  so  many  people  and  such  a kingdom ; 
Queen  Victoria  is  in  these  things  his  only  rival. 
But  with  his  sudden  death  the  fruits  of  liis  vic- 
tories are  re-distributed.  His  empire  was  di- 
vided into  four  parts — the  four  Diadochi  were 
his  successors.  What  lessons  may  men  and  na- 
tions learn  by  studying  the  prophecies. 

For  prophecy  came  not  in  old  time  by  the  will 
of  man,  “But  holy  men  of  God  spake  as  they 
were  moved  by  the  Holy  Ghost,”  and  unto  this 
sure  word  of  prophecy  we  do  well  to  take  heed, 
as  unto  a light  that  shineth  in  a dark  place. 
“Knowing  this  first,  that  no  prophecy  of  the 
Scripture  is  of  any  private  interpretation.” — 
II.  Peter,  1,  20.  As  naturally  as  nature  re- 
sponds to  the  seasons,  so  will  Providence  to 
prophecy.  We  can  discern  spring-time,  sum- 


1 j 6 LITTLE  HORN  AND  TURKEY. 

k 

mer,  autumn  and  winter.  The  garden  will  re- 
veal to  us  winter  as  distinct  from  summer,  so  in 
interpreting  prophecy  we  must  always  look  for 
an  agreement  between  Providence  and  the  world. 
As  naturally  as  the  goat  symbolizes  Alexander, 
so  w ill  Providence  in  national  history  respond. 
Winter  with  its  winds,  storms  and  frost ; with 
its  leafless  trees  and  desolate  gardens,  proclaim 
beyond  a doubt  which  season  of  the  four  is  bar- 
ing rule.  Such  a thing  cannot  be  of  private  in- 
terpretation. And  prophecy  when  fulfilled  is 
as  easy  seen,  and  is  not  of  private  interpretation. 
A man  is  as  foolish  in  forging  prophecy,  as  one 
would  be  in  trying  to  forge  winter  by  putting 
artificial  leaves  on  trees  and  flowers  on  bushes ; 
the  thing  is  easily  known  if  we  exercise  our  rea- 
son. In  this  line  of  thought  we  are  sorry  to 
note  that  men  have  more  faith  than  reason, 
hence  the  blunderings  of  prophetic  writers,  and 
the  leaders  of  Adventism  and  Millenarianism. 
Prophecy  unfulfilled  commands  and  demands 
our  faith— much  more  faith  than  reason,  for  it  is 
impossible  to  see  how  some  things  can  come  to 
pass,  but  if  they  are  subjects  of  prophecy  they 
surely  will,  whether  we  understand  them  or  not. 
A prophecy  fulfilled,  however,  appeals  more  to 
reason  than  faith,  for  if  fulfilled  it  can  readily 
be  demonstrated. 

As  naturally  as  the  female  and  male  birds 
know  each  other  and  mate  together,  so  will 
events  and  prophecy.  This  kind  of  argument 


LITTLE  HORN  AND  TURKEY. 


117 


Isaiali  uses  : ‘ ‘ Seek  ye  out  of  the  book  of  the 
Lord  and  read  ; no  one  of  these  shall  fail,  none 
shall  want  her  mate,  for  my  mouth  it  hath  com- 
manded, and  his  spirit  it  hath  gathered  them.” 
— Is.  34-16.  I charge  you  to  beware  of  prophetic 
dentists  who  put  false  teeth  in  the  mouth  of 
prophecy.  Who  by  their  haste  and  impatience 
forestall  prophecy  and  weaken  men’ s faith  in- 
stead of  strengthening  it.  Prophetic  evidence 
is  very  strong  evidence,  both  for  the  Christian 
and  the  Infidel. 

Some  will  fail  to  be  convinced  when  prophecy 
is  fulfilled — Jew  like,  they  will  blind  their  eyes 
and  shut  their  ears  to  the  evidences  and  voice 
of  fulfilled  prophecy.  The  entire  career  of  our 
Lord  Jesus  Christ  was  foretold  and  mapped  out 
by  the  Old  Testament  writers.  Moses  declared 
his  family,  Micah  the  place  of  his  birth,  Isaiah 
the  virginity  of  his  mother,  Zachariah  his  tri- 
umphant entry  into  Jerusalem,  David  his  life, 
resurrection  and  ascension,  with  many  other 
kinds  of  evidence  of  a detailed  and  general  char- 
acter, yet  the  Jews,  who  claimed  to  be  well 
versed  in  the  Old  Testament,  rejected  Christ. 
Keep  these  things  in  mind  while  we  now  con- 
sider the  text  more  directly. 

You  remember  that  out  of  the  goat  kingdom 
there  came  up  four  notable  ones,  and  out  of  one 
of  them  came  forth  a little  horn,  which  waxed 
exceeding  great  toward  the  South,  East  and 
pleasant  land,  or  land  of  Palestine.  Now  this 


118 


LITTLE  HORN  AND  TURKEY. 


horn  is  not  to  be  confounded  with  the  little  horn 
of  the  fourth  kingdom  spoken  of  in  chapter  7th, 
for  that  horn  might  justly  be  called  the  eleventh 
toe  horn,  as  it  comes  into  existence  after  the  ten 
toe  kingdoms.  The  little  horn  of  the  text  is  ex- 
plained in  verse  23d,  to  be  a king  of  fierce  coun- 
tenance. He  was  to  appear  in  the  latter  time. 
It  will  be  interesting  for  us  to  ascertain  what 
king,  people  and  country,  this  little  horn  stands 
for.  Daniel  has  given  us  a very  vivid  picture 
of  the  king.  He  is  to  be  of  fierce  countenance, 
to  understand  dark  sentences,  to  stand  up  in 
power  and  might,  not  however  in  his  own  power; 
he  will  claim  to  be  appointed  and  authorized  of 
God,  and  will  pretend  to  rule  in  God’ s name. 
He  will  destroy  wonderfully  even  the  mighty  of 
the  world  and  the  holy  people.  He  will  be  very 
prosperous  and  practical,  giving  a great  impetus 
to  trade.  By  means  of  his  prosperity  he  will 
become  proud  and  strong,  and  will  destroy  many. 
He  will  actually  stand  up  in  place  of  Jesus, 
Prince  of  Princes.  But  finally  he  will  be  broken 
without  a hand.  Thus,  you  see,  Daniel  gives  us 
twelve  special  features  of  his  person  and  reign. 
Without  doubt  the  mate  of  these  descriptions 
will  be  found  on  the  person  of  Mohammed,  and 
his  successors  in  religion  Mohammedanism,  and 
in  people  and  country  the  Turks  and  Turkey. 

Mohammed  had  his  religion  and  himself  recog- 
nized about  the  year  622  at  Mecca ; from  that 
time  and  place  he  went  forth  to  waste  and  to  de- 


LITTLE  HORN  AND  TURKEY. 


119 


stroy.  As  liis  religion  prevailed,  so  he  subdued 
the  country  or  territory.  He  united  in  him- 
self the  rights  and  prerogatives  of  king,  priest 
and  prophet,  making  it  obligatory  upon  his  fol- 
lowers to  prepare  a way  and  enforce  his  religion 
by  the  sword.  He  was  indeed  a king  of  fierce 
countenance.  Thus  sprang  Mohammedanism 
and  the  Turkish  nation  into  existence.  As  a 
people  they  are  chiefly  the  descendants  of  Esau 
and  Ishmael.  If  one  desires  to  know  the  his- 
tory and  final  destiny  of  this  people,  let  them 
study  the  prophetic  utterances  concerning  Esau 
and  Ishmael.  They  are  the  descendants  of 
Abraham,  and  so  they  very  naturally  fall  into 
the  prophetic  line. 

The  Hungarians  came  from  this  family  through 
Lot.  The  Poles  and  Magyars  are  from  Moab 
and  Ammon.  These  things  being  so,  it  is  no 
wonder  the  Hungarians  and  Turks  should  sym- 
pathize, nor  that  England  should  have  a liking 
for  Turks,  England  being  the  Ten  Lost  Tribes 
of  Israel.  Alliance  and  sympathy  between 
England  and  Turkey  has  a deeper  root  and 
meaning  than  some  are  willing  to  admit.  Tur- 
key, however,  as  a distinct  empire,  is  nearly  to 
an  end.  The  recognition  of  the  Ten  Lost  Tribes 
and  their  restoration  with  the  Jews  to  Palestine, 
is  connected  with  the  downfall  of  Turkey. 
“ Saviours  are  to  come  up  on  Mount  Zion  to 
judge  the  Mount  of  Esau,  and  the  kingdom 
shall  be  the  Lord’s.”  Obadiah. 


120 


LITTLE  HORN  AND  TURKEY. 


How  clearly  speaks  Obadiali  again  when  he 
says,  “How  are  the  things  of  Esau  searched 
out  ? how  are  his  hidden  things  sought  up  ? All 
the  men  of  thy  confederacy  have  brought  thee 
even  to  the  border  ; the  men  that  were  at  peace 
with  thee  have  deceived  thee,  and  prevailed 
against  thee  ; they  that  eat  thy  bread  have  laid 
a wound  under  thee  ; there  is  none  understand- 
ing in  him.  Shall  I not  in  that  day,  saith 
the  Lord,  even  destroy  the  wise  men  out  of 
Edom,  and  understanding  out  of  the  Mount  of 
Esau.” 

These  are  the  latter  times  of  the  king  of  fierce 
countenance.  Hear  Daniel  inquiring  of  the 
Angel  in  this  vision  : £ ‘ How  long  shall  be  the 

vision  concerning  the  daily  sacrifice  and  the 
transgression  of  desolation,  to  give  both  the 
sanctuary  and  the  host  to  be  trodden  under 
foot  ? And  he  said  unto  me,  unto  two  thousand 
and  three  hundred  days.”  These  days  are  gen- 
erally allowed  to  stand  for  years.  If  so,  Jeru- 
salem was  destroyed  Anno  Domini  70.  The 
time  Daniel  saw  this  vision  was  about  490  B.  C.; 
take  70  from  this  leaves  420.  From  2,300  take 
420,  and  we  have  1880.  “Then  shall  the  sanct- 
uary be  cleansed.”  What  means  this  ? It  means 
that  Jerusalem  will  recur  back  again  into  the 
hands  of  the  Jews  and  Israel.  Christ  said  that 
the  Jews  ‘ ‘should  fall  by  the  edge  of  the  sword, 
and  be  led  away  captive  into  all  nations ; and 
Jerusalem  shall  be  trodden  down  of  the  Gen- 


LITTLE  HORN  AND  TURKEY. 


121 


tiles,  until  the  times  of  the  Gentiles  be  fulfilled.” 
— Luke  21.  24. 

Now  we  know  the  Jews  did  full  by  the  sword 
when  the  Romans  took  Jerusalem.  Second,  we 
know  they  were  scattered  among  the  nations. 
Third,  we  know  Jerusalem  has  been  trodden 
under  foot,  so  much  so,  that  Christians  have  not 
been  permitted  to  stand  on  Mount  Zion,  where 
now  stands  the  Mosque  of  Ommar.  And  this  is 
the  city  of  the  great  king.  This  is  Mount  Zion 
from  which  is  yet  to  go  forth  the  law.  This  is 
Jerusalem  that  God  promises  to  yet  again  make 
the  chief  place  of  the  earth.  “Arise,  shine, 
for  thy  light  is  come,  and  the  glory  of  the  Lord 
is  risen  upon  thee.”  When,  we  ask,  will  the 
fullness  of  the  Gentiles  come  in  ? We  answer, 
soon.  Think  of  what  God  has  taught  us  in  His 
Word.  We,  as  the  Lost  Tribes,  have  indeed 
been  ignorant  of  our  origin  and  destiny.  “For 
I would  not,  brethren,  that  ye  should  be  ignorant 
of  this  mystery,  lest  ye  should  be  wise  in  your 
own  conceits,  that  blindness  in  part  is  happened  to 
Israel,  until  the  fullness  of  the  Gentiles  be  come 
in.” — Rom.  11.  25.  This  time  is  nicely  pointed 
out  by  John  in  Revelations  11.  2,  “But  the 
court  which  is  without  the  temple  leave  out, 
and  measure  it  not;  for  it  is  given  unto  the  Gen- 
tiles, and  the  holy  city  shall  they  tread  under 
foot,  forty  and  two  months.”  Or  as  explained 
in  the  following  verse,  a thousand  two  hundred 
and  three  score  days.  Accepting  a day  for  a 


122 


LITTLE  HORN  AND  TURKEY. 


year  again,  and  we  liave  1260  years.  Taking 
Mohammed  power  to  date  from  622,  or  about, 
then  622  and  1260  make  1882.  Now  just  as  sure 
as  Jerusalem  is  now  trodden  under  foot,  as  cer- 
tainly will  it  be  free. 

“Awake,  awake;  put  on  thy  strength  O 
Zion  ; put  on  thy  beautiful  garments,  O Jeru- 
salem, the  holy  city  ; for  henceforth  there  shall 
no  more  come  into  thee  the  uncircumcised  and 
the  unclean.  Shake  thyself  from  the  dust ; 
arise  and  sit  down,  0 Jerusalem  ; loose  thyself 
from  the  bands  of  thy  neck,  O captive  daughter 
of  Zion.” — Is.  52.  1,  2. 

England  is  appointed  of  God  to  take  posses- 
sion of  Palestine  and  restore  Jerusalem.  The 
present  European  congress  will  but  further  the 
design.  God  has  told  us  through  Isaiah  that 
He  will  lay  vengeance  upon  Edom  by  the  hand 
of  Israel.  The  work  of  the  congress  is  all  cut 
and  dried  for  them;  just  as,  near  two  years  ago, 
we  pointed  out  to  you  the  war,  its  course  and 
the  parties  thereto,  and  the  results  ; so  now  we 
can  forecast  the  results  of  the  coming  congress. 
Russia  and  England  will  both  gain  ; Turkey  will 
be  the  loser.  The  many  days  of  the  vision  of 
Daniel  are  now  gone  ; the  time  is  nearly  up. 

“For  Zion’s  sake  will  I not  hold  my  peace, 
and  for  Jerusalem’s  sake  I will  not  rest,  until 
the  righteousness  thereof  go  forth  as  brightness, 
and  the  salvation  thereof  as  a lamp  that  burn- 
etii ; and  the  Gentiles  shall  see  thy  righteous- 


LITTLE  HORN  AND  TURKEY. 


123 


ness,  and  all  kings  thy  glory.”  It  is  the  duty 
of  the  watchmen  of  Zion  to  discern  the  signs  of 
the  times  and  become  obedient  unto  heavenly 
instruction.  “Ye  that  make  mention  of  the 
Lord,  keep  not  silence,  and  give  Him  no  rest  till 
He  establish,  and  till  He  make  Jerusalem  a 
praise  in  the  earth.” — Is.  62.  1-2-6-7. 


. LITTLE  HORN  AND  ANTI-CHRIST. 


Discourse , 9. 


PROPHET  WONDERS  — TWENTY  MARKS  OF  THE 
MONSTER  — THE  BERLIN  CONGRESS  — ANTI- 
CHRISTS MANY — MISTAKES  BY  WRITERS. 


Text— Daniel  vil.  8. 

“ I considered  the  horns , and  behold ! there  came  up  among  them 
another  little  hoin,  before  whom  there  were  three  of  the  first 
horns  plucked  up  by  the  roots;  and  behold ! in  this  horn 
were  eyes  like  the  eyes  of  man , and  a mouth  speaking  great 
things 


iN  the  visions  and  dream  recorded  by  Daniel 
in  this  chapter,  we  have  the  same  subject 
matter  as  that  contained  in  the  dream  of  Nebu- 
chadnezzar of  the  metallic  image.  In  this  the 
subject  is  carried  further  into  the  future,  bring- 
ing to  view  some  new  items  of  interest,  under 
different  symbols  and  more  of  detail.  The  four 
kingdoms  of  the  metallic  image  are  in  this 
dream  presented  by  the  symbolism  of  four 
beasts.  Babylon  by  a lion  which  had  eagle 
wings,  setting  forth  the  strength  and  swiftness 


LITTLE  HORN  AND  ANTI-CHRIST. 


125 


of  tlie  same.  Persia  by  a bear  raised  up  on  one 
side.  Persia  at  this  time  was  composed  of 
Media  as  well,  but  tlie  one-sided  position  of  the 
bear  denotes  the  dying  out  of  Media  and  the 
continuance  of  Persia.  The  same  idea  is  con- 
veyed in  the  eighth  chapter  and  third  verse : 
“The  ram  had  two  horns,  and  one  was  higher 
t'han  the  other,  and  the  higher  came  up  last.” 
Media  was  a kingdom  before  Persia,  but  Persia 
was  to  survive  Media  ; all  this  history  confirms. 
After  tlie.Medo-Persian  empire  declined,  Persia 
surviving,  held  on  to  Babylon,  Lydia  and  Egypt. 
That  is,  wlien  the  bear  was  raised  up  on  one 
side  it  held  in  its  mouth  three  ribs,  and  was 
strong  for  a time. 

The  Macedonian  Empire,  Daniel  saw  under  the 
tpye  of  a leopard,  which  had  on  its  back  four 
wings  of  a fowl ; the  beast  also  had  four  heads. 
Babylon  was  represented  by  two  wings,  but  it  is 
very  fitting  that  Alexander  and  his  empire 
should  have  four  wings,  for  no  conquerer  ever 
flew  so  fast  over  the  earth  as  this  same  monarch. 
In  the  metallic  image  he  is  represented  by  brass, 
in  this  by  a leopard,  and  in  the  one  we  noticed 
in  Discourse  7,  by  the  goat.  How  wonderfully 
appropriate  are  these  symbolisms.  The  four 
heads  of  this  leopard  stand  for  the  four  king- 
doms into  which  the  Macedonian  Empire  was 
divided  on  the  death  of  Alexander,  namely,  1st, 
Egypt  under  Ptolemy ; 2d,  Syria  under  Anti- 
gonus  ; 3d,  Asia  Minor  under  Lysimachus  ; 4tli, 


126  LITTLE  HORN  AND  ANTI-CHRIST. 

Greece  under  Cassander.  These  four  kings  were 
the  four  leading  generals  of  Alexander. 

The  fourth  beast  of  this  vision  is  a nonde- 
script ; for  among  all  the  animal  creation  there 
could  not  be  found  one  that  could  suitably  rep- 
resent Rome.  But  one  was  made  for  the  pur- 
pose, combining  in  itself  all  that  is  fierce  and 
terrible.  “And  behold  a fourth  beast,  dreadful 
and  terrible,  and  strong  exceedingly;  and  it  had 
great  iron  teeth  ; it  devoured  and  brake  in 
pieces,  and  stamped  the  residue  with  the  feet  of 
it  ; and  it  was  diverse  from  all  the  beasts  that 
were  before  it ; and  it  had  ten  horns.”  Its  teeth 
were  of  iron  and  its  claws  of  brass.  What  a 
monster ! The  other  beasts  faithfully  repre- 
sented their  respective  kingdoms,  and  so  did 
this.  What  a record  ! What  a counterpart  we 
have  in  history  of  this  beast ! “Tell  it  not  in 
Gath,  publish  it  not  in  the  streets  of  Askelon,” 
lest  the  Pagan  rejoice,  and  the  heathen  mock  at 
us,  and  the  infidel  triumph  over  us.  Blot  out 
from  Time’s  record  the  24th  of  August,  1572. 
Let  not  our  children  learn  the  name  of  St.  Bar- 
tholomew, for  fear  they  should  despise  Chris- 
tianity. Quench  the  flames  of  Smith  field,  de- 
stroy the  Inquisition,  and  divorce  Christianity 
from  such  a kingdom,  from  such  a beast.  Thank 
Heaven!  the  beast  is  dying ; its  teeth  are  worn 
to  the  very  gum  by  the  gnawings  of  centuries  ; 
its  claws  are  not  now  sharp,  so  it  cannot  now 
crush  the  innocent,  as  in  days  gone  by,  nor 


LITTLE  HORN  AND  ANTI-CHRIST. 


127 


tear  with  its  brass  claw  the  weak.  Though  the 
beast  is  growing  old  and  weaker,  yet  let  us  re- 
member that  its  death  struggle  is  yet  to  come. 
The  beast  has  been  wounded,  but  this  shall  only 
serve  to  intensify  its  rage.  To  be  forewarned  is 
to  be  forearmed,  if  we  are  wise. 

This  beast,  Daniel  tells  us,  had  ten  horns,  and 
these  horns  are  ten  kings — that  is,  kingdoms — 
that  shall  arise.  Just  here  we  may  reasonably 
ask  whether  these  ten  kingdoms  are  yet  in  ex- 
istence, and  the  answer  is  no.  Some  of  them 
may  be  ; of  course  they  are  in  existence,  as  wras 
Gen.  Grant  before  the  war,  but  not  yet  distinct 
or  assigned  their  special  work  and  place.  The 
time,  however,  for  them  all  to  appear  is  near  at 
hand.  Of  this  we  may  rest  satisfied,  when  once 
they  are  all  in  existence  we  will  have  no  diffi- 
culty in  knowing  them.  Prophecy  unfulfilled 
is  always  more  difficult  to  interpret  than  when 
it  is  fulfilling  or  fulfilled.  We  have  no  doubt 
but  some  of  these  horns  are  in  existence,  and 
from  what  we  can  gleam  from  prophecy  and  his- 
tory some  are  not  yet  in  their  proper  place. 

The  special  province  of  prophecy  is  to  pre- 
pare us  for  what  is  coming.  Searching  into 
prophecy  enables  us  to  forecast  the  future  with 
tolerable  certainty,  just  as  the  scientist  can  tol- 
erably forecast  the  weather  by  studying  the 
laws,  forces  and  inclinations  of  nature.  So  the 
Christian  student,  by  studying  prophecy,  Prov- 
idence and  history,  and  comparing  them,  can 


128  LITTLE  HORN  AND  ANTI- CHRIST. 

know  much  of  what  is  coming.  On  the  Divine 
side  all  prophecy  is  certain,  but  on  the  human 
it  can  only  be  approximated.  Prophecy  fur- 
nishes the  strongest  kind  of  evidence  in  favor  of 
the  existence  of  God — inspiration  of  the  Scrip- 
tures and  Providence.  The  Lord  himself  calls 
our  attention  to  this  kind  of  evidence  frequently 
in  the  Bible.  “Produce  your  cause,  saith  the 
Lord  ; bring  forth  your  strong  reasons,  saith  the 
King  of  Jacob.  Let  them  bring  them  forth  and 
show  us  what  shall  happen  ; let  them  show  the 
former  things  what  they  be,  that  we  may  con- 
sider them,  and  know  the  latter  end  of  them  ; 
or  declare  us  things  for  to  come.” — Is.  xli.  21-22. 

Prophecy  does  not  interfere  with  the  coming 
to  pass  of  an  event,  or  suppress  man’ s freedom 
no  more  than  the  man  at  Washington,  who  gives 
us  the  weather  probabilities,  makes  the  weather 
or  regulates  nature.  Even  when  men  know  the 
sequence  of  a thing  they  oftimes  persist  in  doing 
it.  The  soldiers  who  wrangled  at  the  cross 
about  the  dividing  of  the  garments  of  the  cruci- 
fied one,  thought  little  and  cared  less  for  pro- 
phecy, but  when  they  came  to  the  Saviour’s  vest 
they  fell  into  the  line  of  prophecy,  for  at  once 
they  cast  lots  for  that,  all  of  which  had  been 
fore- written  for  hundreds  of  years.  Run  and 
tell  that  young  man  that  the  place  he  is  enter- 
ing is  the  way  of  death.  Tell  him  that  the  air 
is  foul,  that  the  furniture  and  painted  humanity 
are  all  gotten  up  to  deceive.  Tell  him  that  in  a 


LITTLE  HORN  AND  ANTI-CHRIST. 


129 


few  years  he  will  repent  ever  having  seen  snch  a 
place.  And  what  is  yonr  reward  ? It  is  that 
you  are  laughed  at  and  esteemed  as  one  that  in- 
terferes, and  told  to  mind  your  own  business. 
The  young  man  is  free  and  self-confident.  Look 
in  a few  years  for  that  same  young  man  and  you 
shall  find  him  a terrible  example  of  fulfilled 
prophecy.  Diseased,  worn,  weak  and  weary,  he 
cries  in  the  anguish  of  soul  for  his  folly.  “And 
thou  mourn  at  the  last,  when  thy  flesh  and 
thy  body  are  consumed,  and  say  : How  have  I 
hated  instruction  and  my  heart  despised  re- 
proof?”— Prov  v.  11-12. 

The  famous  European  Congress  which  met  in 
Berlin,  we  foresaw  would  meet,  near  three  years 
ago,  and  told  you  the  conditions  under  which  it 
would  be  called.  In  the  dark  days  of  the  past 
did  we  not  repeat  to  you  our  faith,  as  fostered 
from  prophecy,  that  England  could  not  go  to 
war.  Many  of  you,  and  persons  in  different 
parts  of  the  country,  advised  me  by  letter  when 
the  telegraph  despatches  came  crowding  and 
threatening,  that  I had  so  said.  The  Intention 
was  to  break  my  faith,  or  at  least  to  remind  me 
that  I had  not  spoken  correctly.  What  now ; 
who  is  right  ? This  Congress  completed  a pro- 
phetic period.  After  it  was  over,  new  scenery 
appeared,  and  a new  act  came  upon  the  stage. 
But  more  of  this  by-and-by. 

Among  the  results  of  this  Congress  will  be  an 
enlargement  of  England’s  poifrer  over  Turkey 


130 


LITTLE  HORN  AND  ANTI-CHRIST. 


and  Egypt.  For  England  must  possess  Constan 
tinople,  because  to  Israel  it  is  promised,  that 
He  shall  possess  the  gates  of  his  enemies,  and 
this  is  one  of  the  finest  gates  in  the  world.  Pal- 
estine will  come  into  the  hands  of  England,  and 
be  opened  up  for  the  return  of  the  Jews,  who, 
when  the  time  comes,  will  go  in  multitudes. 
And  the  lost  tribes  representatively.  “I  will 
take  you  one  of  a city,  and  two  of  a family,  and 
I will  bring  you  to  Zion.” — Jer.  iii.  14.  In  a 
few  years  men  will  understand  why,  in  this 
country,  as  well  as  in  England,  people  are  hunt- 
ing up  their  geneology,  and  by  tradition,  history 
and  heraldry,  trying  to  ascertain  of  what  family 
they  are.  The  re-settlement  of  Palestine  by 
God’ s chosen  people,  the  Lost  Tribes,  no  one  can 
deny  who  reads  and  believes  the  Bible.  Hang- 
ing upon  the  fulfillment  of  this  great  fact  are 
many  other  prophecies  and  events,  which  are  of 
great  interest  to  the  church  and  the  world. 

1st.  The  ten-toed  kingdom  must  be  formed. 
These  kings  are  to  form  an  alliance  with  the 
beast,  or  church  of  Rome,  as  representative  of 
this  beast.  “And  the  ten  horns  which  thou 
rawest  are  ten  kings,  which  have  received  no 
kingdom  as  yet,  but  receive  power  as  kings  one 
hour  with  the  beast.  These  have  one  mind,  and 
shall  give  their  power  and  strength  unto  the 
beast.”  Rev.  xvii:  12.  Thus  strengthened,  the 
beast  will  make  -foir  with  the  saints,  or  chosen, 


LITTLE  HORN  AND  ANTI-CHRIST. 


131 


but  it  will  be  her  final  struggle,  for  in  struggling 
she  will  die.  These  ten  kings  will  forsake  her. 

2d.  Anti-Christ  has  to  appear  after  the  settle- 
ment of  Palestine.  Anti-Christ  is  represented 
by  the  other  little  horn  spoken  of  in  the  text. 
This  little  horn  is  to  come  forth  from  one  of  the 
ten  horns.  He,  too,  will  ally  with  the  beast. 
The  subject  of  anti- Christ  is  a very  interesting 
one ; on  it,  men  have  written  and  speculated 
much  and  wildly.  In  studying  a subject  of  this 
kind,  we  should  first  ascertain  the  scripture 
teachings  on  it,  then  look  for  the  preparative 
signs  in  the  church  and  world,  and  finally,  for 
the  counterpart,  which  once  in  existence  no  one 
can  fail  to  recognize.  The  time,  person  and 
work  of  anti-Christ  have  been  very  clearly  set 
forth  in  the  old  and  new  Testaments,  especially 
by  Isaiah  in  the  fourteenth  chapter  and  twelfth 
to  sixteenth  verses  ; by  Daniel  in  the  seventh  and 
eleventh  chapters,  under  the  symbolism  of  this 
little  horn  ; by  Paul  in  second  Tliessalonians, 
second  chapter  and  first  to  twelfth  verses  ; also 
by  John  in  Revelations,  thirteenth  chapter  and 
nineteenth  chapter  and  twentieth  verse,  besides 
many  other  references. 

Of  Anti-Christ,  the  early  Christian  fathers  had 
different  views.  1st.  Some  thought  that  ho 
would  be  Satan  assuming  the  appearance  of  a 
man.  2d.  Some  thought  he  would  be  a hybrid, 
the  offspring  of  Satan  by  a harlot ; of  this 
opinion  were  Lactantius  and  Sulspitius.  3d. 


132  LITTLE  HORN  AND  ANTI-CHRIST. 

'Hilary,  Jerome,  and  others,  thought  he  would 
be  Satan  incarnated.  4tli.  Chrysostom,  Theo- 
polact  and  Theodoret  thought  he  would  be  a 
real  man  under  the  influence  of  the  devil.  This 
latter  view  we  accept,  as  being  the  nearest  to  the 
Scripture  teaching.  In  the  Scriptures  he  goes 
by  the  names  of  Lucifer,  man  of  sin,  son  of  per- 
dition, and  that  wicked  one.  Now  all  these 
names  are  indicative  of  some  special  feature  of  his 
character.  • Man  of  sin  points  out  the  intensity 
of  the  person  in  wickedness.  As  some  time  ago 
a man  was  called  “ the  wickedest  man  in  New 
York,”  so  anti-Christ  will  be  called  the  man  of 
sin,  having  been  the  greatest  sinner  of  human 
kind. 

From  the  Scriptures  we  find  that  he  will 
be  characterized  by  some  twenty  peculiarities. 
These  we  will  just  enumerate : a cunning  se- 
ducer, a vile  imposter,  a bold  blasphemer,  a 
great  tyrant,  a wonderful  organizer  and  diplo 
matist ; hence  he  will  readily  make  alliances 
with  other  kings  and  strengthen  himself  ; a pre- 
tentious and  hypocritical  communist,  dividing 
his  lands,  money  and  treasure  among  the  people; 
he  will  be  very  ambitious  and  aspiring,  doing  or 
being  anything  so  he  may  gain  his  point ; he  will 
be  very  self  willed  ; he  'will  be  very  boastful, 
speaking  great  words ; he  will  be  very  cruel, 
not  heeding  the  plea  of  woman  ; he  will  be  very 
sacreligious,  sitting  in  the  temple  of  God — that 
is,  the  new  temple,  built  by  the  returned  Jews, 


LITTLE  HORN  AND  ANTI-CHRIST. 


133 


and  actually  claim  to  be  God  ; lie  will  be  a scien- 
tific spiritualist,  able  to  work  miracles,  even  to 
bring  fire  down  from  the  clouds ; lie  will  be 
very  powerful  by  liis  alliance,  apparent  gener- 
osity and  scientific  deception  ; lie  will  be  a great 
liar,  making  treaties  and  breaking  them  when- 
ever it  suits  him  ; he  will  be  very  wicked,  guilty 
of  all  manner  cf  crime  ; his  reign  will  be  short 
as  a king,  only  about  three  and  a half  years. 
Before  this  he  will  have  been  a man  of  power 
and  position.  He  will  suddenly  be  destroyed 
in  the  time  of  a fearful  uprising  of  the  people  ; 
he  will  remain  unburied  in  the  streets  of  Jeru- 
salem for  a time,  then,  finally,  his  remains  will 
be  burnt  up.  These  and  many  other  facts  in- 
spiration furnish  us  beforehand  of  this  most 
wonderful  character. 

Against  this  person  our  Saviour  warned  the 
Jews  and  all  the  Church,  but  especially  the 
Jews,  and  he  did  so  for  special  reasons,  which 
will  appear  hereafter  in  this  discourse.  Christ 
said,  “I  am  come  in  my  Father’’  s name,  and  ye 
receive  me  not ; if  another  shall  come  in  his  own 
name,  him  ye  will  receive .”  At  the  time  of 
anti-Christ’s  death  there  will  be  raging  a fearful 
war,  and  coincident  with  this  war  there  will  be 
another  Saint  Bartholomew  massacre,  in  several 
of  the  ten-toed  kingdoms.  The  beast  and  anti- 
Christ  are  to  be  destroyed  about  the  same  time. 
It  will  be  the  last  plot  of  the  Jesuits,  who  are 
hounding  to  death  poor  Leo  XIIT.  A glimpse 


134  LITTLE  HORN  AND  ANTI-CHRIST. 

of  tliat  time  the  Saviour  showed  to  His  disciples, 
when  he  says : ‘ ‘ For  then  shall  be  great  tribula- 
tion, such  as  was  not  since  the  beginning  of  the 
world,  to  this  time,  no,  nor  ever  shall  be  ; and 
except  those  days  should  be  shortened,  there 
should  no  flesh  be  saved ; but  for  the  elect’ s sake 
those  days  shall  be  shortened.  Then,  if  any  man 
shall  say  unto  you,  Lo  ! here  is  Christ,  or  there, 
believe  it  not ; for  there  shall  arise  false  Christs, 
and  false  prophets,  and  shall  show  great  signs 
and  wonders,  insomuch  that  if  it  were  possible, 
they  shall  deceive  the  very  elect.  Behold  ! I have 
told  you  before.” — Matt.  xxiv.  21,25. 

What  a warning  the  Saviour  gave  the  Jews, 
but  how  little  have  they  and  the  church  heeded 
it.  In  the  second  century  appeared  the  famous 
Bar  Cochebas  with  his  thousands  of  followers, 
who  in  his  final  struggle  was  slain  with  some 
sixty  thousand  of  his  adherents.  Also,  think 
of  Antiochus  Epiphanes  and  his  terrible  delu- 
sions, the  thousands  and  tens  of  thousands  who 
flocked  to  his  standard.  So  marvelous  was  this 
delusion,  that  many  have  actually  made  him  out 
to  be  anti-Christ,  but  those  who  thus  reason 
take  the  shadow  for  the  substance,  and  do  vio- 
lence to  all  true  Scripture  exegesis.  Antiochus 
Epiphanes  could  not  be  anti-Christ,  for  he  was  out 
of  time,  and  meets  but  few  of  the  special  condi- 
tions of  anti-Christ.  History  records  the  ap- 
pearance of  not  less  than  twenty-five  anti-Christs 
or  persons,  who  have  claimed  to  be  the  Messiah 


LITTLE  HOEN  AND  ANTI-CHKIST. 


135 


of  tlie  Jews.  How  unbelief  exposes  a man  or  a 
people. 

Some  have  labored  to  make  it  appear  that 
Mohammed  was  anti-Christ,  but  with  all  his 
badness,  he  is  not  bad  enough  to  be  anti-Christ. 
He  reviled  not  God,  he  never  sat  in  His  temple, 
he  did  not  die  in  Jerusalem.  He  had  an  honor- 
able burial. 

Some  have  tried  to  prove  that  Romanism  and 
the  Popes  were  anti-Christ,  but  this  cannot  be, 
you  will  see  at  a glance.  The  beast  lias  its  own 
character  ; that  was  long  ago  written  out  by  the 
prophets,  and  up  to  the  present  time  it  has  filled 
in  the  outlines  with  a marvelous  minuteness. 
In  these  things  many  good  and  wise  men  have 
erred  in  making  prophecies  fit  certain  persons 
and  nations  and  times,  instead  of  waiting  for 
these  things  to  fit  on  to  prophecy.  Let  us  not 
be  prophetic  forgers.  Let  no  one  deceive  you 
in  these  matters.  Adventism,  Millerism,  Shak- 
erism,  Spiritualism,  are  untimely  excesses.  As 
systems  they  are,  as  yet,  out  of  place.  This 
subject  of  anti-Christ,  as  to  who  he  will  be,  and 
when  he  will  appear,  I shall  be  obliged  to  leave 
for  next  Sunday  evening,  as  my  time  is  up. 
May  the  good  Lord  guide  us  into  the  ways  of 
truth  and  peace. 


ANTI-CHRIST  AND  LITTLE  HORN. 

Discourse,  10. 


SECOND  DISCOURSE  ON  THE  MONSTER — WHO  HE 
WILL  BE  AND  HIS  NAME — HOW  HE  WILL 
OBTAIN  POWER — TROUBLE  EOR  GERMANY, 
ERANCE  AND  RUSSIA — COMMUNISM — ROM- 
ANISM— SHAKERS — MATTHIAS,  WESTCHESTER 
PROPHET, 


Let  no  man  deceive  you  by  any  means ; for  that  day  shall  not 
come,  except  there  come  a falling  away  first,  and  that  man  of 
sin  be  revealed,  the  son  of  perdition;  who  opposeth  and  exalteth 
himself  above  all  that  is  called  God.  or  that  is  worshipped , so 
that  he,  as  God,  sitteth  in  the  temple  of  God,  shewing  himself 
that  he  is  God.” 


E may  reasonably  ask  why  Paul  gave 


the  Thessalonians  this  caution,  and  the 


answer  will  appear  at  once,  if  we  read  his  first 
epistle  to  this  people.  There  you  will  find  Paul 
writing  to  them  about  the  second  coming  of 
Christ,  which  writing  the  Thessalonians  had  evi- 
dently misunderstood,  and  this  misunderstand- 
ing was  working  mischief  among  them.  They 


Text— 2 Tliess*  ii.  3,  4, 


ANTI-CHRIST  A 1ST I)  LITTLE  HORN.  137 

had  false  hopes  and  expectations.  Their  faith, 
instead  of  exciting  them  to  holy  activity  in 
Church  and  State,  had  begun  to  paralyze  all 
their  efforts.  “For  this  we  say  unto  you  by  the 
word  of  the  Lord,  that  we,  which  are  alive  and 
remain  unto  the  coming  of  the  Lord,  shall  not 
prevent  them  which  are  asleep;  for  the  Lord  him- 
self shall  descend  from  Heaven  with  a shout,  with 
the  voice  of  the  Archangel  and  with  the  trump 
of  G-od  ; and  the  dead  in  Christ  shall  rise  first ; 
(that  is  before  Christ  descends),  then  we  who  are 
alive  and  remain  shall  be  caught  up  together 
with  them  in  the  clouds,  to  meet  the  Lord  in 
the  air  ; and  so  shall  we  be  ever  with  the  Lord.’' 
1 Thess.  iv:  1.7-17.  It  was  the  frequent  use  of  the 
pronoun  “we”  that  had  confused  them — we 
who  remain,  we  who  are  alive.  The  Thessalon- 
ians  had  inferred  from  this  that  the  second  com- 
ing of  Christ  would  take  place  in  their  day. 
Hence  to  correct  this  impression  Paul  thus 
writes  in  his  second  epistle.  The  two  verses 
preceding  the  text  show  us  Paul’s  intent.  “Now 
we  beseech  you,  brethren,  by  the  coming  of  our 
Lord  Jesus  Christ,  and  by  our  gathering  to- 
gether unto  Him,  that  ye  be  not  soon  shaken 
in  mind,  or  be  troubled,  neither  by  spirit,  nor 
by  word,  nor  by  letter  as  from  us,  as  that  the 
day  of  Christ  is  at  hand.”  Then  comes  in  the 
text,  “Let  no  man  deceive  you,”  etc. 

In  reasoning  on  such  important  subjects  as 
anti-Christ,  resurrection,  and  second  coming  of 


138  ANTI- CUEIST  AND  LITTLE  IIOEN. 

Christ,  we  should  always  be  mindful  of  the 
Scriptural  order.  When  we  sit  to  take  dinner, 
we  follow  the  order  that  custom  has  prescribed, 
soup,  fish,  meats  and  desert.  Children,  how- 
ever, if  let  alone,  would  reverse  this  order  by  be- 
ginning with  the  desert  first.  So  with  many 
Christians,  they  reverse  the  order  of  things  as 
laid  down  in  the  Bible.  They  make  Christ  to 
come  before  anti-Christ,  and  anti-Christ  to  come 
before  the  Jews  and  ten  Lost  Tribes  are  gath- 
ered together  again  and  settled  after  their  first 
estate  in  Palestine.  The  Millerites  could  neither 
have  deceived  themselves  nor  others,  had  they 
taken  knowledge  of  the  relation  of  things.  The 
Jews  and  Lost  Tribes  had  not  been  gathered  to- 
gether, then,  the  temple  had  not  been  built  in 
Jerusalem,  as  described  in  the  last  chapter  of 
Ezekiel,  neither  had  anti-Christ  appeared.  But 
such  was  the  folly  of  men  then,  and  not  less 
now  than  then.  Four-fifths  of  the  prophecies  of 
the  Bible  refer  to  the  history  of  Judah  and  Israel 
in  their  own  land,  their  captivity  and  return  in 
the  latter  day.  Still  men  take  one  fifth  and  con- 
fuse themselves  and  everybody  else.  They  have 
brought  the  prophets  and  prophecy  into  bad  re- 
pute by  ignorantly  or  willfully  interpreting  the 
same. 

We  freely  avow  now  that  the  prophecy  ful- 
filling at  present  is  the  finding  of  the  Lost  Ten 
Tribes,  then  their  union  with  the  Jews,  then 
their  restoration  to  Palestine,  then  after  being 


ANTI-CHRIST  AND  LITTLE  HORN.  1 39 

settled  there  for  some  time,  the  Jews,  as  Jews, 
having  built  their  new  temple  and  having  estab- 
lished the  Mosaic  Temple  service  again,  and  the 
Lost  Tribes  as  Christians,  then,  and  there,  we 
may  look  for  anti-Christ,  not  before.  Not  for 
the  sake  of  boasting,  and  yet  without  fear,  we 
freely  invite  minister  or  layman  anywhere  to 
disprove  these  facts,  and  to  such  we  will  re- 
spond cheerfully  if  asked  for  further  proof. 
The  Lost  Tribes,  we  believe,  are  come  to  light, 
and  may  be  found  in  the  Saxon  race  chieliy  as 
represented  in  this  country  and  Great  Britain. 
If  this  be  so,  then  we  may  look  for  the  prepar 
atory  signs  in  Providence  and  nations,  and 
thank  Heaven,  these  are  at  hand  and  in  accord 
with  the  Divine  word. 

In  Nebuchadnezzar’s  metallic  image  we  saw 
Rome  symbolized  by  the  legs,  composed  of  iron 
and  clay.  We  saw,  also,  that  the  little  stone 
cut  out  of  the  mountain  began  its  destructive 
assault  on  the  image  by  striking  the  feet — these 
it  would  first  break,  so  Rome  politically  has 
disappeared.  The  ten  toes,  however,  symbolized 
ten  kings,  or  kingdoms  that  were  to  arise  in  the 
latter  day,  or  at  the  time  of  the  end.  These  ten 
kingdoms  are,  also,  symbolized  in  Daniel’s 
dream  by  ten  horns  that  come  out  of  the  head 
of  the  nondescript  animal  that  stood  for  Rome. 
It  is  out  of  one  of  these  ten  horns  that  another 
little  horn  grows,  having  eyes  like  a man,  and  a 
mouth  speaking  great  things — that  is  anti-Christ. 


146  ANTI-CHRIST  AND  LITTLE  HORN. 

It  is  at  once  plain  then,  that  e’er  anti-Christ  can 
appear  these  ten  kingdoms  must  be  formed. 

How,  when,  and  where  will  these  ten  king- 
doms be  formed  ? The  clay  part  of  Rome  is  still 
alive,  and  is  designated  by  Daniel,  and  by  John 
in  Revelations,  under  the  name  of  Beast,  and 
here  you  need  to  be  careful,  for  the  word  beast 
is  sometimes  given  to  anti-Christ,  so  as  not  to 
confound  it  with  the  word  beast  when  it  stands 
for  the  Romish  church.  They  will  be  formed 
out  of  Spain,  Italy,  France  and  part  of  Austria. 
Edom,  Moab  and  the  sons  of  Ammon  in  Aus- 
tria, are  to  be  free — that  is  the  Poles,  Magyars, 
and  Hungarians.  The  setting  up  of  these  ten 
kingdoms  will  begin  in  France  by  a revolution. 
In  this  revolution  the  Roman  church  will  take 
part,  and  put  forward  as  its  candidate  the  pres- 
ent Prince  Napoleon. 

By  the  doctrine  of  infallibility  these  countries 
are  claimed  by  Rome  and  wedded  to  her,  and 
this  doctrine  of  infallibility  makes  a divorce  im- 
possible. Rome  waits  only  her  time  to  reclaim 
her  supposed  own.  And  this  doctrine  of  infalli- 
bility will  make  it  a holy  war,  hence  good  and 
true  Catholics  everywhere  will  be  obliged  to 
snstain  the  same  by  their  money,  or  presence, 
or  prayers.  This,  to  many  of  our  Catholic  friends, 
will  sound  strange.  But  this  they  know,  if 
such  an  emergency  ever  does  arise — they  cannot 
well  fight  against  the  infallible  church — between 
commands  and  duties,  they  will  readily  prefer 
the  pope  and  church  to  king  and  country. 


ANTI  CHRIST  AND  LITTLE  HORN. 


141 


The  Jesuits  are  now,  and  have  long  been  pre- 
paring for  such  an  event ; they  expect  it.  By 
their  plottings  and  intrigues  they  will  again,  as 
many  times  before,  involve  the  church  in  war. 
They  are  busy  sowing  the  seeds  of  discord.  In 
past  time  both  the  church  itself  and  nations 
have  banished  these  crafty  fellows  from  their 
pale  and  country.  The  United  States  alone,  of 
the  nations  of  the  earth,  is  the  only  one  that  has 
not  so  done.  But  even  among  us  they  are  plott- 
ing and  manoeuvering  to  such  an  extent  that  it 
will  not  be  long  before  America  will  be  tested 
and  tried  on  this  same  subject. 

Among  the  preparatory  signs  of  the  coming  of 
anti-Christ  we  have  Communism,  which  is  des- 
tined to  spread  . In  Europe  it  will  unsettle  every 
throne  but  one,  that  is  Israel  England.  We 
fear  that  neither  the  Church  nor  State  compre 
liend  the  terrible  power  that  is  thus  quietly  or- 
ganizing in  this  and  other  lands.  It  is  this  up- 
rising of  the  Communists  and  intriguing  of  the 
Jesuits  in  our  own  land,  that  will  call  General 
Grant  once  more  to  the  front,  as  we  pointed  out 
to  you  months  ago.  The  recent  European 
Congress  resulted  in  patching  up  a temporary 
peace  between  Russia,  England  and  Turkey.  A 
place  will  be  provided  for  the  Duke  of  Edin- 
burgh, who,  having  married  the  Czar’ s daughter, 
will  enable  the  two  powers  to  agree.  He  may 
not  be  the  first  prince,  still  he  and  his  seed  are 
to  find  a kingdom  in  that  place.  Russia  will  be 


142 


ANTI-CHRIST  AND  LITTLE  HORN. 


willing  for  England  to  have  Constantinople,  and 
exercise  a provisional  protectorate  over  Turkey, 
with  a view  of  strengthening  his  daughter's 
chances.  England  will  thus  come  peaceably  in 
possession  of  Palestine. 

Germany,  being  tied  to  both  the  Russian  and 
English  throne  by  blood  and  marriage,  will  also 
freely  consent.  Besides,  Germany  is  going  to 
pass  through  a severe  trial.  The  old  emperor 
will  soon  die,  and  also  Bismarck,  then  a new 
prince  will  advise  the  new  king,  new  counsel 
and  new  blood,  near  and  on  the  throne.  Ger- 
many will  become  a prey  to  internal  strife, 
fanned  by  the  discontented  catholics  of  the  em- 
pire, that  number  some  15,000,000,  and  weak- 
ened by  the  Communistic  elements.  Not  much 
longer  can  Germany  bear  the  strain  of  her  im- 
mense army  and  enormous  taxes  in  consequence. 

Russia  also  will  have  all  she  can  do  to  stay 
the  desire  for  reform,  and  the  claims  of  the  Ni- 
hilists or  Communists.  Thus  will  Providence 
prepare  His  peoples’  way  back  to  Palestine. 

If  God  promises  once  He  does  so  fifty  times, 
that  he  will  restore  Israel  and  Judah  to  their 
own  land.  To  this  one  thing  all  Providence  is 
concentrating,  and  this  is  the  key  that  unseals 
prophecy  and  Providence,  “And  I will  cause 
the  captivity  of  Judah  and  the  captivity  of  Israel 
to  return,  and  will  build  them  as  at  the  first.” 
Jer.  33:7.  They  will  form  a free  province,  elect- 
ing their  own  rulers  and  governors.  They  will 


ANTI-CHRIST  AND  LITTLE  HORN. 


143 


be  quite  democratic,  doing  away  with  all  titles, 
being  the  children  of  the  Lord.  ‘ ‘ And  the  no- 
bles shall  be  of  themselves,  and  their  governor 
shall  proceed  from  the  midst  of  them.”  Jer. 
30:21.  Or,  as  stated  by  Isaiah,  1 chap,  and  20 
verse,  ‘‘And  I will  restore  thy  judges  as  at  the 
lirst,  and  thy  counsellors  as  at  the  beginning  ; 
afterward  thou  shalt  be  called  : The  city  of 
righteousness,  the  faithful  city.”  Thus  they 
will  be  a free  province,  managing  their  own  af- 
fairs under  the  patronage  and  protection  of 
England.  Now  it  is  this  freedom  that  will 
open  the  door  and  prepare  the  way  for  anti- 
Christ.  He  will  be  elected  governor  because  of 
his  supposed  superiority  in  manners,  science 
and  benevolence.  He  will  appear  as  a lamb  at 
first,  according  to  John,  but  once  in  power  his 
true  character  will  appear.  He  will  be  a great 
scientist,  and  in  the  eyes  and  faith  of  the  mul- 
titude he  will  be  able  to  work  miracles — to 
bring,  scientifically,  fire  down  from  Heaven. 
So  clever  will  he  be  that  he  will  decieve  some  of 
the  very  elect. 

Before  his  election,  he  will  have  been  a man 
of  great  power  and  influence.  Once  in  power, 
he  will  contrive  to  center  all  power  and  interests 
in  himself.  He  will  pander  to  the  Communists 
— to  the  Romish  church — to  the  scientific  infi- 
dels of  the  day.  In  this  feature  he  will  draw 
heavily  upon  the  Hermans,  and  create  quite  a 
sympathy  in  England  and  this  country.  “For 


144  ANTI-CHRIST  AND  LITTLE  HORN. 

some  of  them  of  understanding  shall  fall,  to  try 
them,  and  to  purge,  and  to  make  them  white 
even  to  the  time  of  the  end.” — Dan.  11:35. 

The  Scriptures  having  pointed  out  the  special 
features  of  his  character,  we  see  that  many  of 
these  features  are  already  in  the  world.  This  is 
anti-Christ.  This  is  the  spirit  of  anti-Christ. 
And  when  God  withdraws  His  restraining  power, 
anti-Christ  will  embody  all  these  forces  and 
characteristics  in  himself.  And  all  men  having 
these  features,  will  sympathize  with  him,  and 
aid  him.  God  alone  is  now  keeping  back  and 
down,  this  spirit  of  anti-Christ,  until  His  own 
chosen  time.  “And  now  ye  know  what  with- 
holdeth,  that  he  might  be  revealed  in  his  time  ; 
for  the  mystery  of  iniquity  doth  already  work, 
only  he  who  now  letteth  will  let  until  he  be 
taken  out  of  the  way  (that  is,  till  God  withdraws 
himself)  and  then  shall  that  wicked  be  revealed.” 

Anti-Christ  means  one  opposed  to  Christ. 
Also  it  means  one  opposed  to  Christ,  and  yet 
desires  to  be  Christ— who  wishes  to  be  received 
as  Christ.  And  when  the  time  comes  he  will  be 
received  by  many.  The  Jews  will  be  looking 
for,  and  expecting  the  coming  of  their  Messiah, 
hence  many  of  these  will  be  deceived.  Many 
radical  Adventists,  and  Millenarians  will  accept, 
because  they  are  in  haste  in  their  expectations  ; 
many  of  these  will  follow  him.  Indeed,  the 
whole  world  seems  ripe  to  furnish  him  a quota. 
But  who  will  he  be?  Answer:  he  will  be  a 


ANTI-CHRIST  AND  LITTLE  HORN. 


145 


French  Jew,  who  will  inter-marry  into  the  Bon- 
apart  family.  His  title  will  be  Napoleon  I,  of 
Palestine.  This  word  Napoleon,  resolved  into 
Greek  equivalents,  is  equal  to  Apolyon,  and  as 
a number  stands  for  666.  “Here  is  wisdom.  Let 
him  that  hath  understanding  count  the  number 
of  the  beast,  for  it  is  the  number  of  a man,  and 
his  number  is  six  hundred  three  score  and  six.” 
Rev.  13.  18. 

Christ,  when  warning  the  Jews  of  anti-Christ, 
said,  “I  am  come  in  my  Father’s  name,  and  ye 
receive  me  not ; if  another  shall  come  in  his  own 
name,  him  ye  will  receive.”  Here,  and  in  other 
discourses,  we  have  to  content  ourselves  at  many 
points  with  mere  statements,  for  to  defend  every 
point  would  take  too  long  a time,  and  would  not 
suit  our  purpose.  It  is  our  desire  in  all  these 
discourses,  to  incite  you  to  study,  to  teach  you  to 
examine  for  yourselves.  To  prepare  you  against 
being  unduly  led  away  by  Adventism,  Commun- 
ism, or  Infidelity.  To  give  you  an  interest  in 
Providence  and  history.  Do  you  ask,  if  any 
will  be  led  away  by  such  a false  pretender  ? We 
answer  yes — unless  humanity  undergoes  some 
radical  change.  Take  a few  instances  : 

Our  Shaker  friends  believed  in  Mother  Ann 
Lee.  This  woman  in  1770,  while  living  in  Man- 
chester, England,  pretended  to  have  a special 
revelation  from  Heaven,  making  known  unto  her 
that  she  was  the  female  side  of  Christ— as  Jesus 
was  the  revelation  of  the  male  side.  As  Eve  was 


146  ANTI-CHRIST  AJND  LITTLE  HORN. 

taken  out  of  Adam,  the  female  principle  sepa- 
rated from  the  male,  so  she  was  separated  from 
Christ.  This,  and  much  that  is  curious,  do  these 
sincere,  honest  and  industrious  people,  believe. 

Take  another  example,  nearer  home,  and  of 
which  some  of  you  are  cognizant,  having  known 
the  pretender  and  many  of  his  duped  followers. 
We  refer  to  Matthias,  the  Prophet  of  Westches- 
ter county.  This  pretended  Lord  began  his 
labors  in  Albany,  N.  Y.,  in  1830.  First  he 
taught  himself  to  be  God’s  high  priest,  then  the 
Saviour,  then  he  claimed  to  be  God.  On  being 
asked  where  he  was  from  he  would  answer  : “I 
am  a traveler,  and  my  legal  residence  is  Zion 
Hill,  Westchester  county,  New  York  State.  I 
am  a Jewish  teacher  and  priest  of  the  most  High 
God,  saying  and  doing  all  that  I do,  under  oath, 
by  virtue  of  my  having  subscribed  to  all  the  cov- 
enants that  God  hath  made  with  man  from  the 
beginning  up  to  this  time.  I am  chief  high 
priest  of  the  Jews  of  the  Order  of  Melchizedec,  * 
being  the  last  chosen  of  the  Twelve  Apostles, 
and  the  first  in  the  resurrection  which  is  at  the 
end  of  2,300  years  from  the  birth  of  Mohammed 
which  terminates  in  1830.  I am  now  denounc- 
ing judgment  on  the  Gentiles,  and  that  judg- 
ment is  to  be  executed  in  this  age.” 

He  appeared  in  fine  pontifical  robes,  with  a 
rule  six  feet  long  in  his  right  hand;  with  this  he 
was  to  measure  off  God’ s Holy  City.  In  his  left 
hand  he  had  a two-edged  sword.  Underneath 
his  pontifical  robe  he  had  a rich  olive  broadcloth 


ANTI-CHRIST  AND  LITTLE  HORN. 


147 


cloak,  lined  and  faced  with,  silk  and  velvet ; be- 
sides he  wore  a brown  frock  coat,  with  several 
stars  on  each  breast,  with  a splendid  gold  star 
on  the  left.  His  belt  was  of  white  cloth,  fastened 
by  a golden  clasp,  and  surmounted  with  an  eagle. 
He  wore  a cocked  hat  of  black  beaver,  trimmed 
with  green,  the  rear  angle  being  surmounted  by 
the  golden  symbol  of  glory. 

He  moved  from  Albany  to  New  York,  and 
here  succeeded  most  wonderfully,  winning  over 
some  of  the  finest  families  of  Fifth  Avenue,  and 
the  richest  and  best  merchants  of  the  city.  His 
followers  furnished  him  with  plenty  of  money  ? 
carriages,  a mansion  in  the  city,  and  one  in  the 
country.  Finally  he  was  accused  and  detected 
of  the  worst  crimes,  and  at  last  was  sent  to  Sing 
Sing.  While  in  jail  he  issued  the  following 
proclamation  : “As  I live,  there  shall  be  no 

more  sowing  in  the  earth  until  T,  the  twelfth 
and  last  of  the  Apostles,  am  delivered  out  of  the 
house  of  bondage.”  For  fear  of  this  proclama- 
tion many  of  the  farmers  refused  to  sow,  and 
they  set  to  work  to  deliver  him,  and  succeeded. 
He  left  the  jail,  and  may  be  living  yet  to  read 
what  we  now  state  to  you. 

It  is  really  wonderful  how  easily  men  are  de- 
ceived in  religious  matters.  Let  us  study  the 
Word,  ask  God’s  guidance  in  knowing  and  do- 
ing His  will.  Time  is  gone.  I have  said  but 
little,  much  more  might  be  said.  In  my  next 
discourse  I will  introduce  you  to  two  old  men 
who  will  visit  anti- Christ. 


THE  TWO  WITNESSES. 


Discourse,  11. 


TROUBLOUS  TIMES — APPEARANCE  OF  THE  WIT- 
NESSES— WHO  THEY  ARE — HOW  THEY  CAN 
BE  IDENTIFIED — THEIR  MISSION  WORK  AND 
SUFFERING— THE  TIME  AND  CIRCUMSTANCES 
OF  CHRIST’S  COMING. 


“ And  I will  give  power  unto  my  two  witnesses , and  they  shall  pro- 
phecy a thousand  two  hundred  and  three  score  days , clothed  in 
sackcloth 


E will  all  agree  that  the  person  and  work 


of  anti-Christ  are  yet  in  the  future.  For 


while  anti-Christ  is  ruling  in  Jerusalem,  and 
battling  with  the  saints  of  the  Most  High,  hav- 
ing conquered  and  plucked  up  by  the  roots 
three  of  the  ten  horned  kingdoms,  by  his  vic- 
tories and  cunning  craft,  and  his  alliance  with 
the  beast,  or  church  of  Rome,  he  will  become 
proud,  blasphemous  and  arrogant,  and  will  at 
once  try  to  force  the  people  to  worship  the 
beast.  He  will  claim  to  be  the  promised  Jewish 


Text— Rev.  ii.  3. 


THE  TWO  WITNESSES. 


149 


Messiah.  He  will  enter  the  new  Jewish  temple 
and  actually  sit  enthroned  as  Hod  incarnated, 
commanding  the  people  to  worship  him.  He 
will  be  so  received  by  the  Jews,  some  of  the  Is- 
raelites and  the  Romish  Church.  By  the  Com- 
munists and  scientific  infidels,  and  by  “such  as 
do  wickedly  against  the  covenant  shall  he  cor- 
rupt by  flatteries,”  men  of  understanding  shall 
fall ; indeed,  Christianity  will  seem  to  be  about 
destroyed. 

Russia  will  aid  by  her  influence  his  preten- 
sions with  a secret  purpose  to  take  the  spoils 
and  gain  her  long  desired  object,  Jerusalem  and 
Palestine.  England  will  stand  aloof  for  a time 
waiting  an  opportunity  to  interfere.  Then  will 
be  a time  to  try  men’ s faith.  To  test  the  church. 
England  and  America  will  stand  alone  as  repre- 
senting freedom  and  religious  liberty.  ‘ ‘And  then 
shall  many  be  offended  and  shall  betray  one  an- 
other and  shall  hate  one  another.  And  many 
false  prophets  shall  arise  and  deceive  many,  and 
because  iniquity  shall  abound  the  love  of  many 
shall  wax  cold,  but  he  that  shall  endure  unto 
the  end  shall  be  saved.”  This  is  the  time  when 
Communism,  infidelity  and  Romish  Jesuitism, 
will  combine  against  God  and  liberty,  and  thank 
heaven,  this  is  the  time  appointed  when  they  all 
will  be  destroyed.  Then  the  kingdoms  of  this 
world  will  be  given  to  the  saints  of  the  Most 
High.  The  struggle  will  be  fierce,  long  and  ter- 
rible, but  victory  will  be  on  the  Lord’s  side. 


150  THE  TWO  WITNESSES. 

In  the  very  midst  of  these  awful  times  there 
will  appear  two  famous  persons  as  witnesses  for 
Jesus.  One  who  will  specially  appear  to  the 
Jews,  the  other  to  Israel,  and  both  testify  for 
God  and  Jesus.  These  two  witnesses  will  turn 
the  tide  of  battle,  confront  anti-Christ  and  his 
host,  and  give  to  the  world  new  views  of  God 
and  Providence. 

These  two  old  men  or  witnesses,  will  be  en- 
dowed with  miraculous  power  to  bring  fire  down 
from  Heaven,  or  turn  the  water  streams  into 
blood,  and  smite  the  earth  with  all  manner  of 
plagues,  as  often  as  they  will.  Their  presence 
and  power  will  cast  a gloom  o’er  the  nations  of 
the  earth,  and  anti-Christ  and  his  allies.  They 
will  finally  be  slain  in  the  streets  of  Jerusalem. 
At  the  time  of  their  death,  a great  feast  will  be 
held  to  commemorate  the  victories  of  anti- 
Christ,  and  to  inaugurate  the  setting  up  of  an  im- 
age of  him  in  the  temple.  So  in  the  city  there 
will  be  peoples,  kindreds  and  tongues  of  many 
nations.  And  they  will  see  the  dead  bodies  of 
the  two  witnesses  lying  exposed  and  unburied 
in  the  streets  for  three  days  and  a half,  for  anti- 
Christ  will  not  suffer  them  to  be  buried.  On 
the  wings  of  the  wind,  by  the  telegraph  and  by 
signals,  the  news  of  their  death  will  s'pread 
rapidly  abroad  to  all  the  nations  of  the  earth. 
Infidelity  and  Communism,  and  the  Jesuits,  will 
be  emboldened.  Feasting  and  rejoicing  will  be 
the  order  of  the  day.  “And  they  that  dwell 


THE  TWO  WITNESSES. 


151 


upon  the  earth  shall  rejoice  over  them  and  make 
merry,  and  shall  send  gifts  one  to  another,  be- 
cause these  two  prophets  tormented  them  that 
dwelt  upon  the  earth.”  That  will  be  the  merry 
wake  for  you.  A wake  that  will  suddenly  end, 
and  that  too,  before  the  corpses  are  buried. 
The  victories  will  be  cut  short  and  the  rejoicing 
checked. 

The  spirit  of  life  from  God  shall  enter  into 
the  two  exposed  and  corrupting  bodies,  and 
they  shall  stand  upon  their  feet  to  defy  anti- 
Christ  and  his  host,  and  laugh  at  the  pains  of 
death.  Great  fear  will  fall  upon  them  who 
saw  the  dead  so  raised.  This  time  the  telegraphs 
will  be  muffled,  and  the  news  is  kept  back  from 
the  nations  as  much  as  possible, but  astonishment 
ends  not  here,  for  over  the  destroying  and  now 
idolatrous  city  of  Jerusalem  hangs  a peculiar 
cloud,  and  voices  peal  as  thunder  through  the 
air,  to  call  the  attention  of  the  multitudes.  And 
when  every  eye  is  skyward,  the  cloud  moves  and 
opens,  as  a chariot  of  fire  and  glory,  and  rising 
in  majesty  and  composure  up  above  roofs,  tem- 
ples and  pinnacles,  will  be  seen  the  two  witnesses 
of  Christ ; they  enter  in  and  are  borne  heaven- 
ward. “And  they  ascended  up  to  heaven  in  a 
cloud,  and  their  enemies  beheld  them.”  Then 
while  the  multitude  are  wrapped  in  wonder  and 
all  amazement,  the  pinnacles  sway  to  and  fro, 
the  houses  rock,  the  earth  trembles,  the  walls 
of  the  city  fall,  and  Olivet  cleaves  in  twain. 


152 


THE  TWO  WITNESSES. 


Then  anti-Christ  is  slain  with  many  of  his  fol- 
lowers, and  the  remnant  fear  unto  repentance. 
“And  the  same  hour  there  was  a great  earth- 
quake and  a tenth  part  of  the  city  fell,  and  in 
the  earthquake  were  slain  of  men  seven  thou- 
sand, and  the-remnant  were  afrighted  and  gave 
glory  to  the  God  of  heaven ; and  the  seventh 
angel  sounded,  and  there  were  great  voices  in 
heaven  saying,  the  kingdoms  of  this  world  are 
become  the  kingdoms  of  our  Lord  and  of  His 
Christ,  and  He  shall  reign  for  ever  and  ever.” 
These  are  some  of  the  wonders  yet  to  come. 
Then,  how  say  some  that  anti-Christ  has  already 
been  ? The  witnesses  have  not  yet  appeared  ; 
they  have  not  yet  wrought  their  miracles.  The 
Lost  Ten  Tribes  and  the  scattered  Jews,  have 
not  yet  been  gathered  from  all  countries  whither 
the  Lord  God  had  scattered  them,  and  placed 
in  their  own  land,  to  go  out  no  more,  to  be 
plucked  up  no  more.  Jerusalem  is  yet  being 
trodden  under  foot,  the  land  is  comparatively 
desolate,  no  temple  yet  adorns  the  city,  nor 
priest,  nor  Levite,  attend  at  the  altar.  Pshaw  ! 
upon  the  Biblical  interpreters  of  this  day,  who 
willfully  or  ignorantly  careen  through  the  line 
of  prophecies,  despising  the  order  established 
by  God.  They  are  like  the  girl  with  her  novel 
who  cannot  wait  to  read  through  the  book,  and 
take  events  in  their  order,  but  she  turns  to  the 
last  leaf  to  find  the  destiny  of  her  hero.  So  men 
borne  by  passion  and  choice,  skip  by  several 


THE  TWO  WITNESSES. 


153 


of  tlie  prophecies,  and  harp  everlasting  on  the 
last — the  coming  of  the  blessed  Jesns.  “He 
whom  the  heavens  must  receive  until  the  times 
of  restitution  of  all  things,  which  God  hath 
spoken  by  the  mouth  of  all  His  holy  prophets 
since  the  world  began.”  Acts  iii.  21.  The 
world  is  not  yet  ready  for  Christ ; it  is  yet  too 
much  upside  down,  too  much  confused.  But 
God  is  in  Christ  reconciling  the  world  unto  Him- 
self. It  does  not  now  look  like  God ; so  God 
and  Christ,  Providence  and  the  Church,  must 
work  on  till  the  house  is  in  order  for  His  return. 
“ Hon  del  our  anon  men  dexasthai  archri  chro- 
non  apo7cataseos  panton ,”  whom,  indeed,  hea- 
ven must  retain  until  the  time  of  restoration  of 
all  things.  If  things  are  not  now  restored  or 
reconciled,  or  in  order,  why,  then,  Christ  can- 
not come.  He  will  not  come  to  put  them  in 
order ; this  He  has  left  for  and  with  the  church 
to  do,  and  has  promised  to  be  with  His  church 
to  the  end. 

A few  Sunday  evenings  ago,  a brother  kindly 
asked  me  where  the  church  would  be  while  anti- 
Christ  was  reigning.  I simply  said  anywhere 
and  everywhere,  wherever  it  happened  to  be.  He 
thought  the  church  would  be  taken  away  by 
Christ ; he  referred  me  to  several  passages.  I 
said  come  next  Sunday  evening  as  those  passages 
will  be  partly  considered  in  my  next  sermon. 
He  replied  that  he  might  be  taken  up  by  that 
time.  All  right  I said,  then  we  will  excuse  you. 


154 


THE  TWO  WITNESSES. 


Now,  in  the  name  of  common  sense,  why  have 
men  and  why  do  men,  down  through  the  centu- 
ries, and  now,  entertain  such  views  ? Because 
every  bible  reader  must  see  that  there  are  many 
prophecies  that  must  be  fulfilled  before  Christ 
can  come.  One  of  which  is  the  appearance  of 
the  two  witnesses  of  the  text.  They  will  be 
specially  sent  and  commissioned  to  testify  for 
Christ,  as  against  anti-Christ. 

Let  us  now  ascertain  who  these  two  witnesses 
are,  or  are  to  be.  I find  on  examining  the  sub- 
ject all  manner  of  views  set  forth.  And,  as  is 
often  the  case  in  studying  a subject  of  this  kind, 
I find  few  that  agree,  so  much  so  that  at  last  I 
found  relief  in  turning  from  what  men  said  and 
thought,  to  what  God,  in  His  Holy  Word,  had 
written  and  said. 

First — They  are  two  men.  Second — They  are 
sent  to  Jerusalem  which,  because  of  the  wicked- 
ness of  the  city  at  the  time  of  their  visit,  will  be 
called  Sodom  and  Egypt,  but,  lest  we  should 
mistake  the  place  from  these  names,  John  adds: 
“Where  also  our  Lord  was  crucified.”  So 
Isaiah,  1:10  says  : “ Hear  the  word  of  the  Lord, 
ye  rulers  of  Sodom  ; give  ear  unto  the  law  of 
our  God,  ye  people  of  Gomorrah.”  This  fixes 
safely  the  place.  Besides,  the  place  is  pointed 
out  from  the  fact  that  they  oppose  anti-Christ, 
who  at  that  time  we  know  will  be  at  Jerusalem. 
Third— They  are  sent.  You  ask  where  they  are 
sent  from  1 the  answer  is,  from  heaven,  from 


THE  TWO  WITNESSES. 


155 


standing  before  the  God  of  the  whole  earth. 
Fourth — Who  sends  them  1 We  answer  Jesus 
— Because  the  Book  of  Revelations  is  “ the  Rev- 
elations of  Jesus  Christ,  which  God  gave  unto 
John.”  Fifth — What  were  they  sent  for  \ In 
the  first  place  they  were  to  be  special  witnesses 
for  Jesus,  for  He  calls  them  His  two  witnesses. 
In  the  second  place  they  were  to  prophecy,  to 
be  prophets  in  the  fullest  sense,  to  forecast  the 
future,  to  interpret  past  and  present.  To  work 
miracles.  To  assume  control  in  directing  State 
affairs.  Sixth — It  is  worth  your  careful  notice 
to  note  that  they  are  not  constituted  witnesses 
by  being  sent ; they  are  sent  because  they  are 
witnesses.  They  are  not  then  to  be  endowed 
with  miraculous  power  ; “these  have  power  ” in 
the  present  tense.  These  facts,  if  nicely  con- 
sidered, will  at  once  suggest  the  persons. 

Whoever  they  are,  they  must  have  gone  from 
earth  to  heaven  with  their  bodies,  two  persons 
who  have  escaped  death,  for  their  death  takes 
place  in  Jerusalem.  They  must  have  been  pro- 
phets before  they  left  earth  for  heaven  the  first 
time.  And  in  the  third  place  they  must  at 
some  time  and  place  have  been  special  witnesses 
for  Christ.  In  fact  they  are  twro  annointed  ones, 
or,  in  other  words,  they  are  two  persons  who 
have  been  set  apart  and  prepared  for  the  very 
visit  spoken  of  in  the  text. 

Daniel  when  speaking  of  them,  and  the  visit 
spoken  of  in  the  text,  calls  one  “ the  Ancient  of 


156 


THE  TWO  WITNESSES. 


Days;”  tlie  other  one  was  “like  the  Son  of 
Man.”  He  represents  these  two  persons  as  sitt- 
ing in  judgment  on  anti-Christ,  and  the  seven 
horns,  or  kingdoms.  “And  the  ten  horns  that 
were  in  his  head  and  of  the  other  which  came 
up,  and  before  whom  three  fell;  even  of  that 
horn  that  had  eyes,  and  a mouth  that  spake 
very  great  things,  whose  look  was  more  stout 
than  his  fellows  (this  is  anti-Christ)  I beheld, 
and  the  same  horn  made  war  with  the  saints  and 
prevailed  against  them,  until  the  Ancient  of 
Days  came,  and  judgment  was  given  to  the 
saints  of  the  Most  High;  and  the  time  came  that 
the  saints  possessed  the  kingdom.”  Dan.  vii.20. 

Many  interpret  “the  Ancient  of  Days”  and 
the  “ one  like  the  Son  of  Man”  to  be  Christ. 
They  stagger  not  at  the  fact  that  there  are  two 
persons,  and  that  they  are  introduced  one  to 
another,  and  that  the  Ancient  of  days  seems  to 
be  the  greatest.  It  is  nothing  to  such  interpret- 
ers that  there  are  two  persons  ; these  they  make 
one.  The  one  looking  like  the  Son  of  Man  they 
make  out  to  be  the  Son  of  God,  although  Dan- 
iel says  he  only  looked  like  Him.  The  judg- 
ment spoken  of  by  Daniel  they  make  out  to  be 
the  general  judgment,  when  in  fact,  Daniel  tells 
on  what  and  where  they  sat  in  judgment, 
namely,  at  Jerusalem.  About  anti-Christ — 
and  that  anti-Christ  is  soon  destroyed  after  this 
— and  “as  concerning  the  rest  of  the  beasts 
(that  is,  the  seven  horns),  they  had  their  do- 


THE  TWO  WITNESSES. 


157 


minion  taken  away ; yet  their  lives  were  pro- 
longed for  a season  and  a time.  The  vision  and 
scene  of  the  whole  chapter  belongs  to  this 
world,  and  the  kingdom  of  the  saints  here 
spoken  of  is  as  much  material  and  political  as 
the  other.  The  difference  is,  the  rulers  and 
people  are  Christians,  they  are  called  saints. 

Every  throne  should  be  double-kinged  ; that 
is  God’s  purpose,  that  is  heaven’s  plan.  Christ 
wants  no  earthly  throne  excepting  that  way. 
As  the  Creator  is  Lord  of  lords,  and  King  of 
kings,  so  Christ  after  his  resurrection  assumed 
his  father’s  place,  and  stands  to  us  as  God  to 
the  Jews  of  old.  All  power  was  given  to  Him 
in  heaven  and  in  earth,  therefore,  He,  Christ, 
has  long  since  begun  His  reign,  and  He  must 
continue  to  reign  until  He  hath  put  all  enemies 
under  His  feet.  When  David  was  king  over 
Israel  and  Judah,  so  was  God.  We  repeat, 
every  throne  should  be  double-kinged. 

To  this  end  will  come  these  twxo  witnesses. 
Who  will  they  be  % we  answer.  Moses  and 
Elijah,  these  are  the  two  brave  old  men  now'  liv- 
ing and  waiting  to  fulfill  their  mission.  For 
hundreds  of  years  they  have  been  anointed. 
Moses  is  “the  Ancient  of  Days,”  the  “one like 
the  Son  of  Man”  is  Elijah,  the  Tishbite.  This 
interpretation  chimes  in  with  the  Divine  Word, 
without  twisting  and  distorting  to  make  both 
ends  meet. 

We  said  these  two  were  to  be  human  : so  they 


158 


THE  TWO  WITNESSES. 


are.  They  being  sent  from  heaven,  we  said  they 
must  have  passed  by  death  with  their  bodies  ; 
so  they  did.  They  were  to  be  prophets  ; so  they 
are,  two  of  the  grandest  prophets  of  all.  They 
were  to  have  power  over  fire  and  water  ; so  they 
had  when  they  lived  on  earth.  The  bloody 
stream  of  the  Nile  gives  witness  for  Moses.  The 
parched  land  and  time  of  drought  speaks  of 
Elijah  in  Ahab’s  time.  They  both  called  fire 
down  on  them  who  sought  to  hurt  them.  They 
were  to  be  special  witnesses  of  Christ ; so  they 
were  on  the  mount  of  transfiguration.  These 
two  olive  trees  stood  one  on  each  side  of  the 
golden  candlestick,  Jesus.  Peter,  James  and 
John,  testifying  to  having  seen  Moses  and  Elijah. 
These  two  old  veterans  know  Christ  well,  hence 
they  will  be  sent  to  testify  for  Him  against  anti- 
Christ.  Moses  is  a Jew.  He  will  appeal  unto 
the  Jews,  who  wiil  be  found  in  the  new  temple, 
performing  according  to  the  old  Mosaic  law. 
He  will  change  and  lead  his  people  from  anti- 
Christ  to  Christ.  Elijah  is  an  Israelite.  He 
will  specially  bear  testimony  to  the  Israelite,  his 
long  lost  but  then  restored  brethren. 

More  next  Sunday  evening  on  these  two 
Christian  heroes. 


MOSES  AND  ELIJAH. 


Discourse,  12. 


MORE  ABOUT  THE  TWO  WITNESSES — MORMONISM 
— GOD  RULING  AMONG  THE  NATIONS — 
CAREER  OF  THE  TWO  WITNESSES — ANTI- 
CHRIST— THE  THRONE  AND  HOUSE  OF  DAVID. 


Text— Rev.  ii.  15. 

**  And  the  seventh  angel  sounded ; and  there  were  great  voices  in 
Heaven , saying.  The  kingdoms  of  this  world  are  become  the 
kingdoms  of  our  Lord,  and  of  his  Christ ; and  He  shall  reign 
forever  and  ever 


<jT(W AST  Sabbath  evening  we  called  your  atten- 
■?£— t tion  to  two  special  witnesses  who  are  at  a 
given  time  to  appear  at  Jerusalem  for  a specific 
purpose.  At  the  time  of  their  appearance  anti- 
Christ  will  be  reigning  with  great  power  and 
pomp.  He  will  have  succeeded  in  persuading  the 
Jews  and  many  others  that  he  is  the  promised 
Jewish  Messiah  ; this  claim  he  will  be  able  to  sus- 
tain and  confirm  in  the  eyes  of  the  multitude, 
from  the  very  fact  that  he  will,  to  all  appearance, 


160 


MOSES  AND  ELIJAH. 


work  miracles.  Nor  need  we  query  that  such  a 
thing  can  take  place.  Look  at  some  of  the  facts 
of  our  own  day,  and  see  how  pliable  human  na^. 
ture  is.  There  are  millions  of  people  who  sin- 1 
. cerely  believe  that  Leo  XIII.  is  God’s  vicegerent,/ 

' and  that  he  is  infallible.  Take  into  account  the 
Mormonism  of  this  day,  and  see  how  terrible  a 
thing  in  the  name  of  Christianity  can  be  estab- 
lished and  maintained.  Aye,  in  the  nineteenth 
century,  and  in  the  United  States  of  America. 

Or  look  in  upon  the  Spiritualists  and  consider 
their  claims  and  pretensions.  Thousands  upon 
thousands  of  them  are  persuaded  that  they  are 
en  rapport  with  Heaven  and  in  communication 
with  spirits  and  spirit-land.  Then  you  will  not 
be  surprised  at  the  pretentious  claims  and  suc- 
cess of  anti-Christ.  In  our  calm  and  unpreju- 
diced consideration  of  these  organizations,  we 
are  bound  to  admit  that  they  have  done  more, 
and  owe  more  for  their  success,  to  deception  and 
error  than  to  truth  and  openness.  Each  in  its 
turn  has  been  caught  in  the  act  of  deceiving,  and 
has  been  frequently  exposed,  but  of  what  avail  ? 
Truly  but  little.  We  do  not  mean  that  in  these  2 
systems  there  is  no  good, Rf or  surely  there  is,  butt  1 ^ 
that  the  errors  and  deceptions  are  of  so  glaring 
a kind,  tha  t we  wonder  that  anybody  of  com- 
( mon  sense  can  be  so  easily  led  astray,  j 

With  these  facts  before  us,  can  we  wonder 
any  longer  that  anti-Christ  shall  be  so  success- 
ful. The  very  occasion  and  peculiar  times  and 


MOSES  AND  ELIJAH. 


161 


incidents  of  the  reign  of  anti-Christ  will  call  for 
some  special  manifestations  on  the  part  of  the 
Divine  One  that  shall  soberly  and  clearly  con- 
front the  hollow  and  hypocritical  pretentions  of 
that  age.  Hence  the  appearance  of  the  two  wit- 
nesses— Moses  the  Ancient  of  Days,  and  Elijah 
the  Tishbite,  who  will  look  like  the  Son  of  God. 

Allow  ns  to  submit  further  evidence  in  proof 
that  the  two  witnesses  of  John  in  Rev.  XI,  are 
none  other  than  Moses  and  Elijah : for  many 
passages  of  Holy  Writ  are  sealed  to  the  under- 
standing till  we  comprehend  who  the  two  wit- 
nesses are,  their  mission  and  work.  We  will 
notice  the  attributive  features  of  these  witnesses 
as  they  are  related  by  John  in  this  chapter,  that 
is  Rev.  XI. 

In  the  first  place  they  are  two  persons  or  indi- 
vidualities ; this  appears  plainly  from  the  tenor 
of  the  whole  record.  They  are  spoken  of  as 
“they,  them , their  mouth,  their  feet,  as  dying 
and  being  resurrected.’’'1  But,  strange  to  say, 
after  all  this  plainness  of  speech,  men  have  be- 
come so  accustomed  to  spiritualize  and  gener- 
alize that  anti-Christ  stood  for  Rome,  and 
naturally  enough  having  generalized  anti-Christ, 
they  must  do  the  same  with  the  two  witnesses, 
hence  they  found  them  in  the  churches  of  the 
Waldenses  and  Albigenses.  In  such  an  inter- 
pretation nearly  all  the  attributive  features  of 
these  witnesses  are  ignored.  Such  as  that  they 
had  power  to  work  miracles,  to  lie  unburied  in 


162  MOSES  AND  ELIJAH. 

the  streets  of  Jerusalem  for  three  days  and  a 
half.  Some  have  labored  to  prove  that  the  Old 
and  New  Testaments  were  these  witnesses,  others 
that  they  were  symbolized  by  the  law  and  gos- 
pel. Again,  some  that  the  two  sacraments, 
baptism  and  the  Lord's  supper,  were  these  two 
witnesses,  and  so  on  almost  without  end.  These 
instances  will  suffice  for  our  present  purpose ; 
for  surely  any  of  you  reading  God’s  own  word 
need  not  so  blunder. 

In  the  second  place  Jesus  calls  them  His  two 
witnesses.  Now,  in  what  sense  were  they  His? 
for  such  they  are  now.  Not  that  they  will  be 
His  when  they  appear,  but  (hey  will  appear  to 
oppose  anti-Christ  at  Jerusalem  because  they 
are  sent.  The  prophets  are  all  witnesses,  for  as 
Peter  says:  “To  Him  give  all  the  prophets 
witness.”  The  Apostles  were  witnesses,  and  all 
believers  are  witnesses  for  Jesus  ; yet  these  two 
are  so  in  a special  and  pre-eminent  sense.  Let 
any  one  read  the  account  of  the  transfiguration 
of  Jesus  and  the  circumstances  attendant  there- 
on, and  all  will  be  plain.  Moses  and  Elias  (an- 
other spelling  for  Elijah)  we  find  were  present, 
as  well  as  Peter,  James  and  John.  When 
Christ  was  transfigured,  “Behold  there  ap- 
peared unto  them  Moses  and  Elias,”  Matt.  17:3. 
These  two  persons  talked  with  Jesus,  “and 
spake  of  His  decease  which  He  should  accom- 
plish at  Jerusalem.”  Thus,  then,  they  were  spe- 
cial witnesses  for  Christ,  and  so  they  will  come 
again  and  witness  for  Him  in  the  time  appointed. 


MOSES  AND  ELIJAH. 


163 


The  number  of  days  we  must  take  in  a literal 
sense  ; here  the  1,260  days  and  3|  days  are  the 
days  appointed  for  their  work  and  death.  It  is 
well  to  remember  that  many  of  the  prophetic 
numbers  contain  a double  prophecy.  Thus 
1,260  here  may  be  coincident  with  the  treading- 
down  of  Jerusalem  by  Mohammedism.  But 
whether  it  is  or  not,  does  not  vitiate  the  literal 
quantity,  when  applied  to  these  two  witnesses. 
In  the  third  place,  they  are  called  two  olive 
trees  and  two  candlesticks  standing  before  the 
God  of  the  whole  earth.  The  figurative  mean- 
ing will  be  found  by  finding  some  passage  where 
two  trees  are  mentioned  and  the  interpretation 
given — such  a passage  by  Zechariah  4.  Here  the 
prophet  saw  two  olive  trees  and  asked  of  the  angel 
the  meaning  ; and  the  angel  said . “Knowest  thou 
not  what  these  be?”  And  I said,  “No,  my 
Lord.”  Then  said  he,  “ These  are  two 
anointed  ones  that  stand  by  the  Lord  of  the 
whole  earth.”  The  simple  meaning  is,  that  the 
two  olive'  trees  mean  two  persons,  who  are  in 
heaven  at  present,  but  are  anointed,  that  is,  set 
apart,  selected  for  some  distinct  work  for  God. 

Moses  and  Elijah  evidently  were  anointed  and 
specially  selected,  for  it  is  probable  theyboth  es- 
caped death.  The  wonder  connected  with  the  dis- 
appearance of  Moses  and  the  translation  of  Elijah 
now  finds  some  measure  of  explanation.  None 
doubt  the  translation  of  Elijah.  John  the  Baptist 
was  not  Elias,  except  he  was  to  go  before  Christ 


164 


MOSES  AND  ELIJAH. 


in  the  spirit  and  power  of  Elias  ; in  this  sense 
John  stood  for  Elias.  John  the  Baptist  pre- 
pared the  way  of  Christ  the  first  time,  so  will 
Elias  for  Christ’s  second  coming.  The  record 
of  Moses’ s departure  from  this  world  is  as  mys- 
terious as  it  is  dramatic.  But,  certainly,  neither 
the  mysterious  nor  the  dramatic  have  any  mean- 
ing, excepting  we  allow  something  divinely  spe- 
cial. To  die  as  other  people,  would  mean  nothing 
on  the  line  of  specialties,  but  he  did  not  so  die. 
He  went  from  the  people  alive ; no  one  saw  him 
die  or  dead.  He  went  up  into  Mount  Horeb 
and  never  returned.  So,  so  far  as  the  people 
were  concerned,  he  was  to  them  a dead  man,  for 
he  went  from  them  no  more  to  return.  The 
word  death  in  Hebrew  has  not  less  than  six 
meanings,  one  of  which  is  simply  to  disappear. 
This  is  the  meaning  that  we  must  attach  to  the 
death  of  Moses.  Neither  his  grave,  nor  body 
have  ever  been  found. 

There  is  a peculiar  passage  in  the  book  of 
Jude  where  “ Michael  the  Archangel,  "When  con- 
tending with  the  devil,  he  disputed  about  the 
body  of  Moses,  durst  not  bring  against  him  a 
railing  accusation,  but  said,  ‘ The  Lord  rebuke 
thee.'  ” Now,  Satan  then  had  power  over  death 
in  some  way  Divinely  permitted.  Paul  says 
(Heb.  ii,  14);  speaking  of  Christ,  “Forasmuch 
then  as  the  children  are  partakers  of  flesh  and 
blood,  He  also  Himself  likewise  took  part  of  the 
same ; fliat  through  death  He  might  destroy 


MOSES  AND  ELIJAH. 


165 


him  that  had  the  power  of  death , that  is,  the 
Devil.”  When  God  was  translating  Moses, 
passing  him  by  death,  Satan  fought  with  Michael, 
who  was  God’s  messenger,  to  inflict  the  sting  of 
death  on  Moses,  and  although  Michael  carried 
Moses  on  by  death  into  the  presence  of  God, 
Satan  durst  not  bring  a railing  accusation 
against  him. 

Jude,  in  his  epistle,  probably  quoted  from 
one  of  the  now  lost  books  of  Revelation,  which 
was  entitled,  “ The  Ascension  or  Assumption  of 
Moses  the  Servant  of  God.”  The  church  father, 
Origen,  makes  mention  of  this  work,  but  like  the 
book  and  prophecies  of  Enoch,  from  which  Jude 
makes  a quotation,  it  has  been  lost,  they  having 
served  their  purpose.  The  fairest  and  most  gen- 
erous interpretation  then  is  that  Moses  did  not 
die  the  ordinary  death,  but  disappeared,  was  in 
fact  translated,  anointed  and  set  apart  for  a 
special  work  in  connection  with  his  own  people, 
the  Jews,  in  the  days  of  the  coming  anti-Christ. 
Thus,  without  any  trouble,  he  could  appear  with 
Elijah  on  the  Mount  of  Transfiguration.  And 
it  is  worthy  of  note  that  before  he  disappeared 
in  Horeb — the  sacred  writer  is  mindful  to  tell  us 
“Moses  was  an  hundred  and  twenty  years  old 
when  he  died — his  eye  was  not  dim  nor  his  natu- 
ral force  abated”  Deut.  xxiv.7.  But  supposing 
Moses  died  naturally,  there  is  nothing  unreason- 
able or  irregular  in  concluding  that  God  resur- 
rected him  as  a mortal  for  future  use.  True  he 


166 


MOSES  AND  ELIJAH. 


will  die  again  as  a witness ; so  there  are  in 
heaven  now  eight  persons  who  have  died  twice 
in  this  world.  Namely : 

The  child  raised  by  Elijah — I Kings,  xvii,  21. 

The  child  of  Elisha — II  Kings,  iv,  85. 

The  Moabite  soldier  who  came  to  life  on  touch- 
ing the  bones  of  Elisha — II  Kings,  xiii,  21. 

The  daughter  of  Jarius — Luke  viii,  55. 

The  widow’s  son  at  Nain — Luke  vii,  15. 

Lazarus  of  Bethany — .John  xi,  44. 

Dorcas  or  Tabitha  by  Peter — Acts  ix,  40. 

Eutyclius  by  Paul — Acts  xx,  10. 

Anti-Christ  will  be  a great  electrician  ; elec- 
tricity by  that  time  will  be  a fearful  power  iu 
the  hands  of  science.  Edison  with  his  genius 
and  marvelous  discoveries,  and  others  of  like 
gifts,  will  have  perfected  the  use  of  this  agent  in 
a wonderful  degree.  Anti-Christ  will  make  use 
of  this  power  to  cower  his  enemies  and  bring 
them  in  fear-subjection.  He  will  bring  fire  down 
from  Heaven.  The  two  witnesses,  however,  will 
be  clothed  with  Divine  power  ; they  will  be  able 
to  bring  fire  by  a simple  command — this  they 
both  understood  and  used  when  on  earth. 

Moses  called  fire  down  upon  the  250  rebellious 
Korahthites,  as  we  read  in  Numbers  16.  Aliab, 
the  King  of  Israel,  thought  to  punish  and  com- 
pel the  obedience  of  Elijah  ; but  God  gave  fire 
from  Heaven  in  answer  to  the  prophet’s  prayer. 
So  when  Ahaziali  sent  a captain  and  fifty  men  to 
bring  Elijah  into  the  king’s  presence,  they  found 


MOSES  AND  ELIJAH. 


167 


him  sitting  on  the  top  of  a hill  and  commanded 
him  to  come  down.  “And  Elijah  answered  and 
said  to  the  captain  of  fifty,  If  I be  a man  of  God, 
then  let  fire  come  down  from  Heaven,  and  con- 
sume thee  and  thy  fifty.  And  there  came  down 
fire  from  Heaven,  and  consumed  him  and  his 
fifty.” — II  Kings,  1.  10.  Thus  will  these  two 
anointed  ones  be  able  to  contend  with  anti- 
Christ  and  all  the  powers  of  scientific  infidels. 
“If  any  man  hurt  these  two  witnesses,  by  the 
very  means  used  so  shall  they  be  killed.” 

“ These  have  power  to  shut  Heaven,  that  it 
rain  not  in  the  days  of  their  prophecy,  and  have 
power  over  waters  to  turn  them  to  blood.”  To 
whom  would  these  gifts  and  attributes  apply 
better  than  to  Elijah,  who,  in  the  days  of  the 
wicked  king  Aliab,  sealed  the  Heavens  against 
rain  for  three  years  and  a half.  And  to  Moses, 
when  contending  with  Pharoah,  turned  the  sweet 
flowing  Nile  into  a stream  of  blood.  What  two 
prophets  had  such  a wide  range  of  prophetic 
energy  and  liberty  as  Moses  and  Elijah  \ None. 
Well  may  the  Re  vela  tor  say,  then,  of  them,  that 
they  can  smite  the  earth  with  all  manner  of 
plagues  as  often  as  they  will. 

By  awful  and  sublime  manifestations  the 
world  shall  see  that  God  rules  in  the  Heaven  and 
on  the  earth.  Shall  learn  that  anti-Christ  is  a 
false  Christ.  Then  shall  fear  and  repentance 
fall  upon  the  people.  The  Jews  shall  be  con- 
vinced and  converted  and  persuaded  by  the  ap- 


168 


MOSES  AND  ELIJAH. 


pearance  of  their  beloved  Moses.  They  shall 
know  of  a truth  that  the  Messiah  has  been,  and 
is  waiting  to  come  again.  Referring  to  that 
time  the  prophet  Zechariah  calls  it  a time  of 
trembling,  the  time  of  a terrible  siege.  But  he 
tells  us  that  “The  Lord  also  shall  save  the  tents 
of  Judah  first , that  the  glory  of  the  house  of 
David,  and  the  glory  of  the  inhabitants  of  Jeru- 
salem do  not  magnify  themselves  against 
Judah.”  Thus  we  learn  that  the  Jews,  who 
have  been  so  long  despised  and  bereft  of  a king, 
country  and  government,  shall  see  through  the 
great  mystery  of  Providence  first.  The  house 
of  David  is  found  in  the  royal  family  of  Eng- 
land. The  Jews,  seeing  this,  will  invite,  in  con- 
cert with  all  the  inhabitants  of  Jerusalem,  the 
English  government  to  take  charge  of  the  affairs. 

“Then  shall  the  children  of  Judah  and  the 
children  of  Israel  be  gathered  together  and  ap- 
point themselves  one  Head.” — Hosea  1.  2.  The 
Jews  will  then  be  Christians.  “ For  they  shall 
look  upon  Him  whom  they  have  pierced,  and 
they  shall  mourn  for  Him,  as  one  mournetli  for 
his  only  son.” 

At  this  time  the  whole  world  will  be  amazed 
and  confounded  at  the  destruction  of  anti- 
Christ  and  his  host.  The  Jews,  the  house  of 
David,  and  the  Lost  Tribes,  Israel,  the  Saxons, 
will  hold  a council  in  Jerusalem.  David’ s house, 
which  God  selected,  and  throne,  both  of  which 
the  Almighty  promised  perpetuity  to,  shall  be 


MOSES  AND  ELIJAH. 


169 


found  and  recognized  in  tlie  English  throne  and 
royal  family.  The  Saxon  race  shall  distinctively 
appear  as  long  lost  Israel.  So  that  the  Jews, 
and  David's  house,  and  Israel,  will  unite  and  ac- 
knowledge Christ  as  Lord  and  master.  They 
will  make  known  to  America,  who  stands  for 
Manasseli,  and  all  the  colonies,  the  decision  of 
said  council ; all  parties  will  see  and  accept  and 
federate  for  the  world’s  conquest  and  peace. 

This  federation  of  the  ancient  people,  the 
literal  seed  of  Abraham,  will  cause  jealousies 
and  alliances  on  the  part  or  rest  of  the  world, 
excepting  some  portions  of  France,  Austria  and 
Prussia.  The  beast,  dragon  and  anti-Christ’s 
force  that  will  survive  the  shock  of  the  two  wit 
nesses,  will  all  unite  for  an  onslaught  upon  Eng- 
land, but  especially  Palestine.  Russia,  though 
nominally  Christian,  will  join  the  beast  or  Rom- 
ish church.  The  dragon  means  the  Pagan  por- 
tion of  the  world.  Thus  will  be  inaugurated 
the  battle  of  Armageddon,  the  issues  of  which 
we  are  permitted  to  know  through  Revelation. 
Then  will  the  kingdoms  of  this  woi'ld  become  the 
kingdoms  of  our  Lord  and  His  Christ. 

With  many,  and  to  many,  these  things  are  but 
as  dreams  ; they  are  chimerical.  But  one  thing 
is  certain  ; the  history  of  the  church  and  Provi- 
dence in  the  future  are  appallingly  grand.  Prov- 
idence was  grand  in  leading  forth  His  people  of 
old  from  Egypt.  But  he  will  be  no  less  grand 
when  He  shall  set  His  hand  a second  time  to  re- 
cover His  people  as  he  has  promised  to  do, 


170 


MOSES  AND  ELIJAH, 


“Behold,  the  days  come,  saith  the  Lord,  that 
I will  raise  unto  David  a righteous  branch,  and 
a king  shall  reign  and  prosper,  and  shall  execute 
judgment  and  justice  in  the  earth.  In  His  days 
Judah  shall  be  saved,  and  Israel  shall  dwell 
safely,  and  this  is  His  name  whereby  He  shall  be 
called,  The  Lord  our  Righteousness.  (That  is, 
the  rulers  of  God’s  choice— a king — then  in  fact 
by  Divine  right).  Therefore,  behold,  the  days 
come,  saith  the  Lord,  that  they  shall  no  more 
say,  the  Lord  liveth  which  brought  up  the 
children  of  Israel  out  of  the  land  of  Egypt. 
But  the  Lord  liveth  which  brought  up  and 
which  led  the  seed  of  the  house  of  Israel  out  of 
the  North  country,  and  from  all  countries 
whither  I had  driven  them,  and  they  shall  dwell 
in  their  own  land.” — Jer.  23.  6. 

God  has  now  one  of  the  seed  of  David  on  the 
throne,  and  He  has  a Jew  doing  her  bidding, 
executing  her  decrees  over  and  for  Israel.  For, 
though  Israel  were  to  be  numerous  and  power- 
ful, yet  to  David’s  seed  belongs  the  throne. 

The  recent  Congress  was  but  a forerunner  of 
the  one  yet  to  come.  The  crownless  king,  Dis- 
raeli, who  forced  the  Congress,  is,  perhaps,  an 
unconscious  instrument  in  the  hands  of  Provi- 
dence. But  whether  he  be  or  not,  he  is  hasten- 
ing on  the  day  with  lightning  speed.  Forth 
from  the  recent  Congress  he  goes,  having  once 
again  linked  the  destinies  of  England  to  the 
Continent,  which  has  been  so  strangely  severed, 


MOSES  AND  ELIJAH. 


171 


till  Russia,  Italy,  Austria,  France  and  Spain, 
might  each  test  the  other,  and  each  find  their 
appointed  place.  Now,  again,  England  pledges 
herself  a continental  power — nay,  more — an 
Asiatic  power.  She  will  come  forth  from  the 
Congress  the  virtual  ruler  of  Turkey,  the  owner 
of  Palestine. 


BATTLE  OF  ARMAGEDDON. 


Discourse,  13. 


THE  COMBATANTS  ON  BOTH  SIDES— WHO  “THE 
KINGS  OF  THE  EAST”  ARE  — THE  GREAT 
NAPOLEONIC  IDEA — DISRAELI,  LINCOLN  AND 
GRANT — ENGLAND’S  POLICY  IN  TURKEY  — 
FUTURE  WARS  AND  INTRIGUES — THE  GREAT 
BATTLE  FIELD — GATHERING  OF  THE  NATIONS 
— EARTHQUAKES — JERUSALEM  A SEAPORT. 


Text— Rev.  xvi.  16* 

“ And  he  gathered  them  together  into  a place  called \ in  the  Hebrew 
tongue , Armageddon 


u^2.HRISTIAN  students  and  prophetic  writers 
are  generally  agreed  on  three  things,  touch- 
ing this  great  event.  First,  that  there  is  to  be 
such  a decisive  battle  fought.  Second,  that  it 
will  take  place  in  some  part  of  Palestine.  Third, 
that  this  great  struggle  will  be  final,  the  end  of 
war,  the  beginning  of  the  Millennium  morn. 

In  the  Scriptures  the  contestants  are  pointed 
out,  as  they  rally  under  the  standards  of  the 
dragon,  the  beast  and  anti-Christ  on  one  side, and 


BATTLE  OF  ABM AGEDDON. 


173 


on  the  other,  under  the  standard  of  David,  will 
be  the  called , the  chosen  and  the  faithful.  Or  in 
other  words,  the  Ten  Lost  Tribes,  as  found 
chiefly  in  the  Saxon  race,  with  all  who  sincerely 
believe  on  the  Lord  Jesus  Christ. 

In  another  sermon  we  point  out  to  you  the 
plain  fact  of  the  existence  of  David’s  throne  and 
David’s  seed,  as  found  and  seen  specially  in  the 
throne  of  England.  We  there  see  how  faith- 
fully God  has  kept  his  promise  to  David  and 
his  people.  For  God  frequently  told  David 
that  his  throne  should  be  established  unto  all 
generations,  and  of  David’s  seed  there  should 
never  be  wanting  a man  to  sit  thereon.  It  is 
the  permanence,  the  grandeur  and  progressive 
character  of  this  throne  and  people  that  make  it 
a fitting  type  of  Christ  and  His  church.  Nay, 
more,  it  is  on  this  throne  that  Christ  now  sits, 
so  far  as  this  world  goes ; and  it  is  through  this 
people  that  He  reigns,  and  He  will  and  must 
reign  until  He  has  conquered  a universal  peace. 
It  is  a delusion  too  long  entertained  by  the 
church  to  think  that  David’s  throne  and  seed 
have  not  now,  nor  for  centuries  had  an  existence. 
It  is  a delusion  that  we  should  not  entertain  for 
a moment,  to  think  that  the  Ten  Tribes  of  Israel 
are  lost  forever,  or  that  their  work  or  mission  is 
fulfilled.  As  surely  as  the  two  tribes,  Judah 
and  Levi,  now  exist,  fulfilling  and ' filling  in 
the  outlines  of  prophetic  history,  so  surely  are 
Reuben,  Simeon,  Zebulun,  Issachar,  Dan,  Gad, 


174 


BATTLE  OF  ARMAGEDDON. 


Asher,  Naphtali,  Benjamin,  Ephraim  and  Man- 
asseh  in  existence,  answering  the  purpose  of  an 
all-seeing  Providence. 

Who  are  the  kings  of  the  East  spoken  of  in 
the  Scriptures  ? We  answer,  they  are  the  royal 
ones  of  the  house  of  David.  The  word  king, 
both  in  Hebrew  and  Greek,  means  such.  This 
seed  God  chose,  and  made  them  royal  by  that 
very  selection.  They  have  been  away  from  their 
own  land,  Palestine,  wandering  and  dwelling  in 
the  West.  But  God  in  Providence  is  preparing 
a way  for  their  return.  In  connection  with  the 
pouring  out  of  the  sixth  vial  upon  the  great 
river  of  the  Euphrates,  or  upon  Turkey,  as 
most  writers  agree,  the  waters  are  to  dry  up — 
that  is,  Turkey  is  to  decay,  to  be  absorbed. 
And  why?  “That  the  way  of  the  kings  of  the 
East  might  be  prepared.” — Kev.  xvi,  12. 

These  kings  have  been  away  from  the  East, 
and  their  return  is  assured,  and  the  preparation 
for  such  return  is  to  be  seen  at  this  time  and  in 
connection  with  the  decay  of  Turkey.  If  Tur- 
key, as  symbolized  by  the  river  Euphrates,  is 
drying  up,  then  these  kings  must  be  advancing 
eastward  ; and  so  they  are. 

The  crownless  king,  Disraeli,  who,  like  many 
other  men  God  has  raised  up,  is  for  these  times 
an  index  finger  pointing  out  the  way  of  Provi- 
dence. He  is  a receptive  agent  of  Divine  force, 
to  the  intent  that  he  may  interpret  a divine  pur- 
pose. He  may  know,  or  he  may  not  know,  that 


BATTLE  OF  ARMAGEDDON. 


175 


he  is  so  directed  of  heaven.  The  prophets  of 
old  were  seldom  permitted  to  interpret  or  un- 
derstand their  own  prophecies.  If  they  asked, 
like  Daniel,  the  meaning,  they  were  told  to  “go 
their  way,  for  often  times  the  words  were  closed 
up  and  sealed  until  the  time  of  the  end.”  No 
wonder  this  man  against  all  England,  nearly, 
and  to  the  amazement  of  all  the  world,  proclaims 
the  Queen  of  England  the  Empress  of  India,  for 
the  way  of  the  kings  of  the  East  must  be  pre- 
pared. 

Napoleon  Bonaparte’s  grand  idea  was  to  pre- 
pare the  way  of  the  kings  of  the  East  and  make 
himself  and  his  descendants  these  kings.  ‘ ‘ Con  - 
quer  England  and  the  world  is  ours,”  he  said. 
But  when  his  secret  and  well  prepared  assault 
on  England  was  revealed  and  frustrated  by  a 
train  of  Providential  events,  he  hit  upon  another 
plan  to  get  possession  of  Palestine.  Seventy 
years  ago  he  invited  all  the  leading  Jews  of  the 
world  to  a secret  council  in  Paris  ; he  wished 
them  to  aid  him  in  getting  possession  of  Pales- 
tine. He  pretended  to  want  their  return.  He  gave 
them  certain  privileges  and  labored  to  procure 
more  from  the  other  nations  ; he  did  much  for 
the  Jews  in  enlarging  their  liberties  and  taking 
away  from  them  the  curse  of  society.  The  one  idea 
that  is  distinctly  Napoleonic,  is  to  possess  Pal- 
estine. The  late  Napoleon  had  his  idea,  and  in 
his  day,  this  idea  had  become  a part  of  France  ; 
so  much  so,  that  France  thought  herself  to  be 


176 


BATTLE  OF  ARMAGEDDON. 


then  and  now,  the  real  protector  of  Palestine. 
It  was  for  this  idea  that  she  allied  with  England 
and  Turkey  in  the  Crimean  war.  It  was  to  keep 
Russia  back  from  possessing  the  holy  places. 
Not  till  France  was  weakened  could  England 
advance  on  her  way  East  rapidly  ; so  Germany 
was  used  to  destroy  her  prestige,  and  cause  her 
to  stand  aside  till  England  proceeds  on  her  way 
homeward. 

It  was  a comely  sight,  some  five  years  ago, 
to  see  two  Jews  closeted  together  making  a 
secret  bargain  ; one  had  power,  the  other  had 
money.  The  man  of  power  asked  the  man  of 
money  to  lend  him  twenty  million  dollars  ; it 
was  done.  At  once  the  man  of  power  purchases 
with  this  twenty  million  part  of  his  fatherland 
back  again — the  Suez  canal.  This  very  canal  is 
on  the  boundary  of  the  Land  of  Palestine  as 
given  to  Abraham  centuries  ago.  By  this  very 
route  the  old  Patriarch  entered  the  Promised 
Land.  It  was  fitting,  indeed,  that  this  should 
be  the  first  piece  purchased  back.  No  one  knew 
save  those  directly  interested.  England  mur- 
mured and  France  protested,  but  the  thing  was 
done.  Poor  France,  bleeding  and  divided,  could 
do  but  little,  for  Disraeli  and  Rothschilds  had 
done  the  work.  The  way  of  the  kings  of  the 
East  must  be  prepared.  So  on  they  go.  A 
man  who  executes  a Divine  purpose  is  always 
strong.  Abraham  Lincoln,  in  the  history  of  our 
country,  was  so  chosen  and  led  of  God.  The 


BATTLE  OF  ARMAGEDDON.  177 

politicians,  and  statesmen,  and  generals,  and 
many  of  the  people  were  against  him  at  first, 
but  the  Lord  was  with  him,  so  he  marched  on  to 
victory,  the  country  following  in  the  wake. 
And  though  dead,  not  forgotten,  the  country 
and  the  civilized  world  are  marching  on  after 
him  and  now  they  have  nearly  overtaken  him. 
Lincoln’s  ideas  and  the  country’s  are  nearly 
equal.  A man  led  of  God  is  generally  a good 
distance  behind,  and  the  people  led  by  such  a 
man  are  equally  as  far  behind  him  as  he  is  behind 
God.  But  this  nation  and  Abraham  Lincoln 
are  now  one,  and  in  those  things  in  which  they 
once  were  divided  they  are  a unit,  with  more 
than  the  honored  Lincoln,  for  they  are  a unit 
with  God  and  Providence.  Thus  follows  the 
English  nation  in  the  wake  of  Disraeli,  and  the 
world  is  coming  on  behind,  and  the  day  will 
come  when  all  will  be  a unit.  It  does  not  shock 
our  idea  of  human  honesty  much  when  we  learn 
that  this  crownless  king  played  a double  game 
with  Russia  and  Turkey.  It  is  intensely  Jew- 
ish, but,  if  it  were  only  Jewish,  then  it  would 
be  very  detestable  ; it  is  more,  it  is  Divine  in 
part.  “Had  the  princes  of  this  world  known 
they  would  not  have  crucified  the  Prince  of 
Glory.”  Had  the  princes  of  the  late  Berlin 
congress  known  the  double  game  being  played 
by  one  of  the  quietest  of  their  number,  they 
would  not  have  done  as  they  did.  Turkey  in 
Asia  was  given  over  to  England’s  protection, 


178 


BATTLE  OF  ARMAGEDDOX. 


aye,  yes,  that  included  Palestine.  The  island 
of  Cyprus  is  given  over  entirely — surely  the  way 
of  the  kings  of  the  East  is  being  grandly  pre- 
pared. 

Why  didn’t  the  Congress  hand  over  to  Eng- 
land’ s protection  Turkey  in  Europe  ? For  rea- 
sons good  and  sufficient.  Turkey  in  Europe 
will  be  the  cause  of  much  strife,  of  several  wars 
and  of  strange  alliances,  hence  it  would  not 
have  done  for  Israel-England  to  be  mixed  up 
with  it.  Constantinople,  alone,  of  European 
Turkey,  England  will  keep.  Israel  is  to  be 
much  preserved  from  war,  until  the  great  battle 
of  Armageddon  comes  on.  Against  that  time 
she  will  have  to  husband  her  strength  and  re- 
sources. It  is  marvelous  now,  to  think  that 
what  the  Congress  settled  as  belonging  to  Eng- 
land, none  dispute — all  is  peace.  But  Russia’s 
share  and  Austria’ s are  in  arms.  Servia,  Greece, 
Roumania,  and  all  the  Turkish  Provinces,  rebel, 
and  are  in  a state  of  disquietude,  that  portends 
war  and  strife  again  in  a few  years.  But  Eng- 
land will  have  nothing  to  do  with  it,  excepting 
that  Russia  and  Austria,  with  the  consent  of  Ger- 
many, Italy,  and  France,  are  to  set  a precedent 
for  England,  which  in  a few  years  she  will  need. 
It  is  plain  that  if  Russia  and  Austria  can  force 
by  arms  the  condition  of  the  Berlin  Congress, 
England  will  be  at  liberty  to  do  the  same 
without  any  interference,  even  from  France. 
The  Congress  handed  over  to  England’s  keeping, 


BATTLE  OF  ARMAGEDDON. 


179 


Turkey.  England  then  can  make  Turkey  do 
her  bidding  by  force  of  arms  sustained  by  the 
very  precedent  already  set.  Thus  will  Israel- 
England  open  up  Palestine  for  Christian  settle- 
ment. The  Moliammeds  will  murmur  and  re- 
sist, to  have  the  Holy  Places  taken  from  them, 
but  no  matter ; England,  when  the  time  comes, 
will  enforce  it.  It  is  just  here  that  Turkey  and 
England  will  dispute,  and  in  each  dispute,  Eng- 
land will  find  a reason  for  drawing  the  lines  a 
little  tighter  around  poor  Turkey. 

The  contestants  on  one  side,  at  the  great  bat- 
tle of  Armageddon,  you  remember,  are  the 
Dragon,  the  Beast  and  Anti-Christ.  Now  what 
people  is  represented  by  the  term  Dragon  ? We 
answer,  the  Pagan  nations,  and  authorities,  just 
as  the  Chinese  have  on  their  standard  to-day,  a 
dragon,  as  we  have  the  eagle.  The  Mohamme- 
dans, Hindoos,  Brahmins,  Buddhist  and  all 
Pagan  idolaters,  are  summed  up  in  the  word 
Dragon.  At  present,  England  is  tolerant  with 
the  subjects  and  adherents  of  these  different 
worshipers  and  religions,  but  the  time  will  come 
when  she  will  not  longer  tolerate  the  same — thus 
will  they  arrange  themselves  against  her  in  the 
battle  of  Armageddon.  This  will  come  to  pass 
as  the  gradual  destruction  of  Mormonism  in  our 
country.  This  system  has  been  fortified  by  law 
— now  laws  are  being  arranged  against  it.  It  is 
now  only  tolerated,  and  in  a short  time  it  will 
be  wiped  out  of  existence 


180 


BATTLE  OE  ARMAGEDDON. 


The  final  battle  referred  to  in  the  text  is  to 
occur  at  a place  called  in  the  Hebrew  tongue 
Armageddon,  the  literal  meaning  of  which 
is  at  the  Mount  of  Megiddo.  In  olden  times 
there  was  a city  called  Megiddon ; it  stood  in 
what  is  now  called  the  great  plains  of  Esdraelon, 
a plain  that  lies  midway  between  the  sea  of 
Galilee  and  the  Mediterranean.  It  was  also 
called  Jezreel.  The  prophet  Hosea  speaks  of 
this  place,  battle  and  time,  all  by  this  one  word. 
Referring  to  the  time  when  the  Children  of 
Judah  and  of  Israel  are  gathered  together  under 
one  head  in  their  own  land,  he  says:  “For 
great  shall  be  the  day  of  Jezreel.”  Hos.  i.  11. 
It  is  spoken  of  in  the  Scriptures  and  history,  as 
the  valley  of  Jelaoshophat,  because  here  Jehos- 
liophat,  the  king  of  Judah,  gained  a great  vic- 
tory, for  here  the  Lord  fought  against  the  ene- 
mies of  Israel,  as  he  will  in  the  coming  battle. 
Joel  iii.  12.  says,  referring  to  this  coming  strug- 
gle, “ Let  the  heathen  be  waked  up  and  come  to 
the  valley  of  Jelioshophat,  for  there  will  I sit 
to  judge  all  the  heathen  round  about.” 

There  is  one  name  given  to  this  time  and  bat- 
tle that  is  very  significant  and  striking.  Have 
you  ever  noticed  it  1 If  not  let  me  call  your  at- 
tention to  it.  It  is  called  “ That  great  day  of 
God  Almighty ,”  by  John  in  the  chapter  of  the 
text.  The  day  of  the  Lord  of  Hosts  by  Isaiah. 
Ezekiel  30,  iii.  “ Howl  ye  ! Woe  worth  the  day, 
for  the  day  of  the  Lord  is  near  ; it  shall  be  the 


BATTLE  OF  ARMAGEDDON. 


181 


time  of  the  heathen.”  And  Joel  says,  “Multi- 
tudes, multitudes  in  the  valley  of  decision,  for 
the  day  of  the  Lord  is  near  in  the  valley  of  de- 
cision.” By  the  prophets  Amos,  Obadiali, 
Zephaniah,  Zechariah,  Malaclii,  and  Paul  and 
Peter,  it  is  called  the  day  of  the  Lord. 

You  ask  if  this  battle  may  not  have  taken 
place.  We  answer  no.  Of  such  a battle  we 
have  no  record.  Again  it  will  be  the  end  of 
war — the  final  overthrow  of  Paganism,  the  Beast 
and  Anti-Christ.  Malachi  says,  “Behold,  I 
will  send  you  the  prophet  Elijah  before  the 
coming  of  that  great  and  dreadful  day  of  the 
Lord.”  Elijah  has  not  yet  been  as  a witness. 
At  the  time  of  this  great  battle  nature  is  to  take 
a wonderful  part.  As  when  Christ  was  on  the 
cross  the  sun  darkened,  the  rocks  rent,  the 
mountains  shook  ; so  in  connection  with  this 
battle,  there  shall  be  some  strange  wonders. 
Earthquakes,  thundering,  lightning,  hail  and 
fire.  The  Mount  of  Olives  will  divide,  the  val- 
ley of  the  Dead  Sea  will  fill  with  water  and  join 
to  the  Mediterranean,  Jerusalem  will  become  a 
seaport,  an  appointed  center  from  which,  being 
central  to  all  the  world,  will  go  forth  the  ships 
of  the  Lord.  The  city  of  Jerusalem,  between 
this  time  and  that,  will  be  considerably  enlarged, 
then  it  will  divide  into  three  parts.  At  the  time 
of  this  dividing  John  says,  “That  the  cities  of 
the  nations  are  to  fall — London,  Paris,  Berlin, 
Rome,  Petersburg!!,  and  many  others,  that  all 


182 


BATTLE  OF  ARMAGEDDON. 


may  turn  to  Jerusalem,  the  capital  appointed  of 
heaven.” 

If  you  wish  to  know  more  of  the  particulars 
of  this  day,  read  the  Prophets,  study  what  John 
the  Revelator  says,  under  the  sixth  vial  and 
sixth  seal.  With  awful  grandeur,  and  with  ter- 
rible majesty,  have  the  sacred  writers  set  forth 
this  day  and  time. 

That  this  day  will  come,  who  will  deny  ? 
Look  at  the  world  ripening  for  this  day.  Here, 
in  our  own  land,  as  well  as  others,  the  forces 
are  maturing,  the  agents  are  at  work.  Many  of 
the  events  of  the  past  year  we  were  permitted  to 
forecast,  by  looking  into  the  future  through  the 
prophets,  and  onward  yet  we  look.  And  the 
events  coming  are  neither  less  in  number,  merit 
or  force,  than  those  passed.  Keep  the  events 
of  Prophecy  in  their  proper  order,  lest  they 
confuse  you.  The  Jews,  and  Ten  Lost  Tribes, 
are  to  be  found,  and  possess  Palestine,  before 
this  battle.  Anti-Christ  is  to  appear.  The  two 
witnesses,  Moses  and  Elijah,  are  to  appear. 
And  Jesus,  our  beloved  Master,  will  not  come 
till  the  world  is  settled  long  in  perpetual  peace 
— till  the  house  is  prepared  for  the  bride,  then 
shall  He  come.  But  with  lightning  speed  events 
are  crowding  on  along  the  ages.  The  accumula- 
tive forces  of  centuries  are  pressing  hard  upon 
time  present.  The  time  of  the  end  is  near — not 
the  end  of  time,  but  the  time  appointed  of  God 
in  which  certain  great  things  are  to  be  accom- 


BATTLE  OF  ARMAGEDDON. 


183 


plished.  Eighteen  hundred  years  ago  John 
cried  out : ‘ ‘ Loose  the  four  angels  which  are 
bound  in  the  great  river  Euphrates.  And  the 
four  angels  were  loosed,  which  were  prepared 
for  an  hour,  and  a day,  and  a month,  and  a 
year.” — Rev.  ix:14. 

The  Turkish  power  originated  on  the  banks  of 
the  Euphrates.  It  first  was  divided  into  four 
Sultanies,  namely,  Bagdad,  Aleppo,  Damascus 
and  Cesarea.  These  are  typified  under  four 
angels.  Their  time  was  to  be  396  years  and  a 
fraction — an  hour,  day,  month  and  year.  These, 
taking  a day  for  a year,  365  for  the  year,  thirty 
for  the  month,  one  for  the  day,  and  we  have 
396.  So  from  the  taking  of  Bagdad  by  the 
Turks  in  1057,  which  was  the  overthrow  of  the 
Saracens,  until  the  capture  of  Constantinople  in 
1453,  which  overthrew  the  Greek  empire,  we 
have  just  396  years.  And  the  time  for  the  dry- 
ing up  of  Turkey  is  at  hand,  and  so  it  comes  to 
pass. 

Dear  friends,  how  wonderful  are  the  dealings 
of  our  God.  Can  we  shut  our  eyes  to  His  di- 
vine revelation.  Let  us  be  wise  in  the  day  of 
grace,  taking  heed  to  the  sure  word  of  prophecy, 
as  unto  a light  that  shineth  in  a dark  place. 
The  world  indeed  is  dark,  and  all  confusion. 
But  His  word  shows  unto  us  order  in  all  this  con- 
fusion ; blessed  be  His  name.  More  next  Sun- 
day evening. 


ARMAGEDDON  AND  THE  PYRAMID. 


Discourse,  14. 


THE  FORCES  IN  THE  BATTLE — TIME  OF  ITS  OC- 
CURRENCE— MISTAKES  OF  ADVENTISTS — A 
CHURCH  “STRIKE”  WANTED  — THE  HARD 
TIMES  AFTER  1882 — HISTORY  OF  THE  WORLD 
TILL  1935 — hine’s  THEORY. 


Text— Rev*  xvii.  14* 

“ These  shall  make  war  with  the  Lamb , and  the  Lamb  shall 
overcome  them ; for  Lie  is  Lord  of  lords  and  King  of 
kings;  and  they  that  are  with  Him  are  called , and 
chosen,  and  faithful 


(JjTj^AST  Sunday  evening  we  considered  the 
subject  of  the  great  battle  of  Armageddon. 
This  evening  we  will  take  up  the  same  subject 
for  further  consideration.  This  battle,  we  learn, 
is  to  be  very  terrible,  such  a one  as  the  world 
has  not  had.  Fearful  as  some  of  the  wars  of  the 
past  have  been,  this  will  overshadow  them  all  in 
skill,  fierceness,  number,  slaughter,  devastation 
and  wide-spread  ruin.  It  will,  in  some  respects, 


ARMAGEDDON  AND  THE  PYRAMID.  185 


be  like  one  of  the  wars  of  olden  times.  For  in 
this  struggle  God  is  again  to  take  a direct  part, 
as  He  did  for  His  people  Israel  and  Judah  in 
times  of  old.  Again  shall  the  forces  of  nature 
do  battle  for  God  and  His  people ; again 
shall  they  be  full  of  instinctive  revenge.  Hear 
us,  and  believe  us,  Denis  Kearney,  Providence 
will  then  “pool  the  issues”  of  the  called,  the 
chosen , and  the  faithful.  The  called  are  the 
Jews,  the  chosen  are  Israelites,  and  the  faithful 
embrace  all  of  every  nation  who  believe  in 
Christ.  Then  many  will  wade  in  pools  of  blood 
and  perish.  The  birds  of  prey  are  to  hold  high 
carnival  on  the  dead  bodies  of  the  slain.  The 
spirit  of  Satan,  that  now  worketh  in  the  chil- 
dren of  disobedience,  will  pool  the  issues  of  hell 
and  death  in  the  hosts  of  the  dragon , beast  and 
false  prophet.  For  though  these  three  powers 
are  diverse  in  their  aims,  professions  and  in- 
tents, yet  we  learn  from  many  passages  of  the 
divine  book  that  they  will  join  hands  and  agree 
upon  a common  policy,  federating  together  that 
they  may  contend  with  the  called,  the  chosen, 
and  the  faithful.  “And  I saw  three  unclean 
spirits  like  frogs  come  out  of  the  mouth  of  the 
dragon,  and  out  of  the  mouth  of  the  beast,  and 
out  of  the  mouth  of  the  false  prophet.  For  they 
are  the  spirits  of  devils  working  miracles,  which 
go  forth  unto  the  kings  of  the  earth  and  of  the 
whole  world,  to  gather  them  to  the  battle  of 
that  great  day  of  God  Almighty.” — Rev.  xvi. 


186  ARMAGEDDON  AND  THE  PYRAMID. 

13,  14.  Here  indeed  will  be  a pooling  of  the  is- 
sues, a pooling  that  will  divide  the  whole  world 
into  two  forces  or  parties. 

Now  the  canvas  has  begun,  preparations  are 
going  on,  party  lines  are  being  drawn,  powers 
are  concentrating,  and  men  are  rallying  under 
their  respective  standards,  getting  the  world 
ripe  and  ready  for  the  coming  generations,  into 
whose  hands  the  destinies  of  that  day  will  be 
cast.  Few  of  us  now  living  can  personally  take 
part  in  that  final  battle,  excepting  as  we  do  so 
by  impressing  the  unborn  millions  with  our 
ideas.  Like  as  David  prepared  the  material  for 
the  building  of  the  temple,  and  his  son  Solomon 
carried  forward  the  same,  so  the  work  of  this 
generation  is  simply  preparatory,  and  that  of 
the  coming  will  be  executive. 

Several  wars  will  take  place  before  that  of 
Armageddon,  which  in  their  nature  will  be  fierce 
and  terrible.  Still  these  will  all  be  preparatory 
—leading  on  to  the  day  of  decision  and  the  bat- 
tle final.  On  this  point  many  err,  and  their  error 
lias  a pernicious  influence  on  the  church  and 
the  world.  They  interpret  the  preparatory 
signs,  as  if  they  were  final,  hence  the  end  with 
such  is  too  near.  A sincere  anxiety  takes  pos- 
session of  their  soul,  which  utterly  unfits  them 
to  judge  aright  the  signs  of  the  times  and  tokens 
of  Providence.  Thus  were  a portion  of  the  Ad- 
vent church  thrown  into  confusion  the  8tli  of 
last  July,  because  they  had  fixed  upon  the 


ARMAGEDDON  AND  THE  PYRAMID.  187 


seventh  as  the  time  for  the  ending  of  the  world. 
And  human  folly  and  haste  will  repeat  itself 
again  on  the  lOtli  of  April  next,  because  another 
portion  of  the  Advent  brethren  have  fixed 
upon  the  9th  of  April  as  the  time  of  the  end. 
It  is  a wonder  the  first  did  not  take  the  4th  of 
July  instead  of  the  seventh,  for  then  a stranger 
might  think  the  end  was  nigh  in  some  of  our 
cities  ; or  why  didn’ t the  other  party  select  the 
1st  of  April,  for  no  doubt  it  would  have  proved 
a more  propitious  day.  But  thus  it  is,  and  will 
be  again,  before  the  appointed  time  of  Heaven 
comes.  Man  is  a creature  of  haste  and  sudden 
impulse ; especially  so  in  his  religious  experi- 
ence. Kings  and  nations,  churches  and  sects, 
have  labored  hard  in  times  past  to  force  the  is- 
sues of  Providence  and  give  speed  and  certainty 
to  times  and  events. 

The  prophecies  affecting  our  day  are  clear  ; so 
much  so,  that  he  who  runs  may  read,  if  need  be. 
But  an  impatient  activity  urges  men  on,  bedaz- 
ling  their  eyes,  which  at  once  unnerves  and  un- 
fits them  for  reading  or  judging.  “In  your 
patience  possess  ye  your  souls,”  said  the  blessed 
Master  to  his  disciples  of  old,  and  not  less 
through  them  unto  us. 

“Order  is  Heaven’s  first  law,”  it  has  been 
said  ; and  surely  order  pervades  the  prophecies. 
But  the  pulpits  in  general  over-ride  this  order, 
and  are  not  slow  to  malign  such  men  as  Edward 
Hine,  of  Liverpool,  England,  when  the  fact  is, 


188  ARMAGEDDON  AND  THE  PYRAMID. 

tliat  his  theory  of  the  prophecies  and  mode  of 
interpretation  are  vastly  more  natural,  respon- 
sive and  reasonable,  than  the  ill-adjusted,  un- 
natural and  non-responsive  system  of  current 
theology.  A person  is  under  obligation  to  use 
that  key  for  the  unlocking  of  prophecy  which 
fits  the  best,  and  that  responds  to  Providential 
events  the  most  natural,  without  regard  to  the 
antiquated  systems  and  mode  of  church,  sect,  or 
college  theology.  Hine’s  theory,  as  it  is  called 
sometimes,  is  as  much  superior  to  the  old  sys- 
tem of  interpretation,  as  the  railway  Pullman 
car  is  to  the  rickety  old  stage  coach. 

The  Anglo-Saxon  Israel  theory  neither  de- 
stroys nor  introduces  any  new  principle,  but 
discovers  and  applies  that  which  had  been  long 
hidden.  The  introduction  of  steam  and  electri- 
city did  not  destroy  or  produce  any  new  princi- 
ple, but  simply  discovered  and  applied,  in  an 
improved  form,  that  which  had  been  in  the 
world  from  Adam  down  till  now. 

As  men  in  science,  mechanics  and  practical 
life,  throw  overboard  men  and  things  of  the 
past,  so  should  we  in  theology,  church  life  and 
experience,  when  we  can  do  better.  Reverence 
for  person,  and  respect  for  ideas,  should  not  en- 
slave us.  Let  us  move  on,  doing  better  and 
better.  Wedo  not  care  to  believe  all  the  theology 
of  a Martin  Luther.  When  we  can  make  an  ad- 
vance on  men,  or  theories,  we  should  do  so. 
Bacon  and  Newton  are  now  in  part  rejected, 


ARMAGEDDON  AND  THE  PYRAMID.  ISO 

without  intending,  or  in  fact  doing  them  any 
dishonor  or  disrespect.  So  are  Calvin  and 
Wesley,  on  the  same  principle,  by  every  good 
theologian.  If  a theory  be  advanced  that  opens 
up  the  Scriptures,  and  especially  the  prophecies, 
better  than  those  before  existing,  let  the  pulpit 
accept  it,  throwing  aside  its  mawkishness  and 
age-intrenclied  stupidity.  I have  no  hesitation 
to  say,  after  over  twenty-five  years  of  experience 
with  preachers  and  pulpit,  that  the  majority  of 
preachers  are  lazy  and  indifferent  in  study. 
For  this  reason  many  of  them  are  deterred  from 
examining  any  new  theory.  Many  have  said 
to  me,  and  written  to  me,  that  if  they  accepted 
the  Lost  Tribe  theory  it  would  destroy  nearly 
all  their  old  sermons,  and  necessitate  the 
making  of  new  ones — a work  they  were  not 
willing  to  undertake.  It  will,  therefore,  be  a 
long  time  before  the  pulpit  is  reformed.  These 
days  there  are  many  strikes.  While  in  Canada, 
on  my  vacation,  I agreed  to  lecture  for  a church 
choir,  on  the  Prophet  Jeremiah’s  visit  to  Ire- 
land. But  some  preachers  banded  together  and 
stopped  it ; and,  in  consequence  of  it,  the  choir 
struck  and  refused  to  sing  the  following  Sunday. 
Passing  by  this  strike,  I really  wish  the  laymen 
would  strike  and  call  the  pulpit  to  an  account 
and  rouse  it  from  its  lethargy,  and  demand  that 
it  should  untrammel  itself  and  be  free  and  equal 
to  the  age  and  demand.  I have  met  with 
miserly  persons  who  didn’ t believe  in  beautiful 


190  ARMAGEDDON  AND  THE  PYRAMID. 


clrarclies,  or  the  missionary  cause,  or  any  cause 
indeed,  that  wanted  money.  They  would  argue 
for  plainness  and  so  on.  The  secret  of  their 


ideas  on  these  matters  was  to  he  found 
m tneir  stinginess,  and  their  love  of  money. 
They  advocated  such  theories  because  it  saved 
them  from  contributing.  Like  a man  I met 
with  on  my  vacation  tour  who  said  that  he  saved 
forty  dollars  a year  by  pretending  to  be  angry 
with  the  minister  or  some  of  the  deacons^ 
when  they  came  round  collecting  money.  Some 
ministers,  no  doubt  the  majority  of  them,  talk 
about  holding  on  to  the  old  landmarks  and  be- 
ing orthodox  for  the  very  reason  that  to  make 
a move  implies  labor,  which  they  are  not  wil- 
ling to  give,  hence  they  prate  about  orthodoxy 
and  landmarks  as  a pretext  to  cover  over  their 
indifference.  He  is  the  most  orthodox  who 
searches  after  the  truth  and  keeps  up  with  the 
age.  “Prove  all  things,  hold  fast  that  which  is 
good,”  says  Paul.  These  pretended  followers  of 
Paul  say  : “ Prove  nothing,  hold  fast  what  you 
have  got.” 

It  is  as  plain  as  A,  B,  C,  that  the  Bible 
teaches  the  return  of  the  Jews  and  Ten  Lost 
Tribes  of  Israel  to  the  Land  of  Palestine.  Also, 
that  after  they  are  settled  in  this  land  anti-Christ 
appears.  The  dragon  and  beast  are  already  in 
existence,  but  anti-Christ  is  not ; the  spirit  of 
anti-Christ  is.  When  Israel  and  Judah  are  set- 
tled and  prosperous  in  the  old  fatherland,  then 


ARMAGEDDON  AND  THE  PYRAMID.  191 


is  to  come  on  the  battle  of  Armageddon.  Thank 
heaven!  that  though  the  struggle. will  be  awful, 
it  will  be  final,  and  victory  will  turn  on  the 
Lord’s  side.  Then  will  be  set  up  a kingdom 
that  shall  endure  in  abiding  peace  and  prosper- 
ity for  at  least  a thousand  years.  The  world 
will  nestle  in  regaling  plenty  and  great  assur- 
ance. This  kingdom  is  to  be  set  up  in  the  lat- 
ter days  of  the  four  kingdoms  spoken  of  by 
Daniel.  By  this  we  understand  that  these 
kingdoms  will  have  their  day,  and  by  succession, 
after  a time,  run  out.  These  kingdoms — namely, 
Babylon,  Persia,  Greece  and  Rome — are  now 
disappearing.  Rome,  politically,  is  gone,  Persia 
will  soon  be  absorbed,  also  Greece.  Babylon, 
being  continued  in  the  empire  of  Russia,  has  yet 
a glorious  future  before  it  for  the  next  fifty 
years  or  so,  then  she  will  disappear  to  rise  no 
more.  The  cry  will  go  forth,  “ Babylon  is  fall- 
en.” In  Nebuchadnezzar’s  image,  you  will  re- 
member that  the  stone  cut  out  of  the  mountain 
began  to  destroy  the  metallic  image  upward, 
hence  these  kingdoms  will  disappear  in  reverse 
order  to  their  origin.  First  Rome,  which  has 
gone,  next  Greece,  which  is  nearly  gone,  then 
Persia,  and  then  Russia.  The  new  kingdom 
will  fill  the  world.  Already  it  foreshadows  the 
outlines  of  possession  by  its  immense  territory 
of  to-day.  Then  a scion  of  the  house  of  David 
shall  be  enthroned  in  Jerusalem.  All  the  other 
great  capitals  will  have  been  destroyed.  It  is 


192  ARMAGEDDON  AND  THE  PYRAMID. 


surprisingly  grand  to  read  of  tliat  day,  king  and 
kingdom.  Let  me  read  to  you  a few  verses  from 
Jeremiah,  twenty-third  chapter:  “Behold,  the 
days  come,  saith  the  Lord,  that  I will  raise  unto 
David  a righteous  branch,  and  a king  shall  reign 
and  prosper,  and  shall  execute  judgment  and 
justice  in  the  earth.  In  his  days  Judah  shall  be 
saved,  and  Israel  shall  dwell  safely  ; and  this  is 
Ills  name  whereby  he  shall  be  called  : The  Lord 
our  Righteousness.  Therefore  behold,  the  days 
come,  saith  the  Lord,  that  they  shall  no  more  say, 
the  Lord  liveth  which  brought  up  the  children 
of  Israel  out  of  the  Land  of  Egypt ; but  the 
Lord  liveth  which  brought  up  and  which  led  the 
seed  of  the  house  of  Israel  out  of  the  north 
country,  and  from  all  countries  whither  I had 
driven  them,  and  they  shall  dwell  in  their  own 
land.”  The  words,  “ that  day,”  are  often  used, 
and  if  we  desire  to  know  when  that  day  is, 
we  have  data  in  the  great  fact  that  it  is  the  other 
side  of  Armageddon,  and  Armageddon  is  the 
other  side  of  the  settlement  of  Israel  and  Judah 
in  Palestine. 

I wish,  just  here,  to  correct  many  of  you  as 
well  as  some  of  the  public  journals.  Of  late  I 
have  frequently  seen  it  stated  in  the  papers  that 
I predicted  the  end  of  the  world  in  1882.  And 
many  persons  have  actually  asked  if  I did  really 
think  so.  The  truth  of  the  matter  is,  in  my  ser- 
mons on  the  great  pyramid  I pointed  out  to  you 
the  remarkable  fact  that  the  grand  gallery  was 


ARMAGEDDON  AND  THE  PYRAMID. 


193 


1,882  inches  long.  Beginning  with  the  birth  of 
the  Saviour  these  inches  stand  for  years.  This 
gallery  suddenly  ends,  excepting  that  it  is  con- 
tinued in  a narrow  passage,  the  narrowest  in 
the  whole  building,  for  fifty-three  inches.  Then 
comes  the  King's  chamber,  which,  before  you 
enter,  you  pass  under  a portcullis  in  the  form 
of  an  olive  leaf.  In  this  chamber  all  is  equal, 
qniet  and  central.  Now,  what  I believe  this 
Pillar  of  Witness  in  Egypt  teaches,  (see  Is.  xix. 
19,)  is  that  in  1882  the  whole  world  will  enter 
upon  a time  of  great  trouble,  war,  pestilence 
and  famine,  and  for  fifty- three  years  these 
troubles  will  continue  more  or  less.  Then  about 
1935  will  occur  the  battle  of  Armageddon,  which 
will  be  the  finishing  touch,  the  end  of  wars.  I 
arrive  at  this,  when  I follow  the  teachings  of 
the  Pyramid,  by  adding  1,882  and  53,  which 
gives  me  1,935.  Even  then  the  world  will  not 
end,  but  only  begin  the  Millennium  morn,  wliicjq 
will  last  for  a thousand  years  or  more. 

Now  corresponding  to  these  facts  are  the 
events  of  Providence.  As  when  spring  is  nigh 
we  know  by  certain  signs,  so  we  know  from  the 
Scriptures,  Providence  and  pyramidal  teaching, 
where  we  stand  and  the  season  we  are  in.  “ O ye 
hypocrites,  ye  can  discern  the  face  of  the  sky 
but  can  ye  not  discern  the  signs  of  the  times  V 
said  Jesus  to  the  proud  and  critical  Pharisees 
and  learned  and  doubting  Sadducees.  These 
parties  affected  to  be  specially  wise  and  discrim- 


194  ARMAGEDDON  AND  THE  PYRAMID. 

inating  in  their  knowledge  of  the  times  and  sea- 
sons, and  interpreting  the  prophets  and  writings 
of  Moses.  Yet  their  conduct  betrayed  their  ig- 
norance, for  they  saw  not  the  end  of  that  grand 
old  prophetic  age  nor  the  fading  symbolism  of 
the  temple,  nor  the  departing  glory  and  decay 
of  their  nation.  They  knew  not  the  fullness  of 
time  in  which  they  lived  ; thought  it  bulged  out 
like  a mountain.  They  did  not  know  that  one 
time  had  ended , another  time  begun , for  they 
still  dated  their  documents  4032  of  the  world, 
when  it  was  the  year  of  our  Lord  and  their 
Lord  32. 

The  antediluvians  stand  condemned  because 
they  were  willingly  ignorant  of  the  Providen- 
tial tokens  and  signs  of  the  times.  They  set  at 
naught  the  teachings  and  warnings  of  Noah, 
and  in  exulting  pride  they  rejected  the  idea  of  a 
special  Providence.  Their  faith,  like  many  in 
this  day,  was  planted  and  nourished  by  the  laws 
of  nature  and  the  analogous  continuance  of  the 
same,  not  accepting  the  doctrine  of  a Divine 
Providence.  They  cried  aloud,  “Where  is  the 
promise  of  His  coming  ? For  since  the  fathers 
fell  asleep,  all  things  continue  as  they  were  from 
the  beginning  of  the  creation.” 

Do  you,  like  the  Jews  of  old,  demand. more 
signs?  when  those  given  you  are  not  understood  ? 
or,  if  understood,  they  are  undervalued?  The 
prophets  have  been  lavish  in  portraying  the 
calamities  of  the  last  days , or  the  times  into 


ARMAGEDDON  AND  TIIK  PYRAMID. 


195 


which  we  are  entering.  For  the  words  last 
days  are  the  few  years  preceding  the  battle  of 
Armageddon.  The  calamities  of  these  days 
are  of  four  kinds : First,  social  disorders ; 
second,  religious  feuds  and  wars ; third,  won- 
derful political  disturbances ; fourth,  temporal 
or  physical  disasters.  Of  the  social  condition 
of  these  last  days,  Paul  instructs  us  : “This 
know,  also,  that  in  the  last  days  perilous  times 
shall  come.”  Then  he  groups  together  nineteen 
immoral  attributes  of  the  social  state  of  these 
last  days:  “ Men  shall  be  lovers  of  their  own 
selves  ; covetous,  boasters,  proud  blasphemers, 
disobedient  (to  parents  especially),  unthankful, 
unholy,  without  natural  affection,  truce  break- 
ers, false  accusers,  incontinent,  fierce  despisers, 
traitors,  heady,  high-minded  lovers  of  pleasure 
more  than  God,  formal  in  religion;”  2d  Timo- 
thy, iii.  What,  we  ask,  will  be  the  state  of 
society  when  the  social  condition  becomes  such  ? 

The  religious  feuds  and  persecutions  of  the 
last  days  we  can  but  faintly  conceive.  It  was 
terrible  when  the  beast,  two  hundred  years  ago, 
held  sway.  The  inquisition,  the  rack,  the  stake, 
and  all  the  horrors  of  a wise  age  will  be  brought 
to  bear.  For  in  these  days  to  come,  the  beast 
will  be  joined  by  anti-Christ — who  will  burn 
with  rage,  and  vent  his  displeasure  on  Christ’ s 
followers.  Also  the  barbarism  and  savage  dis- 
position of  the  pagans  will  be  let  loose.  Then 
will  the  dragon  tear  and  destroy.  This  will, 


196  ARMAGEDDON  AND  THE  PYRAMID. 

indeed,  be  a day  or  time  of  visitation.  The 
political  disturbances  will  be  terrible.  Nation 
against  nation  plotting  and  deceiving  ; internal 
strife  and  outward  dangers.  These  are  of  a kind 
to  appall  one  in  reading  them.  Then  come  the 
temporal  or  physical  evils.  These  are  to  be  a 
horrible  train  of  ills  in  the  form  of  pestilence, 
famine  and  earthquakes.  The  plague  of  yellow 
fever  is  as  nought  to  some  of  the  scourges  that 
will  then  go  forth.  Gibbon,  the  historian,  tells 
of  a plague  that  swept  away  two- thirds  of 
Europe  and  Asia.  At  that  time  the  dead  lay 
unburied  by  thousands.  In  Constantinople,  for 
three  months,  five  and  even  ten  thousand  per- 
sons died  daily.  The  famines  in  India  and 
China  give  us  some  idea  of  those  yet  to  come. 
Of  the  earthquakes,  such  as  have  been,  will  be 
repeated  in  increasing  terror,  violence  and  de- 
struction. To  all  these  shall  be  added  fire  from 
heaven,  hail,  whirlwinds  and  floods.  These  are 
times  that  will  try  men’s  souls.  Read  the  Pro- 
phets for  yourselves,  and  range  yourselves  on 
the  Lord’s  side. 


WONDERS  OF  THE  FUTURE. 


Discourse , 1 4. 


PURPOSE  OF  THE  FLOOD — THE  ABRAHAMIC  CUR- 
RENT— RENDING  MOUNT  OLIVET — FORMER 
EARTHQUAKES — BOUNDARIES  OF  PALESTINE 
— DAN  AND  GAD  TO  GUARD  THE  u GATES  55  — 
GAD  THE  SCOTCHMAN — THE  FUTURE  JERUSA- 
LEM— THE  DEAD  SEA  AND  MEDITERRANEAN 
TO  BE  JOINED — MISTAKE  OF  SPIRITUALIZING 
EVERYTHING. 


Text— Zacliariali  xiv.  4. 

“ And  His  feet  shall  stand  in  that  day  upon  the  Mount  of  Olives, 
which  is  before  Jerusalem  on  the  East,  and  the  Mount  of 
Olives  shall  cleave  in  the  midst  thereof  toward  the  east  and 
toward  the  west,  and  there  shall  be  a very  great  valley;  and 
half  the  mountain  shall  remove  toward  the  north , and  half 
of  it  toward  the  south.” 


®OME  four  thousand  years  ago  the  earth  was 
washed  with  the  regenerating  waters  of  a 
terrible  flood.  Millions  were  suddenly  cut  off, 
with  their  handiwork  and  antediluvian  civiliza- 
tion. The  swelling  floods  subsided,  and  the 


J9S  WONDERS  OF  THE  FUTURE. 

God-avenging  waters  retired  to  their  appointed 
place.  The  earth  again  stood  forth  in  virgin 
strength,  lonely,  bare  and  citiless,  but  with  a 
potency  and  promise  inviting  and  grand.  Across 
these  swelling  floods  one  craft  had  been  safely 
borne  ; in  it  was  stored  the  seed-stock  of  a new 
world  of  man  and  beast.  The  destruction  had 
been  complete  and  terrible.  If  we  credit  Dr. 
Gurney  and  others  who  have  written  on  this 
subject,  the  population  far  exceeded  the  inhab- 
itants of  to-day.  But  whether  they  did  or  did 
not,  we  know  that  many  must  have  perished, 
and  civilization  must  have  been  hurled  back  to 
a primitive  beginning.  No  doubt  the  present 
seas  and  oceans  cover  over  the  ruins  of  that  age. 
Elipliaz,  the  Temanite,  when  addressing  Job, 
said:  “Hast  thou  marked  the  old  way,  which 
wicked  men  have  trodden,  which  were  cut  down 
out  of  time  ? w7iose foundation  was  overflown 
with  a flood?”  Now  it  is  not  unreasonable  to 
suppose  that  in  this  and  every  other  great 
change  in  nature  God  has  a purpose — a design 
agreeable  with  His  own  exalted  character.  He 
is  too  wise  to  err,  and  too  good  to  be  unkind. 
The  flood  came  for  the  same  reason  that  He  only 
gave  Adam  one  wife.  And  what  was  that  rea- 
son ? It  was  that  He  might  fill  the  world  with 
a godly  seed.  “And  did  not  he  make  one? 
Yet  had  he  the  residue  of  the  spirit.  And  where- 
fore one?  That  He  might  seek  a godly  seed.” 
—Mai.  ii.  15.  The  same  spirit  which  made  one 


WONDERS  OF  THE  FUTURE. 


199 


Eve  could  have  made  twenty  for  the  residue  of 
the  spirit  was  with  Him.  It  was  in  the  interest 
of  morality  and  godliness  that  the  flood  came. 

When  this  design  began  to  fail  of  being  accom- 
plished by  the  increased  wickedness  of  thepost- 
deluvians,  then  God  called  Abram,  and  through 
Abraham  and  his  seed  designed  that  this  pur- 
pose should  flow  on  and  be  fulfilled.  Through 
this  Abraliamic  channel  flow  all  the  purposes  of 
a Divine  Providence  in  this  world.  Through 
his  seed  all  the  nations  of  the  earth  are  to  be 
blessed.  The  children  of  Abraham  are  the  ap- 
pointed and  divinely  authorized  agents  of  God. 
Through  them,  as  primary,  he  has,  and  is,  and 
will  evangelize  the  world.  Abraham  stands  to 
the  generations  of  earth  as  the  gulf  stream  to 
Europe  and  the  isles  of  the  sea.  This  gulf 
stream  is  our  largest  river ; being  the  longest, 
broadest  and  deepest.  Its  bottom  and  banks  are 
cold  water.  Compressed  by  the  straits  of  Florida 
it  rushes  forth  to  warm  and  replenish  the  earth 
and  isles  of  the  sea.  *So  the  forces  of  a Divine 
Providence  compressed  in  Abraham  go  forth  to 
bless  mankind.  The  gulf  stream  is  water  in 
water,  and  Abraham’ s seed  are  men  among  men. 
Providence  is  at  once  clear  and  intelligible,  and 
history  is  at  once  plain,  reasonable  and  harmon- 
ious, when  interpreted  in  harmony  with  the 
Abrahamic  covenant.  The  scattering  and  re- 
turning of  Israel  and  Judah  to  Palestine,  and 
the  intervening  history,  from  the  time  of  disper- 


WONDERS  OR  THE  EUTUKE, 


yoo 


sion  to  the  return,  is  dear  as  noon-day.  Their 
location,  oppression,  prosperity  and  victories, 
have  long  been  foretold  by  prophets  inspired  of 
God. 

Through  all  the  changes  in  nature  God  has  a 
design.  He  prepared  the  world  for  Adam  and 
his  seed,  and  He  did  so  by  some  wonderful  up- 
heaving and  overturning  ; this  scientists  will 
admit.  This  world,  in  its  present  shape  and 
condition,  indicates  fierce  and  protracted  strug- 
gles. The  outlines  of  strange  and  sublime  revo- 
lutions are  imprinted  on  her  rock-ribbed  bosom. 
Look  at  her  cloud-capped  mountains,  her  snow- 
crowned  peaks,  her  wild  and  rocky  wastes,  her 
barren  plains  and  sandy  deserts,  her  fruitful 
hills  and  luxuriant  valleys,  her  mighty  oceans 
and  swelling  seas,  her  inland  lakes  and  rolling 
rivers  ; these  tell  us  of  a time  long  ago — of  the 
time  when  the  Mighty  One  went  forth  to  work 
a work,  to  build  a house  and  make  a home  for 
His  creature  man.  And  as  it  was  necessary  in 
the  preparatory  stage  to’  tune  nature  to  the 
coming  man,  so  all  along  through  the  history  of 
the  centuries  we  find  nature  holding  a subordin- 
ate relation  to  man.  The  world  is  not  run  on 
one  principle  and  man  on  another,  but  both  are 
permeated  by  a divine  force  and  lead  on  to  a 
divine  end.  All  things  are  ours,  and  we  are 
Christ’s  and  Christ  is  God’s  ; this  is  the  estab- 
lished order  of  subordination.  Most  certainly 
it  cannot  be  unscientific  in  the  Author  of  nature 


WONDERS  OF  THE  FUTURE. 


201 


to  make  the  same  His  messenger  for  good  or 
evil.  It  is  not  unscientific  to  throw  a line  from 
the  shore  to  a ship  in  distress,  even  though 
thrown  from  the  mouth  of  a cannon,  nor  is  it 
counted  unscientific  to  use  that  same  cannon  in 
war  to  destroy  men. 

The  earthquake  spoken  of  in  the  text  is,  in- 
deed, a small  affair  in  comparison  to  some  that 
have  occurred  in  this  world  ; and  if  the  same 
God  be  living  now,  as  then,  surely  he  can  rend 
in  twain  the  little  mountain  of  Olivet.  And  if 
we  grant  to  the  infidel  scientist  of  to-day  the 
fact  that  there  is  no  God,  still  the  thing 
prophesied  of  is  neither  unreasonable  or  impos- 
sible, because  what  has  been  may  be  again,  and 
as  the  demand  in  this  case  is  small  in  compari- 
son to  what  has  been,  surely  this  thing  may 
come  to  pass.  In  times  past  Providence  and 
the  wants  of  the  church  have  been  timely  aided 
by  convulsion  in  nature,  and  if  they  were  only 
so  accidentally,  why  then  accidentally  they  may 
all  agree  again.  To  the  scientist,  especially  the 
geologist,  there  can  be  no  great  difficulty  in 
crediting  the  miracles  of  the  text  when  we  think 
of  the  successive  revolutions  that  have  taken 
place.  Fires  and  floods,  and  earthquakes,  have 
done  sublime  service  in  the  past,  whether  we 
credit  the  same  to  nature  or  to  God.  That  an 
earthquake,  or  any  peculiar  expression  of  na- 
ture, should  be  timed  to  meet  a special  condi- 
tion of  the  church  or  the  special  purposes  of 


202 


WONDERS  OF  THE  FUTURE. 


a Providence,  is  not  strange.  In  sucli  an  event 
there  really  is  no  more  wonder  than  that  a man 
should  set  an  alarm  on  his  clock  to  go  off  at 
three  minutes  past  four  in  the  morning.  Some 
men  can  swallow  big  things  if  you  will  only  al- 
low them  to  make  out  the  author  to  be  nature. 
But  whether  we  attribute  the  things  past  to  na- 
ture or  to  God,  we  know  that  wonderful  things 
have  happened. 

Seismology,  the  science  of  earthquakes,  is  by 
no  means  void  of  interest.  The  earthquake 
catalogue  of  the  British  association  takes  notice 
of,  and  records  the  occurrence  of  over  6, 000  that 
happened  between  1606  B.  C.,  and  1842  A.  D. 
Some  of  these  have  been  terrible  in  force,  de- 
struction and  extent,  oftentimes  changing  the 
whole  face  of  a country,  its  climate  and  river 
courses.  The  great  earthquake  of  1783  in  Cala- 
bria, probably  caused  the  death  of  100,000  peo- 
ple ; it  was  felt  over  a great  part  of  Europe. 
The  city  of  Lisbon  was  visited  on  the  morning 
of  November  1st,  1755,  with  an  earthquake  so 
severe  that  in  a few  minutes  60,000  persons  per- 
ished, and  most  of  the  city  was  destroyed  and 
buried  beneath  the  water  of  the  bay  some  600 
feet. 

The  country  given  to  Abraham  embraces  all 
of  what  we  call  Syria.  It  is  central,  and  spec- 
ially adapted  for  the  future  purposes  of  God 
through  Abraham's  seed.  Beginning  with  the 
northwest  corner  the  boundaries  will  be  Mount 


WONDERS  OF  THE  FUTURE. 


203 


Taurus,  river  Euphrates,  Persian  gulf,  Arabian 
sea,  Red  sea,  river  Nile,  and  Mediterranean,  en- 
closing Syria,  Arabia  Deserts,  Arabia  Felix  and 
Arabia  Petrcea.  Thus  it  will  be  seen  that  the 
Abrahamic  inheritance  is  surrounded  by  water 
except  at  two  points,  namely : the  northwest 
land  boundary  which  is  between  the  Euphrates 
and  the  Mediterranean  sea.  The  entrance  is 
through  the  mountain  range  of  Taurus,  and 
forms  a natural  gate  or  mountain  pass  from 
Europe  and  Asia  into  Palestine.  Here,  when 
the  tribes  are  resettled  in  the  land  of  Palestine, 
this  gate  will  be  in  the  allotment  of  Dan.  Our 
Irish  brethren  will  again  be  in  the  northwest, 
where  they  will  have  to  fight  and  defend  the 
land  and  the  truth,  as  in  days  of  old,  for  their 
brethren.  The  fact  is,  “Dan  shall  judge  his 
people  as  one  of  the  tribes  of  Israel”  said  old 
Jacob.  The  Judge  in  olden  times  satin  the  gate. 
So  will  Dan  sit.  Moses  said  that  Dan  was  a 
lion’s  whelp.  Among  Israel  it  is  customary  to 
put  lions  as  guards  at  gateways.  The  south- 
west corner  between  the  Mediterranean  and  the 
sea  of  Suez  forms  the  other  land  boundary. 
Through  this  gate  will  come  the  teeming  mil- 
lions of  Africa.  At  this  gate  will  be  the  tribe 
of  Gad,  that  is,  a portion  of  the  Scotch,  the  low- 
landers.  The  tribes  will  be  hemmed  in  one  by 
another  so  that  they  cannot  enlarge  their  terri- 
tory : but  Gad  can,  for  a vast  country  opens  up 
beyond  the  gate.  It  is  barren,  still  the  desert 


204 


WONDERS  OE  THE  FUTURE. 


is  to  blossom  as  a rose.  01  Gad  it  was  said  by 
Moses,  £‘  Blessed  be  lie  that  enlargeth  Gad;  he 
dwelleth  as  a lion  and  tearetli  the  arm  with  the 
crown  of  the  head.  And  he  provided  the  first  part 
for  himself,  because  there  in  a portion  of  a law- 
giver was  he  seated.”  You  remember  that 
Sinai  is  in  this  portion.  What  sight  and  fore- 
sight Jacob  and  Moses  had.  The  land  as  thus 
bounded  would  be  600  miles  broad  from  the 
Red  sea  to  the  river  Euphrates,  and  1,390  be- 
tween the  Red  sea  and  Persian  gulf,  and  from 
the  Mediterranean  to  the  Arabian  sea,  1,600. 
These  boundaries  you  will  glean  by  taking  note 
of  the  several  promises  to  Abraham  and  his  seed 
as  recorded  in  Genesis  xv.  10,  and  Ex.  xxiii. 
31,  and  Deut.  xi.  24.  The  land  so  promised  and 
given  specially  to  Abraham  and  his  seed,  the 
descendants  of  Abraham  never  yet  occupied,  no, 
not  half  of  it,  even  in  the  palmy  days  of  King 
Solomon.  Will  it  ever  be  \ We  answer  yes,  as 
sure  as  the  seasons  and  night  and  day.  He  is 
faithful  that  has  promised  and  will  do  it. 

This  remarkable  peninsula  will  be  the  theatre 
of  the  future  glory  of  Israel  and  Judah.  As 
finely  described  by  the  Rev.  A.  B.  Grimaldia, 
it  will  be  found  to  be  most  exactly  and  suitably 
placed  to  enable  them  to  fulfill  their  high  des- 
tiny to  all  nations,  and  become  the  centre  of  all 
lands,  the  praise  and  beauty  of  the  whole  earth. 
This  land  has,  in  fact,  a central  position  for  com- 
munication, commerce,  and  all  other  advant- 


WONDERS  OF  THE  FUTURE. 


205 


ages  of  civilization  not  enjoyed  by  any  otlier 
portion  of  land  in  the  whole  world ; while  the 
peculiar  geographical  formation  is  such  that  it 
has  an  immense  seaboard,  and  is  therefore  fitted 
for  vaster  commercial  and  naval  operations  than 
have  ever  yet  been  seen,  commanding,  as  it  does, 
the  three  most  important  seas  and  the  two  larg- 
est rivers  of  the  whole  world. 

This  land,  as  laid  out  by  Ezekiel,  will  be  di- 
vided into  thirteen  longitudinal  strips,  sixty 
miles  long,  and  twenty  broad.  In  the  very  cen- 
ter will  be  a portion,  some  fifty  miles  square, 
which  will  be  divided  and  apportioned  to  what 
is  called  the  holy  oblation — namely,  in  the  very 
middle  will  be  the  temple,  a mile  square,  or 
larger  than  ever  the  whole  city  of  Jerusalem 
has  yet  been.  Then  the  city  will  be  ten  miles 
square.  On  one  side  will  be  a portion  for  the 
priests  ; on  another,  a portion  for  the  Levites  ; 
and  on  the  other  two  sides,  the  prince’s  or 
king’s  portion.  This  portion,  which  will  be  on 
the  east  and  west  sides,  will  be  sixty  miles 
long  by  ten  broad,  or  some  600  miles  square. 
But  it  is  clear  he  will  need  it,  for  he  will  not  be 
supported  by  taxes.  He  will  have  to  judge  the 
land.  He  cannot  take  any  more  land.  He  will 
have  to  support  his  own  family.  No  public 
grant  to  his  children.  He  will  have  to  be  liberal 
with  the  temple.  He  will  have  sixty  miles  of 
sea  coast  to  defend  and  sixty  miles  of  land 
frontier  to  protect,  and  thus  cover  some  of  the 


206 


WONDERS  OF  THE  FUTURE. 


weaker  tribes.  The  city  will  have  720  square 
miles  as  a suburb,  in  which  to  raise  supplies 
specially  for  itself.  It  will  in  reality  be  in  two 
parts — one  called  by  the  prophets  the  profane  ; 
here  will  the  commercial  business  be  done.  The 
other  part  will  be  sacred.  Into  it  strangers  will 
not  enter  ; it  will  be  holy — a quiet  habitation. 
“ There  the  glorious  Lord  will  be  unto  us  a 
place  of  broad  rivers  and  streams,  wherein  shall 
go  no  galley  with  oars,  neither  shall  gallant 
ship  pass  thereby.”  The  city  proper  will  be 
some  thirty  miles  north  of  the  present  city  of 
Jerusalem. 


NINETEEN  HUNDRED  AND  FIFTY-SEVEN. 


Discourse , 15. 


“SIGNS  OF  THE  TIMES5’ — THE  RETURN  TO 
JERUSALEM— FORCES  OF  RUSSIA  AND  ENG- 
' LAND — PRESENT  LOCALITY  OF  ANCIENT  NA- 
TIONS— ORIGIN  OF  AMERICAN  REPUBLICANISM 
— FEDERATION  OF  THE  NATIONS  COMING — 
EVOLUTION  AND  DEVOLUTION. 


Text— Daniel  xii.  12. 

** Blessed  is  he  that  waiteth , and  cometh  to  the  thousand  three 
hundred  and  Jive  and  thirty  days.” 


0 according  to  the  prophet  Daniel  there  is  a 


time  to  come  in  which  it  will  be  blessed  to 


live.  The  prophecies  of  Daniel  are  generally  of 
a material  character,  that  is,  they  have  special 
reference  to  this  world  politically,  and  to  this 
end  he  had  direct  and  special  reference  to  cer- 
tain kingdoms  in  existence  at  the  time  of  writ- 
ing, as  well  as  others  that  were  to  come  into  be- 
ing. Of  all  the  prophets  he  concerns  himself 
the  most  with  positive  data,  of  the  rise  and 


208  NINETEEN  HUNDRED  AND  FIFTY-SEVEN. 

fall  of  nations.  The  figures  of  the  data  used 
we  freely  confess  are  difficult  to  understand 
and  interpret.  The  church  and  times  are  greatly 
in  need  of  some  man  competent  on  this 
point.  All  prophetic  students  know  the  diver- 
sity and  confusion  in  this  department  of  theo- 
logy. Of  all  the  difficult  departments  of  theo- 
logy none  exceed  the  numerical.  The  numer- 
ical symbolism  of  the  Bible  is  as  yet  but  little 
understood.  True,  indeed,  we  are  improving. 
Aided  by  Providence  we  are  enabled  to  inter- 
pret some  dates  by  data ; that  is,  certain  events 
occurring,  locate  us,  and  point  out  the  prophetic 
period  we  are  in.  Like  the  captain,  who  is 
unable  by  his  certain  and  usual  modes  of  cal- 
culating to  find  his  whereabouts,  does  so  by 
currents,  the  gulf  stream,  islands,  color  of  wa- 
ters, etc.,  did  we  know  the  exact  quantity  of 
Daniel’ s two  thousand  and  three  hundred  days, 
his  times,  time  and  half  a time,  his  seventy 
weeks,  his  thousand  two  hundred  and  ninety 
days,  and  the  thousand  three  hundred  and  five 
and  thirty  days,  then  we  could  deal  with  the 
prophecies  with  a definitiveness  to  which  as  yet 
we  are  strangers. 

The  times,  however,  are  peculiarly  interest- 
ing from  the  very  fact  that  the  church  is  waking 
up  to  the  importance  of  prophetic  study. 
“Coming  events  cast  their  shadows  before,”  is 
a trite,  but  true  saying,  and  here  as  true  as 
anywhere.  Men  feel  in  their  fears  and  hopes 


.NINETEEN  HUNDRED  AND  FIFTY-SEVEN.  201J 


the  pressure  of  prophecy.  The  church  is  re- 
markably anxious  and  at  unrest.  Governments 
are  suspicious  and  confused.  The  populace  are 
restless  and  threatening.  Indeed,  everything 
conspires  in  church,  State  and  people,  to  fore- 
cast the  future.  A thunderstorm  is  felt  before 
it  is  seen  or  heard.  It  shadows  the  mind,  thrills 
the  nerves,  and  pains  the  rheumatic  limbs. 
Many  in  1858  felt  war  coming  in  our  own  coun- 
try. Many  were  at  a loss  to  interpret  their 
fears.  Some,  however,  interpreted  the  signs  of 
the  times  and  sounded  an  alarm. 

The  few  years  to  come  are  pregnant  with 
angry  forces.  Men  are  busy  in  Russia,  Ger- 
many, France,  England  and  America,  sewing  the 
winds,  and  the  harvest  will  surely  be  whirl- 
winds. But,  beyond  all,  the  sky  is  clear.  War 
ceases,  commerce  revives,  the  nations  accept  a 
settled  peace,  science  and  religion  join  hand  in 
hand  to  repair  the  wastes  and  woes  of  war.  The 
beast  is  overcome.  Anti-Christ  is  slain  and  the 
dragon  is  banished  from  the  earth.  Jerusalem 
again  rises  in  splendor  from  the  grave  of  deso- 
lation. Again  Canaan  will  become  the  glory  of 
all  lands,  and  Jerusalem  the  glory  of  Canaan. 
Here,  again,  after  centuries  of  wandering,  shall 
the  throne  of  David  find  rest,  and  on  it  one 
of  David’ s seed,  chosen  and  anointed  of  God, 
accepted  of  men  and  served  by  the  nations. 
Crowned  and  imperial  Salem  shall  become  the 
home  of  her  long-captive  sons  and  daughters. 


210  NINETEEN  HUNDRED  AND  FIFTY-SEVEN. 

Israel  and  Judali  shall  meet  together,  and  shall 
be  one  stick,  one  people,  having  one  head,  one 
throne,  one  city,  one  Lord,  even  Jesus. 
“Therefore  they  shall  come  and  sing  in  the 
height  of  Zion,  and  shall  flow  together  to  the 
goodness  of  the  Lord,  for  wheat,  and  for  wine, 
and  for  oil,  and  for  the  young  of  the  flock  and 
of  the  herd,  and  their  soul  shall  be  as  a watered 
garden,  and  they  shall  not  sorrow  any  more  at 
all.” — Jeremiah  xxxi.  12. 

No  one  can  read  the  prophecies  that  find  their 
fulfilment  after  the  battle  of  Armageddon — or, 
as  the  prophets  have  it,  “after  those  days,”  — 
without  being  ravished  with  delight.  Israel  in 
her  palmy  days,  and  Judah  in  her  glory  ! A 
nation  called  of  God,  and  ruled  by  God  through 
David  or  a Solomon:  how  inviting!  When 
heaven  was  their  defense  and  provider,  when 
the  fidelity  of  men  to  God  was  enough  of  de- 
fense, and  the  morality  of  a people  was  a rich 
manure  giving  an  abundant  harvest  in  field, 
stall  and  orchard.  Then  we  see  the  true  posi- 
tion of  a nation,  its  grandeur  and  prosperity.  I 
am  convinced  that  morality  has  a more  intimate 
relation  with  the  forces  and  wealth  of  nature 
than  we  are  in  the  habit  of  believing.  God  can 
give  increased  measure  to  the  harvest,  fruitful- 
ness to  the  vine,  plenty  in  the  orchard,  increase 
in  the  stall  and  addition  to  the  household.  Time 
upon  time  are  these  blessings  promised  by  the 
prophets  to  Israel  and  Judah,  in  the  latter  day. 


NINETEEN  HUNDRED  AND  FIFTY-SEVEN.  211 


Take  notice  of  a few  statements  of  the  proph- 
ets responding  to  those  times — the  times  that 
will  ensue  after  the  Ten  Lost  Tribes  of  Israel  and 
the  Jews  are  again  possessed  of,  and  settled  in 
Palestine.  Jeremiah  in  the  30th  chapter  and 
31st,  refers  to  those  times  : “ For,  lo,  the  days 
come,  saith  the  Lord,  that  I will  bring  again  the 
captivity  of  my  people,  Israel  and  Judah,  saith 
the  Lord;  and  I will  cause  them  to  return  to  the 
land  that  I gave  to  their  fathers,  and  they  shall 
possess  it  ” — referring  to  this  time  and  the  bat- 
tle of  Armageddon,  in  which  Israel  will  be  tested 
as  we  have  before  shown.  “Alas!  for  that 
day  is  great,  so  that  none  is  like  it ; it  is  even 
the  time  of  Jacob’s  trouble,  but  he  shall  be 
saved  out  of  it.”  Now  we  ask  why  will  it  be 
specially  a time  of  trouble?  We  answer,  be- 
cause of  the  strength  of  the  combined  forces 
that  will  be  arrayed  against  Israel — that  is  Eng- 
land. The  forces  as  set  forth  in  the  scriptures 
are  thirteen  on  one  side , led  by  Russia , and 
four  on  the  other , which  will  be  led  by  England,. 
The  thirteen  are : 1st,  Gog  ; 2d,  Magog  ; 3d, 
Rosh  ; 4tli,  Meshech ; 5th,  Tubal  ; 6tli,  Persia ; 
7th,  Ethiopia  ; 8th,  Libya  ; 9th,  Gomer  ; 10th, 
Togarmali ; 11th,  the  Beast ; 12tli,  the  Dragon  ; 
and  13th,  anti-Christ.  The  four  are:  1st, 
Sheba  ; 2d,  Dedan  ; 3d,  Merchants  of  Tarshish 
with  all  their  young  lions  ; 4th,  the  Jews  and 
Israelites  settled  in  Palestine,  that  will  not  be 
led  astray  by  anti-Christ. 


212  NINETEEN  HUNDRED  AND  FIFTY-SEVEN. 

To  understand  the  prophets  when  forecasting 
the  future,  we  must  keep  in  mind  that  in  speak- 
ing of  a nation’ s destiny  in  the  future,  they  would 
speak  of  it  by  the  name  it  had  at  that  time,  if 
such  a nation  had  an  existence  at  that  time.  But 
in  course  of  time,  such  nations  would  change 
their  name,  and  sometimes  locality  ; in  such  a 
case  they  must  be  found.  For  instance,  if  one 
desires  to  know  the  destiny  of  Turkey,  he  will 
find  it  set  forth  by  the  prophets  under  the  name 
of  Edom  and  Esau.  Moab  and  Ammon  are 
found  in  the  Poles  and  Hungarians  ; they  were 
the  sons  of  Lot.  In  all  parts  of  the  world  the 
children  of  Abraham  have  an  attachment  for 
each  other.  Thus  India  was  peopled  at  first  by 
the  descendants  of  Abraham,  hence  they  will 
mix  with,  and  accept  English  rule  sooner  than 
any  other  people.  “But  unto  the  sons  of  the 
concubines  which  Abraham  had,  Abraham  gave 
gifts,  and  sent  them  away  from  Isaac,  his  son, 
while  he  yet  lived,  eastward  into  the  east 
country.” — Gen.  xxv.  6.  If  we  trace  back  the 
origin  of  a people  to  their  head  or  founder,  we 
will  better  understand  their  peculiarities  and 
national  idiosyncrasies.  Study  Ishmael  to  un- 
derstand the  Arabs,  Esau  to  understand  the 
Turks,  Ammon  and  Moab  to  understand  the 
Poles  and  Hungarians.  Study  the  character 
and  condition  of  Manasseli  in  Egypt,  as  being 
brought  up  in  a palace  and  being  the  lawful  heir, 
but  deprived  of  his  birthright  by  a Providence 


NINETEEN  HUNDRED  AND  FIFTY-SEVEN.  213 


which  he  could  not  understand,  and  you  have  at 
once  a key  to  the  Pilgrim  character,  and  the 
characteristics  of  a real  American.  Why  he 
hates  titles,  kings  and  aristocracies.  But  he 
forgets  not  the  place  of  his  youth  when  he  had 
the  great  seal  made,  for  on  the  reverse  of  the 
great  seal  of  the  United  States  you  will  have 
the  figure  of  a pyramid  crowned  with  the  All- 
seeing  Eye.  No  tribe  but  the  tribe  of  Man- 
asseh  could  say,  or  did  say,  “We  are  a great 
people.”  Yet  so  this  tribe  said  to  Joshua  ; see 
Josh.  xvii.  So  we  often  say  “We  are  a great 
people.” 

Rachael  and  Leah,  the  two  wives  of  Jacob,  are 
the  real  source  of  the  separation  of  the  Ten 
Tribes  of  Israel  from  Judah.  Each  wife 
sought  to  have  her  son  as  the  leader.  Thus 
between  Judah  and  Joseph  began  the  spirit  of 
rivalry.  Ephraim  took  up  the  cause  of  Rachel. 
David  and  Saul’s  bitterness  lies  here.  David 
stood  for  Leah,  and  Saul  for  Rachel.  The  de- 
scendants of  the  north  of  Ireland,  being  from 
the  tribe  of  Dan,  have  ever  been  distinct  from 
the  rest  of  the  Irish  in  features,  enterprise, 
spirit  and  religion,  For  the  others  are 
the  Canaanites  of  old,  the  Philistines. 

Who  do  the  thirteen  enemies  stand  for  to-day  ? 
Let  me  answer  you  briefly.  Gog  stands  for  the 
Caucassians  or  mountain  tribes  of  Caucassus. 
Magog  covers  the  inhabitants  and  country  north 
of  the  Caucassiari  mountains,  and  they  are 


214  NINETEEN  HUNDRED  AND  FIFTY -SEVEN. 

known  as  Tartars.  Rosh,  or  Roosli,  means  the 
real  Russians.  Their  ruler  is  called  by  the  pro 
phet  Ezekiel  Nasi  Roosli.  We  translate  it  the 
chief  prince  of  Meshech.  This  portion,  or  people 
of  Russia,  are  the  old  Babylonians,  hence  the  hate 
and  rivalry  between  England  and  that  nation. 
Meshech  means  the  Muscovites,  who  made  Mos- 
cow what  it  is.  Tubal  is  found  in  the  Siberians. 
Meshech  and  Tubal  are  generally  mentioned  to- 
gether in  the  scripture,  and,  strange  to  say,  they 
are  found  together  in  history  to-day.  Moscow 
is  the  capital  of  Meshech,  for  though  to  the 
world  St.  Petersburg  seems  to  be,  yet  every  im- 
perial document  is  signed  and  dated  Moscow. 
Tobolski  is  the  capital  of  Tubal  or  Siberia. 
Persia  still  retains  its  ancient  name,  and  will  be 
easily  recognized.  Also,  the  same  with  Ethio- 
pia. Libya  takes  in  a portion  of  the  African 
race.  Gomer  stands  for  the  Germans  in  part, 
for  those  who  descended  from  Gomer.  From 
this  word  Gomer  is  Gomeren,  Gemren,  and  the 
country  Germia,  hence,  Germany  and  Germans. 
Togarmah  includes  the  people  of  Independent 
Tartary.  The  Dragon  includes  China.  The 
Beast,  the  Jesuits  and  their  followers,  which 
will  take  in  France,  Spain,  Italy  and  South 
America ; and  at  first  divide  even  England,  es- 
pecially Ireland,  and  the  United  States.  Anti- 
Christ  will  be  chiefly  sustained  by  the  Jews, 
who  will  have  been  settled  in  Palestine. 

The  four  opposing  forces  led  by  England  : 


NINETEEN  HUNDRED  AND  FIFTY-SEVEN.  215 


Sheba  represents  India,  who  is  already  training 
for  this  time  of  battle.  Dedan  embraces  Arabia, 
especially  that  part  occupied  by  the  sultan  of 
Muscat.  Merchants  of  Tarsliish  and  all  the 
young  lions,  means  England  and  her  colonies, 
in  which  is  embraced  the  United  States.  Man- 
asseli  will  have  to  stretch  out  a helping  hand  to 
Jacob  in  the  time  of  his  trouble,  for  she  cannot 
allow  liberty  to  be  enslaved  and  freedom  of 
worship  and  conscience  to  be  trampled  under 
foot.  The  plague  will  come  here  sooner  than 
we  think,  by  a civil  and  internal  division  among 
ourselves,  which  will  force  us  to  take  part.  The 
Jews  that  are  not  carried  away  with  anti-Christ 
will  join  with  their  brethren  of  Israel.  The 
called,  the  chosen  and  the  faithful,  will  be  one 
party,  and  they  will  be  on  the  Lord’s  side. 

If  during  the  late  Turkish  war  we  could  have 
had  our  dispatches  agreeable  to  ancient  names  of 
people  and  country,  they  would  have  sounded 
queer.  Instead  of  reading  of  the  Russians  pass- 
ing the  Caucasus,  and  moving  upon  Erzeroum  by 
way  of  Kars,  we  should  have  read  : Rapid  ad- 
vance of  the  Babylonians  under  the  chief  prince 
of  Mesliach.  Successful  passage  of  the  Pison. 
The  whole  land  of  Havilah  occupied.  The  men 
of  Togarmah  rally  at  Gihon.  Fierce  fighting  in 
Eden.  The  invaders  defeated  in  the  mountains 
of  Ararat.  For,  according  to  ancient  names  of 
people  and  country,  such  was  the  fact.  It  is 
comforting  to  all  God's  people  to  know  from 


216  NINETEEN  1IUNDKED  AND  FIFTY-SEVEN. 

His  word  that  there  is  a time  of  peace  ; that 
there  is  a golden  age  in  the  near  future.  Dr. 
McKay  has  the  Christian  idea  in  his  poem  : 

“ There  is  a good  time  coming,  boys, 

Wait  a little  longer, 

Let  us  aid  it  all  we  can, 

Every  woman,  every  man, 

The  good  time  coming.” 

When  will  the  1,335  days  of  years,  spoken  of 
in  the  text,  end  ? AVe  answer,  about  the  year 
1957.  And  why  that  year  ? Because  these  days 
evidently  date  there,  beginning  from  the  time 
the  daily  sacrifice  is  taken  away  and  the  city 
trodden  under  foot.  The  little  goat  horn  of 
Daniel  viii.  9,  stands,  we  have  before  shown  you, 
for  Turkey.  “And  out  of  one  of  them  came 
forth  a little  horn,  which  waxed  exceeding  great 
toward  the  south,  and  toward  the  east,  and  to- 
ward the  pleasant  land.”  It  stands  for  Moliam- 
medism,  which  was  to  overturn  Christianity 
for  a given  period,  a time,  times  and  a half  time, 
or  in  figures  1260.  Now,  Mohammed  was  ac- 
cepted and  crowned  at  Mecca  in  the  year  622. 
If  we  add  1260  and  622  we  have  1882  ; a time 
that  is  very  plainly  pointed  out  in  the  Pyramid. 
Daniel  says  seventy  weeks  are  determined  upon 
thy  people  and  upon  thy  holy  city,  Jerusalem. 
These  weeks  put  into  prophetic  years  make  490, 
which,  of  course,  brings  us  to  the  time  when  Jeru- 
salem was  destroyed  by  Titus.  Daniel  asked  how 


NINETEEN  HUNDRED  AND  FIFTY-SEVEN.  217 


long  the  vision  concerning  the  daily  sacrifice  and 
transgression  of  desolation  to  give  the  sanctuary 
and  people  to  be  trodden  down  % The  answer 
was  unto  2,300  days,  taking  a day  for  a year. 
Jerusalem  was  destroyed  in  year  70.  Take  this 
from  490  and  we  have  420.  Now  these  420  years 
taken  from  2300  will  bring  1880.  Then  the 
sanctuary  is  to  be  cleansed,  that  is,  Jerusalem 
will  be  in  the  possession  of  England.  She  now  is. 

From  about  1880,  or  1882,  England  will  pos- 
sess J erusalem.  In  the  twelfth  chapter  of  Daniel, 
eleventh  verse,  we  find  thirty  days  added  to 
the  1,260,  making  1,290  ; these  added  thirty 
years  denote  the  time  England  will  have  to  con- 
tend for  her  right  to  Palestine.  It  will  finally 
be  acknowledged,  however,  by  all  nations.  In 
1935  the  battle  of  Armageddon  will  end,  but 
Palestine  will  not  be  fully  settled  down  to  a 
peaceful  possession  till  1957.  Then  the  govern- 
ment will  be  fully  established  and  acknowledged 
all  over  the  world.  The  kings  and  Gentile  na- 
tions will  have  gone  up  to  Jerusalem  and  given 
in  their  adherence.  Then  all  the  world  will  be 
federated  to  David’ s throne.  The  year  1957  I 
arrive  at  by  the  same  rule  as  the  other — 1335 
when  added  to  622,  makes  1957.  “Blessed,” 
says  Daniel,  “are  they  who  see  that  time.” 

The  world  is  to  undergo  some  marvelous 
changes  these  next  few  years — mechanically, 
politically,  socially  and  morally  ; the  telephone, 
the  phonograph,  the  microphone,  the  telema- 


218  NINETEEN  HUNDRED  AND  FIFTY-SEVEN. 

chone  and  coming  improvements  will  transform 
our  modes  of  labor  and  learning  beyond  our 
present  conception.  God  times  inventions  and 
improvements  to  the  advancement  of  His  king- 
dom. 

I do  not  regard  inventions  as  mere  accidents, 
but  as  the  outcoming  of  a Divine  intent  through 
human  agencies.  Watts  and  Wesley  both  did 
good  service  for  the  church  and  the  world.  Ed- 
ison and  others  of  kindred  minds  are  scientific 
prophets.  “The  earth  is  the  Lord’s  and  the 
fullness  thereof.”  All  is  made  subservient  to  the 
progress  of  the  kingdom  of  heaven.  The  doc- 
trine of  the  evolution  of  man  as  taught  by  Dar- 
win is  neither  complimentary  to  man,  or  God. 
But  the  doctrine  of  devolution  is.  Man  is  a de- 
veloping creature ; a creature  who  takes  the 
centuries  to  grow  in.  The  devolution  of  God  is 
through  man  by  means  of  all  the  increasing  fa- 
cilities and  agencies  that  make  man  stronger, 
wiser  and  better.  The  secret  powers  and  forces 
of  nature  are  revealed  to  man  in  the  ratio  of  his 
ability  to  apply  them,  on  the  same  scale  as  we 
instruct  our  children. 

In  the  latter  days,  or  the  period  spoken  of  by 
Daniel,  nature  will  be  divinely  prompted  with 
an  impulse  of  generosity  not  now  known, for  then 
men  will  be  wise  enough,  strong  enough,  and 
good  enough,  to  use  the  same  and  not  abuse. 
The  prophetic  teachings  glow  with  promises  of 
regaling  plenty,  peace  and  good  will,  in  those 


NINETEEN  HUNDRED  AND  FIFTY-SEVEN.  219 


days.  “I  will  multiply  upon  you  man  and 
beast  ; and  they  shall  increase  and  bring  fruit ; 
and  I will  settle  you  after  your  old  estates,  and 
will  do  better  unto  you  than  at  your  beginnings ; 
and  ye  shall  know  that  I am  the  Lord.” — Ezek. 
xxxvi.  11.  Again:  “ I will  multiply  the  fruit 
of  the  tree,  and  the  increase  of  the  field,  that  ye 
receive  no  more  reproach  of  famine  among  the 
heathen.”  I submit  and  believe  that  all  this 
God  will  do  by  what  men  are  pleased  to  call 
natural  law.  The  Divine  will  not  rudely  break 
in  upon  His  own  established  laws.  Sin  impairs 
the  energy  and  growth  of  man,  and  so  infringes 
upon  nature.  As  man  frees  himself  from  the 
bondage  and  sequences  of  sin,  he  will  rise  higher 
and  higher  in  his  command  and  authority  over 
nature’ s forces.  Three  several  times  the  earth 
has  been  cursed,  which  curse  is  gradually  re- 
moved as  man  returns  unto  his  God  in  loving 
and  obedient  service.  “And  now  art  thou 
cursed  from  the  earth,  which  hath  opened  her 
mouth  to  receive  thy  brother’s  blood  from  thy 
hand.  When  thou  tillest  the  ground  it  shall 
not  henceforth  yield  unto  thee  her  strength.” — 
Gen.  iv.  11.  The  secret  of  a world’s  wealth  and 
peace  lies  here,  and  it  were  well  if  reformers  and 
agitators  understood  this.  For  they  work  best 
who  work  in  harmony  with  God  and  His  laws. 


THE  STONE  WITNESS  * 


Discourse,  1 7 . 


IN  THAT  BAY  THERE  SHALL 
BE  AN  ALTAR  TO  THE  LORD 
IN  THE  MIDST  OF  THE  LAND 
OF  EGYPT,  AND  A PILLAR  AT 
THE  BORDER  THEREOF  TO 


THE  LORD  ; AND  IT  SHALL 
BE  FOR  A SIGN  AND  FOR  A 
WITNESS  UNTO  THE  LORD  OF 
HOSTS  IN  THE  LAND  OF 
EGYPT.— ISAIAH  19  : 19. 


THE  GEEAT  PYEAMID — WHO  JOB  WAS — WHO 
BUILT  THE  PYEAMID — WHAT  IT  WAS  BUILT 
POE — AN  EPITOME  OF  THE  EAETH — THE  HIS- 
TOEY  OP  MAN  CONTAINED  IN  IT  PAST  AND 
PUTUEE — SCIENCE  AND  THE  BIBLE,  ETC., 
ETC. 


SHE  wonderful  discourses  of  Rev.  Dr.  Wild, 
of  Brooklyn,  were  continued  last  Sunday 
evening,  before  a thronged  congregation,  in  Elm 
Place  Church.  Under  the  organ  gallery,  behind 
the  pulpit,  was  a representation  of  the  pyramid, 
or,  as  the  learned  doctor  terms  it,  “the  stone 

* This  discourse  we  give  to  the  reader  as  reported.  In  all  the  others 
we  have  excluded  the  reporter’s  introduction  and  personal  references. 


THE  STONE  WITNESS. 


221 


Bible,”  its  massive  rectangular  dark  stone  foun- 
dation and  some  of  the  most  interesting  of  its  in- 
terior passages,  chambers  and  mysteries.  All 
eyes  were  fastened  in  scrutiny  upon  it,  well 
knowing  that  some  revelations  of  unusual  Chris- 
tian interest  would  be  made  by  the  doctor  from 
it  as  soon  as  his  lecture  commenced.  The  pre- 
liminary exercises  of  singing  by  a well  trained 
choir  and  prayer  were  therefore  impatiently  lis- 
tened to  by  many  whose  thoughts  were  concen- 
trated on  the  wonders  of  the  Pyramid  and  its 
astounding  confirmation  of  the  prophetic  Scrip- 
tures. Dr.  Wild  read  a lesson  from  the  38th 
chapter  of  the  Book  of  Job,  remarking  that  the 
author  of  that  book  was  also  the  engineering 
director  or  architectural  author  of  the  Pyramid 
and  identical  with  Shem  and  Melchisedec.  The 
Book  of  Job  is  the  oldest  book  in  the  world 
by  200  or  300  years.  Shem,  or  J ob,  was  ninety- 
eight  years  old  when  he  entered  the  ark,  and  he 
lived  thirty  years  after  Abraham,  with  whom 
therefore  he  shook  hands  as  well  as  with  Me- 
thuselah who  shook  hands  with  Adam.  Only 
one  man,  therefore,  stood  between  Adam  and 
Shem,  and  only  two,  or  not  quite  two,  between 
Adam  and  Abraham.  The  Book  of  Berosus,  of 
Babylon,  is  the  only  one  that  compares  with  Job 
in  antiquity.  This  was  the  age  of  tradition  be- 
fore Moses  compiled  the  first  portions  of  it.  In 
the  days  of  Abraham,  Shem  was  the  patriarch 
or  oldest  of  his  family,  and  it  was  therefore  to 


222 


THE  STONE  WITNESS. 


him  he  did  homage  according  to  the  patriarchal 
custom  under  the  name  of  Melcliisedec  when  re- 
turning from  the  slaughter  of  the  kings.  Shem 
had  brought  with  him  from  the  days  before  the 
flood  much  of  the  knowledge  and  wisdom  which 
had  been  accumulated  in  the  earth  during  the 
2,000  years  previous  to  that  event,  and  which 
was  swept  away  when  only  eight  persons  were 
saved  in  the  ark.  We  have  been  told  that  the 
human  race  has  gradually  improved,  and  that 
our  ancestors  in  far  off  ages  were  monkeys,  or 
something  of  that  sort,  but  the  remains  of  the 
ruins  and  knowledge  of  antiquity  show  every- 
thing the  reverse  of  this  to  be  the  truth. 
Look  at  that  pyramid.  We  could  not  build  it 
to-day  with  all  our  boasted  science.  It  will  bear 
in  every  respect  the  closest  scientific  scrutiny. 
Our  greatest  scientists  are  only  beginning  to 
comprehend  the  depths  of  its  mysteries,  yet  it 
is  over  4,000  years  old.  The  capstone  on  top  of 
it  is  a pyramid  in  itself  in  miniature  unlike  any- 
thing of  the  kind  or  any  other  building  on  the 
earth.  The  reverend  gentleman  then  continued 
to  read  from  the  38th  of  Job,  and  show  that  the 
writer  of  it  w*as  master  of  astronomical  and  geo- 
graphical science  and  the  builder  of  the  pyramid 
which  is  a miniature  of  the  measurement  of  the 
earth  and  indicates  the  history  of  the  human 
race.  After  this  preliminary  dissertation  he 
took  for  his  text  the  29th  verse  of  the  28th  of 
Isaiah,  “ This  also  cometh  forth  from  the  Lord 


THE  STONE  WITNESS. 


228 


of  hosts , which  is  wonderful  in  counsel , cmcZ 
excellent  in  working” 

The  Bible  is  a growing  book,  being  more  read 
and  better  understood  as  the  years  pass  by,  and 
as  men  shall  increase  in  knowledge  and  power, 
so  the  Bible  will  gain  in  influence  and  authority. 
Opposition  to  its  teaching,  and  vaunting  denial 
of  its  authority,  shall  be  made  subservient  to  its 
interests  by  goading  on  the  church  to  a wiser 
and  more  noble  defence  and  exposition  of  the 
same.  Now  theology  can  levy  upon  the  well- 
defined  facts  of  science  in  confirmation  of  the 
sublime  teachings  of  inspiration.  The  Christian 
student  need  not  hold  himself  in  timid  dread 
for  fear  the  scientist  will  discover  aught  in  the 
realms  of  nature  that  will  contradict  the  word 
of  God  ; for  as  sure  as  God  is  the  author  of  both, 
so  surely  shall  we  find  an  agreement  between 
revelation  and  science  at  every  point  truly  un- 
derstood— increased  light  means  increased  evi- 
dence. Nations  and  men,  nature  and  Provi- 
dence, are  united  witnesses  for  God,  and  the 
Scriptures,  and  the  more  we  know  of  the  past 
the  better  shall  we  understand  the  present  and 
forecast  the  future.  Let  us  recognize  the  future. 
Let  us  recognize  the  important  difference  be- 
tween the  Bible  subjectively  and  objectively 
— that  is  between  what  the  Bible  really  is  and 
what  men  think  it  is.  Let  us  be  free  enough, 
bold  enough,  and  wise  enough,  to  claim  the  Bible 
itself.  Let  us  unyoke  it  from  tradition  which 


224 


THE  STONE  WITNESS. 


claims  to  be  superior  or  even  equal.  Let  us  di- 
vorce it  from  councils,  from  creeds,  from  sects 
and  denominations  ; let  us  lift  it  up  out  of  the 
ecclesiastical  rut  of  ages.  Let  us  with  a com- 
mendable pride  count  ourselves  worthy  and  able 
to  formulate  our  own  creeds,  make  our  own 
prayers  and  confessions,  accounting  that  the 
liberties  of  our  fathers  have  been  bequeathed  to 
their  children,  and  that  the  same  God  who  gave 
them  liberty  and  power  is  no  less  gracious  to  us, 
their  offsprings.  Traditions,  councils,  creeds 
and  degrees,  are  worth  much  unto  us  as  aids  to  a 
higher  life,  and  a nobler  civilization.  The  Chris- 
tian‘fathers,  the  Luthers,  Calvins,  Knoxs,  Wes- 
leys and  others,  were  our  servants,  as  we  will  be 
the  servants  of  coming  generations.  They 
worked  grandly,  they  wrought  well,  they  pro- 
cured for  us  a goodly  heritage : to  them  we 
are  indebted.  Yet  it  was  not  their  purpose  nor 
the  design  of  Providence  to  enslave  us,  or  to 
stereotype  the  church  for  the  ages  to  come.  In- 
creased light  is  increased  evidence,  enabling 
us  the  better  to  understand  the  word  of  God. 
When  a publisher  has  stereotyped  a book  he  is 
naturally  loath  to  make  any  change  or  correc- 
tion ; so  churches  who  have  stereotyped  the 
Bible  are  very  unwilling  to  change,  to  receive 
light.  Hence  they  are  sometimes  found  oppos- 
ing the  march  of  a better  civilization,  proving 
and  sustaining  all  manner  of  institutions  and 
tyrannies  : the  torturing  and  terrible  inquisition 


THE  STONE  WITNESS. 


225 


of  Spain,  the  punishment  and  hanging  of  sup- 
posed witches  by  England  and  New  England, 
the  bondage  and  slavery  of  the  South.  So  to 
prove  their  creeds  and  systems  correct  they 
each  have  a mode  of  their  own,  Catholic,  Epis- 
copalian, Baptist,  Congregational,  Methodist, 
etc.  So  also,  theologians  have  o.f  ten  been  impa- 
tient to  reconcile  the  Scriptures  with  history, 
even  to  suggest  mistakes  in  the  sacred  Record. 
Instance  Daniel  being  made  the  Third  Ruler. 
They  supposed  it  meant  second , but  later  re- 
searches show  that  Babylon  had  two  rulers  at 
that  time,  namely,  Nebuchadnezzar  and  Bel- 
shazzar, so  Daniel  was  made  a third.  See  the 
remains  of  Borssippia  near  Babylon— Dan.  5.  29. 
Now  we  know  that  both  Daniel  and  Berosus,  the 
old  Babylonian  historians,  were  right,  and  the 
Bible  was  right  in  using  the  word  Third.  God 
in  His  revelation  has  always  been  equal  to  man's 
need.  Tradition — Abraham  saw  Shem,  for 

Shem  lived  some  thirty  years  after  Abraham’s 
death.  Shem,  and  Melchizedek,  and  Job,  are 
likely  the  same  person.  Certainly,  Shem  and 
Melchizedek  are  the  same,  and  by  Egyptian  his- 
torians called  Philitis.  This  Philitis  was  the 
builder  of  the  great  Pyramid.  Now  Shem  saw 
Methuselah  and  Methuselah  Adam.  Thus  then 
tradition  would  be  sufficient.  As  tradition  failed, 
the  written  word  began.  There  is  little  doubt 
now  but  that  Shem,  called  also  Melchizedek,  was 
the  builder  of  the  Pyramid,  being  instructed  of 


226 


THE  STONE  WITNESS. 


Gfod,  as  his  father  Noah  had  been  in  building 
the  ark,  and  as  Moses  with  the  tabernacle,  and 
Solomon  with  the  temple.  As  the  prophet  in 
the  text  and  context  shows  that  the  wisdom  of 
man  is  often  the  gift  of  God.  See  Moses  also. 
“And  the  Lord  spake  unto  Moses,  saying  : See, 
I have  called  by  name  Bezaleel,  the  son  of  Uri,  the 
son  of  Hur,of  the  tribe  of  Judah;  and  I have  filled 
him  with  the  Spirit  of  God,  in  wisdom  and  in 
understanding,  and  in  knowledge,  and  in  all 
manner  of  workmanship.  To  devise  cunning 
works,  to  work  in  gold,  and  in  silver,  and  in 
brass,  and  in  cutting  of  stones,  to  set  them,  and 
in  carving  of  timber,  to  work  in  all  manner  of 
workmanship.  And  behold  I have  given  with 
him  Aholiab,  the  son  of  Ahisamach,  of  the  tribe 
of  Dan  ; and  in  the  hearts  of  all  that  are  wise- 
hearted  I have  put  wisdom  that  they  may  make 
all  that  I have  commanded  thee.” — Exod.  31,1-6. 
Let  ns  look  at  this  building,  for  it  is  a special 
revelation  for  these  times.  For  this  precise  and 
scientific  day  God  has  provided.  Science  and  the 
Bible  are  interlocked  in  this  building;  they  agree, 
they  testify  for  the  same  God,  yet  they  witness 
to  the  same  Christ,  the  Providence  and  history 
of  His  chosen  people.  This  stone  Book  could 
not  be  read  till  now  ; it  even  takes  the  most  pre- 
cise scientific  men  of  the  day  to  read  it.  For 
thousands  of  years  there  has  been  no  one  in  the 
court  of  the  world  able  to  question  and  interpret 
this  witness  of  the  Lord  in  Egypt.  The  scient- 


THE  STONE  WITNESS. 


227 


ists  have  been  asking  for  some  other  revelation 
than  the  Bible,  for  the  supernatural  in  a scien- 
tific form,  for  something  beyond  man,  for  some- 
thing all  could  see,  for  something  that  would 
answer  to  pure  science,  for  something  that  could 
be  seen,  handled,  measured,  tested,  and  amena- 
ble to  mathematics;  something  superhuman,  for 
something  in  which  the  human  and  the  divine 
blend.  Thank  heaven,  all  they  ask  is  granted 
in  this  stone  monument.  Here  we  have  science 
forecast  for  thousands  of  years  ; here  we  have 
the  grandest  of  problems  in  science  solved,  and 
the  sublimest  phenomena  of  religion  and  science 
crystalized,  symbolizing  and  teaching  the  most 
marvelous  facts  in  religion,  sociology  and  as- 
tronomy. It  is  not  a tomb,  nor  grainary,  nor 
temple,  but  a pillar  and  witness  unto  the  Lord 
of  Host.  Think  of  a few  facts.  1.  Its  location 
the  center  of  the  land  surface  of  the  whole  earth. 
Hence  the  best  zero  point  on  earth  for  meridi- 
onal and  latitudinal  calculations.  Central  to 
clime,  here  is  no  rust,  moss  nor  frosts  to  destroy, 
nor  earthquake,  a well  chosen  spot  for  such  a 
pillar.  2.  Its  form  and  size — symbolizing  the 
earth  quantity  in  its  weight  of  five  millions  of 
tons — the  freight  of  1,250  of  the  largest  steamers 
leaving  New  York-  Its  shape,  or  inclination 
from  base  to  apex,  the  same  as  from  the  pole  to 
the  equator.  To  express  this  the  builder  sloped 
in  ten  feet  for  every  nine  in  height.  On  this 
building  the  sun  can  shine  upon  the  whole  of  it 


228 


THE  STONE  WITNESS. 


twice  per  year  without  a shadow.  This  build- 
ing is  the  most  correctly  orient  of  any  structure 
on  the  earth.  It  is  the  highest,  largest  and  old- 
est building  on  earth,  rising  to  the  height  of  486 
feet  and  a fraction,  which  height  if  multiplied 
by  ten  nine  times  gives  the  distance  of  the  earth 
from  the  sun.  Or  pile  a thousand  million  pyra- 
mids one  on  the  other,  and  the  last  would  touch 
the  sun.  As  it  stood  perfect,  it  was  the  circle 
squared.  For  the  height  is  the  radius  of  a cir- 
cle, whose  circumference,  if  divided  into  four 
equal  parts,  each  part  would  equal  one  of  the 
surface  sides  of  the  base.  Closer  in  approxima- 
tion than  Walli’s  Indivisibles,  or  Newton’s 
Fluxions,  or  Liebnitz’ s Calculus.  The  door  of 
entrance  was  some  forty-nine  feet  from  its  base, 
and  300  inches  east  of  the  centre,  so  as  at  once 
to  express  the  tilt  of  the  earth’s  axis  from, the 
plane  of  its  orbit,  and  by  its  height  from  the 
ground  express  the  Procession  of  the  Equinoxes. 
What  a witness  outwardly,  when  complete,  of 
polished  marble,  covering  some  thirteen  and  a 
half  acres,  within  and  without  clean  and  free 
from  idolatrous  marks.  But  God  foretold  the 
place  and  purpose  of  this  huge  pile  through  the 
prophet  Isaiah,  19:19-20.  “ In  that  day  shall 

there  be  an  altar  to  the  Lord  in  the  midst  of 
the  land  of  Egypt,  and  a pillar  at  the  border 
thereof  to  the  Lord.  And  it  shall  be  for  a sign 
and  for  a witness  unto  the  Lord  of  Hosts  in  the 
land  of  Egypt.  ’ ’ Here  we  see  the  altar  and 


THE  STONE  WITNESS. 


229 


'pillar  are  one  and  the  same,  and  a scientific  fact 
is  expressed  when  the  prophet  says  it  shall  be 
in  the  midst  and  on  the  border.  The  position 
of  the  pyramid  is  such,  being  at  the  sector  point 
of  Upper  and  Lower  Egypt,  thus  being  on  the 
border  of  both,  yet  in  the  midst.  The  sector 
point  of  the  arm  is  where  the  wrist  joins  the 
hand.  The  spreading  hand  represents  Lower, 
and  the  arm  Upper  Egypt.  See  on  frontis- 
piece the  sector  plate. 

May  we  ask  what  the  Pillar  and  Witness — 
the  Pyramid — has  to  say  on  the  Jewish  question, 
for  it  has  not  left  this  fact  unnoticed.  At  the 
junction  of  the  first  ascending  passage  with  the 
grand  gallery,  on  the  left-hand  side,  or  east, 
there  is  a horizontal  passage-way  leading  to  what 
is  called  the  Queen’s  chamber.  This  chamber  is 
on  the  twenty-fifth  course  of  masonry.  Now,  it 
is  allowed,  the  grand  gallery  expresses  the  time 
of  Christ’s  advent  and  fullness  of  time — enlarged 
liberty.  The  ascending  passage  being  only  four 
feet  high,  men  were  cramped  in  passing  up,  but 
on  reaching  the  grand  gallery  they  were  free,  for 
it  is  twenty-eight  feet  high. 

The  passage  to  the  Queen’s  chamber  is  only 
four  feet,  and,  is  it  not  strange  that  it  is  alto- 
gether Jewish?  This  low  horizontal  passage 
terminates  in  a grand  Sabbatic  room,  which 
symbolizes  the  Jewish  Sabbath-week,  feasts  and 
time  periods. 

From  this  passage  we  learn  that  the  Jews  re- 


230 


THE  STONE  WITNESS. 


jected  Christ,  and  went  off  by  themselves,  refus- 
ing the  liberty  of  Christ.  So  as  truly  as  the 
coming  of  Christ  had  been  forecast  in  this 
Pyramid,  so  had  His  rejection  by  the  Jews. 

The  very  mortar  in  this  chamber  is  mixed  with 
salt.  The  chamber  is  seven-sided.  The  last 
seventh  of  the  passage-way  sinks  down,  giving 
more  room  to  move  in.  Salt  was  an  article  used 
freely  with  the  Jews  in  sacrificing.  Seven  was  a 
sacred  number.  The  sinking  of  the  last  seventh 
part  of  the  passage-way  floor  may  mean  the  en- 
larging privilege  of  the  Jews  in  this  latter  day. 
Of  the  civilized  nations,  only  Russia  and  Spain 
forbid  them  citizenship.  Even  Turkey  admits 
them  now  as  citizens. 

The  Jews  have  been  represented  as  being  blind 
in  part.  The  passage-way  and  chamber  have 
been  difficult  to  explore  because  of  foul  air  ; there 
being  no  ventilating  tubes  as  in  the  King’s 
chamber. 

But,  strange  to  say,  a gentleman  exploring 
this  chamber  a short  time  ago,  found  two  tubes 
by  an  accident  in  striking  the  side  wall  with  a 
hammer.  The  tubes  had  been  left  entirely  closed 
over,  with  a thin,  unbroken  scale.  These  tubes 
extended  inward  through  the  masonry,  and  into 
the  stones  forming  the  walls  of  the  room,  all 
nicely  cut,  but  for  about  one  inch  they  were  not 
cut  through  into  the  room  itself.  Thus  the  whole 
was  designed  is  evident.  This  thin  scale  no  doubt 
symbolizes  the  condition  of  the  Jews.  His  eyes 


THE  STONE  WITNESS. 


231 


are  now  open.  The  time  of  liis  wandering  nearly 
spent,  as  told  by  this  Pyramid. 

The  curses  foretold  upon  the  Jews  have  been 
terribly  fulfilled.  So  shall  the  blessings  foretold 
now  in  reserve.  It  was  foretold  that  he  would 
reject  Christ ; so  he  did.  But  it  is  also  foretold 
that  he  will  yet  look  upon  Him  whom  he  pierced, 
and  mourn  and  repent,  and  accept  the  true  Mes- 
siah. Lo-ruhamah  represents  lost  Israel ; Lo- 
ammi  represents  cursed  Judah ; Ruhammah 
represents  Israel  found  ; Ammi  represents  the 
curse  removed  from  the  Jews.  So  now  we  must 
say  as  the  Prophet  Hosea  long  ago  instructed  us 
— we  Saxons — “ Say  ye  unto  your  brethren, 
Ammi,”  and  you  Jews  say  to  your  sisters,  Ru- 
hammah. 

We  have  esteemed  the  Jews  as  cursed  ; we  will 
soon  esteem  them  blest.  The  Jews  have  never 
thought  we  were  their  brethren,  the  descendants 
of  Abraham.  But  God  is  revealing  in  this  latter 
day  His  own  great  plan  ; and  Christ  will  be  the 
Saviour  of  both. 

“ In  His  days  Judah  shall  be  saved,  and  Israel 
shall  dwell  safely.  Therefore,  behold,  the  days 
come,  saith  the  Lord,  that  they  shall  no  more  say, 
the  Lord  liveth  which  brought  up  the  children  of 
Israel  out  of  the  land  of  Egypt ; but  the  Lord  liveth 
which  brought  up,  and  which  led  the  seed  of  the 
house  of  Israel  out  of  the  north  country,  and  from 
all  countries  whither  I had  driven  them,  and  they 
shall  dwell  in  their  own  land.” — Jer.  xxiii.  6-8. 


232 


THE  STONE  WITNESS. 


Glorious  times  are  near  at  hand  for  the  church 
and  the  world.  Great  things  hath  God  promised, 
all  of  which  He  will  in  His  own  good  time  bring 
to  pass. 

The  very  dimensions  of  the  door- way  are  of 
thrilling  import,  expressing  in  square  inches  the 
Time  of  the  Adamic  World,  which,  when  added 
to  other  figures,  forecast  the  time  of  the  end,  or 
the  6,000  years,  and  point  out  the  date  of  the 
beginning  of  the  Millennium  morn,  or  Sabbath  of 
the  earth.  The  period  spoken  of  by  Daniel  when 
he  says,  “Blessed is  he  that  waiteth,  and  cometh 
to  the  thousand,  three  hundred  and  five  and 
thirty  days.”  This  period  we  approximated  in 
our  last  Discourse,  and  made  it  out  to  be  about 
1,957.  The  doorway,  in  square  inches,  is  1,949  ; 
take  these  inches  for  years,  and  we  have,  before 
the  building  of  the  Pyramid,  of  years  1,949  a.  m. 
Time  of  building  2,170  B.  C.  and  length  of  Grand 
Gallery  1882,  and  we  get  a total  of  6,001.  This 
is  indeed  a close  approximation. 


SIGNS  AND  WONDERS. 


Discourse , 18. 


THE  STONE  PROPHET  IN  THE  WILDERNESS — NO 
WAR  FOR  FOUR  YEARS — THE  GREAT  STRUG- 
GLE TO  COMMENCE  IN  1882 — PRUSSIA  AN- 
CIENT ASSYRIA — ENGLAND,  GERMANY  AND 
EGYPT,  TO  BE  ALLIES — THE  FUTURE  HISTORY 
OF  THE  WORLD — THE  PHILISTINES  THE 
SOUTHERN  IRISH — WHO  THEIR  GREAT  AN- 
CESTOR WAS,  ETC. 


Text-Jeremiali  xxxii.  IS,  19.  20. 

“ The  Great , the  Mighty  God,  the  Lord  of  Hosts,  is  His  name. 
Great  in  counsel , and  mighty  in  work;  for  Thine  eyes  are 
open  upon  all  the  ways  of  the  sons  of  men;  to  give  every  one 
according  to  his  ways,  and  according  to  the  fruit  of  his  doings; 
which  has  set  signs  and  wonders  in  the  land  o f Egypt,  even 
unto  this  dayT 


SGYPT  is  intimately  connected  with  Pales- 
tine in  Providential  history,  both  past, 
present  and  future.  No  student  can  have  a 
proper  knowledge  of  the  Jewish  and  Israelitish 
nation,  unless  he  be  familiar  with  the  early  civili- 
zation and  power  of  Egypt.  From  this  land  went 


234 


SIGNS  AND  WONDERS. 


forth  the  Caphtorim  to  settle  Palestine, led  forth 
by  the  great  and  good  Melchizedek,  after  he  had 
built  the  Pyramid.  Under  his  reign  they  first 
settled  Palestine,  built  and  made  Jerusalem 
their  capitol.  On  the  death  of  Melchizedek  they 
lost  their  allegiance  to  God,  they  became  an 
idolatrous  people,  and  were  rejected  by  Jehovah 
as  his  special  agents.  They  are  known  in  after 
history  under  the  name  of  Philistines,  which 
simply  means  the  followers  or  subjects  of  Phil- 
itis — a name  which  the  early  historians  of  Egypt 
gave  to  the  builder  of  the  pyramid,  which  was 
none  other  person  than  Melchizedek.  By  the 
Israelites  they  were  driven  out  of  Palestine,  and 
finally  settled  in  the  south  of  Ireland,  as  Irish 
historians  allow. 

Another  member  of  the  family  of  Shem  was 
called,  namely,  Abraham,  from  whom  came 
God’s  chosen  people — Israel  and  the  Jews. 
They  also  had  to  sojourn  in  Egypt,  and  they, 
too,  were  sent  to  Palestine, and  grafted  on  to  the 
purpose  of  God,  where  the  Philistines  had  been 
broken  off. 

“Have  not  I brought  up  Israel  out  of  the 
land  of  Egypt ; and  the  Philistines  from  Caph- 
tor.”  Amos  9:7. 

Egypt  has  played  a noble  part  in  the  Provi- 
dence of  God  through  Melchizedek,  Abraham, 
Joseph,  and  Moses.  Even  the  blessed  Jesus  is 
said  to  be  called  from  this  land.  “Out  of  Egypt 
have  I called  my  Son.”  The  Egyptians  gave  to 


SIGNS  AND  WONDERS. 


235 


the  world  the  first  translation  of  the  Hebrew 
Bible,  and  it  was  for  centuries  the  stronghold  of 
Christianity  after  the  destruction  of  Jerusalem. 
The  best  of  the  Christian  Fathers  were  Egyp- 
tians, and  in  the  coming  struggle,  the  great  war, 
which  will  begin  about  1882,  again  Egypt  will 
become  conspicuous  with  England  and  Prussia. 
For  the  Prussians  are  the  Assyrians  as  the  Eng- 
lish are  the  lost  tribes  of  Israel.  Bismark  may 

manoeuvre  as  he  please,  and  be  as  pro- Russian 
as  Dr.  Storrs,  yet  when  the  time  comes  he  and 
his  people  will  fall  in  with  the  Providential  pur- 
pose, and  become  an  ally  with  Israel-England ; 
and  timid  and  bankrupt  Egypt  will  then  come 
forth  to  take  her  place  once  more  among  the 
nations  of  the  earth  as  an  independent  power. 
Hear  what  the  Prophet  Isaiah  says  in  the  19th 
chapter  : “And  the  Lord  shall  smite  Egypt,  He 
shall  smite  and  heal  it,  and  they  shall  return 
even  to  the  Lord,  and  He  shall  be  entreated  of 
them,  and  shall  heal  them.  In  that  day  shall 
there  be  a highway  out  of  Egypt  to  Assyria,  and 
the  Assyrian  shall  come  into  Egypt  and  the 
Egyptian  into  Assyria,  and  the  Egyptians 
shall  serve  with  the  Assyrians.  In  that  day 
shall  Israel  be  the  third  with  Egypt  and  with 
Assyria,  even  a blessing  in  the  midst  of  the  land. 
Whom  the  Lord  of  Hosts  shall  bless,  saying, 
Blessed  be  Egypt  my  people,  and  Assyria  the 
work  of  my  hands,  and  Istael  mine  inheritance.” 
“In  that  day  ’ refers  to  this  day,  now  at  hand. 


236 


SIGNS  AND  WONDERS. 


To  this  the  great  Pyramid  is  a witness.  For  in 
the  19th  and  20th  verses  of  this  chapter  we  read : 
‘ ‘ In  that  day  shall  there  be  an  altar  to  the  Lord 
in  the  midst  of  the  land  of  Egypt,  and  a pillar 
at  the  border  thereof  to  the  Lord.  And  it  shall 
be  for  a sign  and  for  a witness  unto  the  Lord 
of  Hosts  in  the  land  of  Egypt.” 

The  word  translated  pillar,  is  from  the  Hebrew 
word  Matzaybhah,  and  means  a large  structure 
— some  monument  that  is  pre-eminent.  The 
Hebrew  word  Ammood  is  translated  pillar 
also,  and  corresponds  to  the  English  word  pil- 
lar much  better. 

The  word  altar , in  Hebrew,  means  lion,  carry- 
ing with  it  the  same  meaning  of  pre-eminence. 
And  is  not  this  Pyramid  pre-eminent  ? and  is  it 
not  the  lion  of  monuments,  pre-eminent  as  be- 
ing the  oldest,  pre-eminent  as  being  the  highest, 
pre-eminent  as  being  the  largest,  pre-eminent  in 
location — being  central  to  all  the  land  surface 
of  the  earth,  pre-eminent  in  construction,  unlike 
any  other  buildings,  except  such  as  have  been 
modeled  after  it,  pre-eminent  in  orientation, 
that  is,  being  exactly  East,  North,  West  and 
South, 

Perfect  orientation  men  in  past  ages  and 
countries  have  tried  to  express  in  temples, 
churches,  observatories,  and  monuments,  yet 
none  have  succeeded  so  well  as  the  Pyramid 
builders. 

The  famous  Uranibourg  Observatory,  built 


SIGNS  AND  WONDERS. 


237 


by  aid  of  the  European  governments,  under  the 
skilful  supervision  of  the  learned  Tycho  Brahe, 
was  found  to  be  five  minutes  of  a degree  askew 
in  its  orientation  when  finished. 

A few  years  ago  our  government  determined 
to  have  one  point  of  perfect  orientation,  fixing 
upon  Mount  Agamenticus  in  the  State  of  Maine. 
They,  at  a great  cost,  and  time  and  labor,  con- 
cluded their  work,  and  found  they  were  in  error 
somewhere  about  the  four  hundredth  part  of  a 
second  ; although  they  tried  to  solve  the  prob- 
lem by  three  distinct  processes,  namely,  differ- 
ences of  zenith  distance,  absolute  zenith  dis- 
tances, and  by  transits  in  prime  vertical. 

How  then  came  these  ancient  architects  so 
early  in  the  world’s  history  and  progress,  to 
build  so  skillfully  ? How  were  they  able  some 
four  thousand  years  ago  to  find  the  poles,  and 
determine  the  latitude  and  longitude  so  pre- 
cisely ? Answer  ye  godless  scientists,  and 
tell  ns  how  these  monkey  men  were  so  skilled. 
How  did  they  know  without  your  instruments 
and  instruction  which  parallel  of  latitude  to 
choose  so  as  to  be  on  that  line  which  would 
mark  the  half-way  of  the  world’s  surface  be- 
tween the  equator  and  the  poles  ? 

And  why  did  they  lay  bare  and  make  smooth 
the  lime  stone  table  rock  on  which  they  built 
close  to  its  northern  edge?  Why  press  so 
closely  to  the  brink  of  the  hill  on  the  north  side 
when  there  was  plenty  of  room  on  the  south 
side? 


238 


SIGNS  AND  WONDERS. 


Truly  this  witness  of  God  is  against  you.  In 
this  building  are  “ signs  and  wonders  ” even  to 
this  day,  and  as  surely  also,  are  the  eyes  of  Je- 
hovah open  upon  all  the  ways  of  the  children  of 
men. 

Know  ye  not  that  the  accumulated  forces  and 
results  of  centuries  have  been  bequeathed  to  the 
present  generation  as  a legal  heritage  for  cul- 
ture and  profit. 

Happily  for  us  God  has  not  left  Himself  with- 
out witnesses.  Long  before  God  made  bare  His 
arm  through  Moses,  and  wrought  miracles  to 
convince  Pharaoh  and  the  Egyptians,  He  had 
wrought  one  miracle,  a miracle  which  would 
cover  the  ages  ; not  be  seen  by  a few  only,  or 
last  for  a day,  but  to  be  seen  by  the  millions  and 
last  for  centuries. 

In  this  Pyramid  we  have  a valuable  inherit- 
ance. Its  finish,  its  beauty,1  its  magnitude,  pro- 
vokes our  criticism  and  yet  must  command  our 
admiration.  This  Watchman  on  the  walls  of 
time,  this  Sentinel  in  charge  of  the  secrets  and 
treasures  of  the  sires  of  long  ago,  this  Prophet 
in  the  wilderness  in  rugged  garb,  proclaiming 
the  will  of  heaven,  as  then  made  known,  and 
now  manifest,  this  Daniel  who  can  interpret  for 
us  the  future.  This  Mile-stone  of  the  ages  we 
do  revere. 

By  it  we  are  enabled  to  adjust  our  chronologi- 
cal dates,  rectify  history  in  some  of  its  most  im- 
portant points,  and  j udge  more  correctly  of  the 


SIGNS  AND  WONDERS. 


239 


attainments  of  our  ancestors  ; nay,  more  and 
better,  to  form  a truer  estimate  of  ourselves  and 
discern  the  finger  of  God  in  the  manipulations 
of  men,  and  an  overruling  Providence  in  the 
rise  and  fall  of  nations. 

These  signs  and  wonders  confirm  God’ s word, 
for  they  prove  inspiration  a fact ; inspiration  of 
a kind  and  in  the  very  manner  demanded  by  the 
unbelieving  scientists.  Here  is  a building  super- 
human, and  of  course  in  part  supernatural,  like 
the  Bible.  In  this  building  the  human  and  the 
Divine  blend. 

If  any  deny  this  it  remains  with  them  to  ac- 
count for  it,  and  show  how  a people  so  far  back 
in  the  world’s  history  could  be  so  wise  and 
learned  ; how  they  could  embody  so  much  of 
the  sciences.  One  thing  is  certain,  if  the  Divine 
had  nothing  to  do  with  this  building,  then  we 
are  left  to  the  conclusion  that  man  was  much 
superior  to  what  the  Darwinian  theory  admits. 
If  void  of  the  Divine,  then  the  development 
theory  is  destroyed.  If  we  admit  the  Divine, 
then  it  follows  that  inspiration  is  a fact. 

The  building  is  there,  and  it  was  there  in  the 
day  of  Egypt’s  oldest  historians.  It  has  been 
counted  as  one  of  the  seven  wonders  of  the  world. 

It  did  not  embody  the  ideas  of  the  Egyptians 
in  science,  astronomy,  meteorology  or  religion. 
As  their  historians  allow,  it  was  built  by  for- 
eigners which  they  hated. 

Nothing  idolatrous  was  carved  on  it,  within 


240 


SIGNS  AND  WONDERS. 


or  without.  It  was  a witness  pure  and  clean. 
The  Egyptians  proclaimed  and  believed  the  earth 
to  be  square — this  building  proclaimed  the  earth 
round.  The  builders  beveled  the  face  of  the  rock  in 
a ratio  of  eight  inches  to  the  mile — the  very  quan- 
tity that  science  to-day  admits  to  be  the  curvi- 
ture  of  the  earth — and  accepts  in  surveying.  It 
was  their  knowledge  of  this  act  that  kept  the 
building  sound,  without  the  cracking  of  a joint, 
through  centuries,  though  so  high.  The  Egyp- 
tians did  not  use  the  sacred  Amma,  or  cubit, 
which  is  about  twenty-five  of  our  inches.  They 
used  a profane  cubit — as  Sir  Isaac  Newton  shows. 

This  sacred  cubit  was  a well,  and  easily  estab- 
lished proportion  of  the  earth’ s diameter.  The 
very  standard  now  used  by  the  English  govern- 
ment in  surveying. 

The  stones  of  the  Pyramid  were  twelve  feet 
long,  eight  feet  broad,  and  five  deep,  making 
twenty -five  total.  The  building  itself  was  a five- 
faced figure.  The  Egyptians  hated  five.  No 
wonder  that  Moses  harnessed  the  Israelites  in 
fives  as  they  left  Egypt,  or  that  he  should  divide 
his  Book  into  five  parts. 

No  wonder  that  the  queen’s  chamber  should 
be  on  the  twenty-fifth  course  of  Masonry,  and 
the  king’s  chamber  on  the  fiftieth  course,  which 
is  the  year  of  jubilee,  or  deliverance.  Which 
year,  as  indicated  in  the  Pyramid,  is  the  year 
1935. 

The  Egyptians  calculated  from  the  moon  in 


SIGNS  AND  WONDERS. 


241 


their  chronology.  But  this  building  takes  its 
calculations  from  the  sun  circle.  The  Egyptian 
year  was  354  days,  with  an  intercalary  month  of 
thirty- three  days  added  every  three  years. 

The  year  embodied  in  the  Pyramid  was  365 
days,  live  hours,  forty-eight  minutes,  forty-seven 
and  seven-tenths  seconds.  If  a person  took  a 
rod  of  a cubit  length,  and  measured  one  of  the 
base  sides  of  the  Pyramid,  he  would  find  this 
twenty-live  inch  measure  to  be  contained,  as  of- 
ten as  there  are  days  in  the  year,  with  the  same 
fraction  in  inches,  as  the  hours,  minutes  and 
seconds. 

Is  it  impious  to  ask  how  these  builders  knew 
the  solar  year  so  completely  3 They  knew  the 
sun’s  circle  of  448  years,  which  completes  a 
circle  of  time  without  any  excess  or  deficiency. 
This  they  ran  into  weights  and  measures  as  God’ s 
religion  does. 

The  Pyramid,  having  four  sides,  would  divide 
this  circle  into  four  parts,  which  makes  112 
pounds  or  a hundred  weight,  or,  if  multiplied 
by  five,  the  faces  of  the  Pyramid,  448  would  give 
2,240,  or  a ton. 

In  the  descending  and  ascending  passages, 
a person  must  stoop  to  pass  through  them,  but 
when  the  grand  gallery  is  reached,  they  can 
stand  upright,  for  this  gallery  enlarges  seven 
times  the  proportions  of  the  other.  The  first 
passages  are  only  four  feet  high  ; this  is  twenty- 
eight. 


242 


SIGNS  AND  WONDERS. 


The  first  ascending  passage  is  1,542  inches  in 
length.  The  time,  taking  inches  for  years,  from 
the  exodns  of  Israel  from  Egypt  to  Christ. 

Christ  brings  enlarged  liberty.  He  was  sym- 
bolized by  the  ton — the  end  of  weight  scale. 
“ When  the  fullness  of  time  was  come,  God  sent 
forth  His  Son.” 

Again,  thirty- three  inches  in  this  gallery  is  an 
open  sepulchre  with  fifty-six  empty  graves  in 
miniature,  carved  out,  telling,  again,  by  a strange 
coincident,  the  life  years  of  the  Saviour  and  His 
resurrection  ; also,  the  number  of  those  who 
rose  immediately  after.  For  “the  graves  were 
opened,  and  many  bodies  of  the  saints  which 
slept,  arose  and  came  out  of  the  graves  after  His 
resurrection.” — Matt,  xxvii.  52. 

Another  remarkable  feature  is,  that  at  the  end 
of  this  gallery,  the  wall  bulges  forward  about 
four  inches,  as  if  it  were  going  to  fall  in.  This 
gallery,  on  the  floor,  is  1,882  inches  ; on  the 
roof,  1,878  inches.  This  explains  to  us  our  very 
times.  The  shadow  of  war— Russia  and  Englan  d 
appearing  as  if  they  would  fight  every  day. 
But  they  know  not  the  counsels  of  God,  nor  His 
sublime  purpose.  Surely,  as  the  text  declares, 
“ Our  God  is  great  in  council  and  mighty  in 
work  ; and  His  eyes  are  open  upon  all  the  ways 
of  the  sons  of  men.”  More  next  Sunday  even- 
ing, God  willing,  about  His  own  marvelous  wit- 
nesses. Let  us  praise  and  adore  Him. 


^Iicali  v*  7i 


“And  the  remnant  of  Jacob  shall  be  among  the  Gentiles  in  the  midst 
of  many  people  as  a Lion  among  the  beasts  of  the  forest , as  a 
Young  Lion  among  the  flocks  of  sheep  : who , if  he  go  through, 
both  treadeth  down  and  teareth  in  pieces , and  none  can  deliver " 


‘ * His  glory  is  like  the  firstling  of  his  bullock , and  his  horns  like  the 
Horns  of  Unicorns  .*  with  them  he  shall  push  the  people 
together  to  the  ends  of  the  EARTH,’ * 

THE  THRONE  OF  DAVID. 

Discourse , 1 9. 


England’ s prophecy  fulfilled  in  the  Ber- 
lin CONGRESS — THE  HARP  OF  TARA  THE  HARP 
OF  ISRAEL — THE  FUTURE  EUROPEAN  ALLI- 
ANCES— ROYAL  SUCCESSION  OF  THE  HOUSE 

OF  ISRAEL.  

Text— Ezekiel  xxi,  eZ7» 

“ 1 will  overturn , overturn,  overturn  it;  and  it  shall  be  no  more, 
until  He  come  whose  right  it  is;  and  I will  give  it  Him." 

tHE  closing  of  the  famous  European  Con- 
gress will  now  freely  permit  us  to  canvass 
the  work  and  results  of  the  same,  and  to  com- 


244 


THE  THKONE  OF  DAVID. 


pare  the  sequences  with  the  teachings  of  the 
Prophets,  and  intentions  of  Providence.  The 
results  of  the  Congress  have  taken  the  world  by 
surprise.  The  very  fact  that  one  should  have 
been  held  under  the  enforced  conditions  of  the 
crownless  king,  Disraeli,  was  a wonder  in  it- 
self. But  the  wonder  is  not  confined  to  the 
meeting  and  work  of  the  Congress,  for  outside 
of,  and  in  spite  of  the  Congress,  a treaty  has 
been  made  which  converts  wonder  into  amaze- 
ment. Back  in  the  middle  of  last  May,  Eng- 
land and  Turkey  formed  an  alliance,  offensive 
and  defensive.  Nay  more,  for  Turkey  cedes  to 
England  the  fruitful  and  strategic  island  of 
Cyprus.  What  a triangle  of  strongholds — Cy- 
prus, Malta  and  Gibralter.  Shades  of  Bona- 
parte! Where  is  France  these  days?  She  is 
renewing  her  strength,  and  is  wisely  standing 
aside  so  as  not  to  oppose  Providence.  In  all 
this  there  is  nothing  new  or  strange  to  the  pro- 
phetic student.  For  long  ago  it  was  written  of 
Israel  that  she  should  be  a company  of  nations, 
and  possess  the  gates  of  her  enemies. 

It  is  not  by  might,  nor  power  of  human  origin, 
that  these  events  must  be  j udged  or  that  they  come 
to  pass.  But,  surely,  by  the  Spirit  of  God.  ‘ ‘ There 
is  a spirit  in  man,  and  the  inspiration  of  the  Al- 
mighty giveth  it  understanding. ’ ’ Here  J ob  gives 
us  the  key  to  unlock  the  mysteries  of  the  crown- 
less king  and  his  success.  The  apothegm  of 
Bonaparte  is  as  false  as  he  was  unsuccessful, 


THE  THRONE  OF  DAVID. 


245 


namely  : That  Providence  is  always  on  the  side 
of  the  strongest  battalions.  In  Israel,  in  time  of 
old,  this  was  seldom  true.  In  fact  it  was  not  true 
in  the  experience  and  campaigns  of  Bonaparte. 
The  logic  of  such  a faith  has  been  the  ruin  of 
lovely  France  more  than  once,  and  will  be  again. 
For  it  must  needs  be  that  France  break  her  alli- 
ance with  England,  though  now  they  are  friends. 
France  in  a few  years  will  ally  with  the  Beast,  the 
Roman  Church,  in  its  last  struggle  for  rule  and 
supremacy.  And  she  will  join  hands  with  anti- 
Christ.  France  will  repeat  the  follies  of  ’98. 
She  will  again  seek  to  dethrone  Religion, 
and  enthrone  Reason.  Her  Marats,  Desmou- 
lins, Herberts,  Clootz’s  and  Robespierres  are  at 
hand  ready  to  overturn.  And  the  church  of  her 
choice  is  patiently  waiting  to  re-enact  the  scenes 
of  blood  and  terror  of  St.  Bartholomew.  Her  time 
of  opportunity  will  appear  to  have  come  in  a few 
years.  Bismark  and  Kaiser  William  will  be  out 
of  the  way,  and  Germany  will  languish  for  want 
of  two  equal  successors.  And  France  will  not 
forget  to  pay  back  the  debt  of  revenge  she 
owes  to  Germany,  and  seek  to  reclaim 
her  prestige  in  councils,  and  especially  to 
restore  her  lost  influence  over  Egypt,  Turkey, 
and  the  Mediterranean. 

Last  week  it  would  not  have  been  so  easy  to  see 
how  France  and  England  were  to  become  once 
again  enemies.  This  Cyprus  wedge  has  cleft  open 
a little  farther  the  dark  and  mysterious  future. 


246 


THE  THEONE  OE  DAVID. 


Last  Monday  we  received  the  astounding  tele- 
gram of  the  treaty  between  England  and  Turkey. 
It  evidently  was  a surprise,  we  have  no  doubt, 
even  to  Rev.  Dr.  Storrs  and  the  New  YorkWer- 
ald,  as  well  as  to  many  others,  who  could  see 
nothing  but  defeat  and  shame  for  Israel  Eng- 
land. From  Dr.  Storrs  we  have  not  heard  what 
he  now  thinks  of  his  child  of  promise,  Russia. 
From  the  Herald  we  did  hear,  for  by  the  way  the 
Herald  is  one  of  our  morning  papers.  By  an 
editorial  of  a column  and  a half  the  Herald 
struggled  nobly  to  wriggle  out  of  the  tight 
corner  in  which  its  sympathies  for  Russia  had 
crowded  it.  We  like  and  admire  the  Herald , 
because  of  its  tact  and  ingenuity  in  getting 
news  first  from  any  part  of  the  world.  Still  this 
time  she  was  behind  time.  Two  years  ago  from 
this  pulpit  we  announced  the  exciting  facts  of 
the  past  week.  Last  Sunday  evening  we  closed 
our  discourse  in  these  words:  “Now,  again, 
England  pledges  herself  a Continental  power — 
nay,  more,  an  Asiatic  power.  She  will  come 
forth  from  the  congress  the  virtual  ruler  of  Tur- 
key, the  owner  of  Palestine.” 

If  the  Saxons  be  the  ten  lost  tribes  of  Israel, 
and  most  certainly  they  respond  to  all  the  fea- 
ture that  were  to  distinctly  mark  them  when 
found,  as  written  in  the  bible,  then  the  Eng- 
lish throne  is  a continuation  of  David’ s throne, 
and  the  seed  on  it  must  be  the  seed  of  David, 
and  the  inference  is  clear,  namely,  that  all  the 


THE  THRONE  OF  DAVID. 


247 


blessings  attaching  by  Holy  promise  to  David’s 
throne  mnst  belong  to  England.  This  is  the  key 
that  unravels  and  makes  plain  the  marvelous 
and  sublime  history  of  the  English  nation  and 
throne.  We  know  many  scout  the  idea  of  the 
lost  tribes  ever  being  found,  although  over  thirty 
times  God  declares  by  the  prophets  that  they 
must  return ; surely  before  they  return  they  must 
be  found.  God  has  not  cast  away  His  people 
forever.  No,  no.  He  declares  Israel  to  be  His 
inheritance , and  that  this  people  He  had 
formed  for  Himself. 

The  two  tribes  forming  the  Jews  of  to-day  are 
said  by  the  best  calculation  to  number  about 
nine  millions.  If,  then,  the  two  tribes  number 
nine  millions,  how  many  ought  we  to  expect  the 
ten  tribes  to  number?  If  the  two  tribes  have 
stood  and  survived  the  shock  and  persecution  of 
centuries  when  known,,  and  therefore  open  to 
assault,  is  it  not  reasonable  to  suppose  that 
the  ten  tribes  will  be  in  existence,  a numerous 
and  powerful  people,  for  they  have  been  hid, 
and  thus  have  they  evaded  the  persecution  that 
a knowledge  of  their  nationality  would  have  en- 
tailed upon  them  from  the  Gentile  and  Pagan 
nations. 

Some,  indeed,  persist  in  looking  for  God’s 
chosen  seed — His  people,  His  inheritance, 
among  the  bushmen  of  Africa,  the  Indians 
of  America  ; indeed  wherever  they  can  find  a 
people  mean,  and  few,  and  very  low  in  the  scale 


248 


THE  THRONE  OE  DAVID. 


of  civilization.  They  overlook  the  fact  that 
Israel,  not  the  Jews,  were  to  be  the  most 
powerful  and  prolific  people  on  the  face  of  the 
earth,  to  be  as  sands  of  the  sea,  as  the  stars 
of  heaven.  Especially  were  these  promises  to 
be  true  in  the  latter  day — for  then  God  prom- 
ises to  multiply  upon  them  men,  beasts,  and  the 
fruits  of  the  field.  This  is  one  of  the  signs  of 
the  times,  and  it  is  a remarkable  one.  See  our 
harvest,  see  our  cattle,  and  see  the  Saxon  race 
— doubling,  at  least,  every  forty  years.  No 
other  nation  is  doubling  at  that  rate.  Germany 
comes  the  nearest,  and  both  in  Prussia  and 
Austria  they  only  double  every  one  hundred 
years.  In  one  hundred  years  from  to-day  the 
Saxons  will  control  the  world  for  peace  and 
Christ. 

To  this  end  God  is  overturning,  and  will  over- 
turn until  the  whole  world  shall  be  federated 
around  one  throne,  and  that  throne  is  David’s — 
the  only  throne  God  ever  directly  established, 
and  the  only  one  He  has  promised  perpetuity  to. 
God  has  a land — Palestine.  He  has  a people — 
Israel.  He  has  a throne — David’ s,  and  for  that 
throne — He  has  a seed,  just  as  the  seed  of  Levi 
was  selected  for  Temple  service. 

This  kingdom  is  the  fifth  kingdom,  to  be  set 
up  in  the  latter  days  of  those  kings  says  Daniel. 
The  kingdom  was  never  to  be  left  unto  other 
people.  It  is  typified  by  the  stone  cut  out  of 
the  mountain  that  is  to  fill  the  world.  Why 


THE  THRONE  OF  DAVID. 


249 


then  stand  amazed  at  the  cession  of  Cyprus  to 
England,  if  she  be  Israel.  To  her  was  promised 
the  isles  of  the  sea,  the  coasts  of  the  earth, 
the  waste  and  desolate  places — the  heathen  and 
uttermost  parts  of  the  earth,  as  a possession. 
Already  out  of  the  fifty-one  million  square  miles 
which  composes  the  earth,  England,  including 
the  United  States,  now  owns  about  fourteen 
millions,  or  say  one-fourth.  She  bears  rule  over 
one- third  of  the  people  of  the  earth  ; she  adds  a 
colony  every  four  years  on  an  average.  At  the 
present  rate  it  will  not  be  long  before  the  king- 
doms of  this  world  will  be  given  to  the  saints  of 
the  Most  High.  It  is  no  marvel  in  the  light  and 
instruction  of  prophecy  that  this  throne  and 
people  should  be  so  stable  and  prosperous. 

Turn  your  attention  to  the  founding  of  this 
throne  of  David.  You  will  find  the  throne  and 
seed  unconditionally  federated,  the  place  and 
measure  of  prosperity  conditioned  on  the  obedi- 
ence of  the  people  and  throne  to  God.  “The 
Lord  hath  sworn  in  truth  unto  David;  He  will  not 
turn  from  it ; of  the  fruit  of  tliy  body  will  I set 
upon  thy  throne.” — Psalm  cxxxii,  11.  Again, 
“I  have  sworn  unto  David,  thy  seed  I will 
establish  forever , and  build  up  thy  throne  to 
all  generations.” — Psalm  lxxxix,  3-4.  This 
promise  is  to  all  generations,  not  a part,  nor 
simply  for  sixty  years.  For  the  kingdom  was 
rent  in  twain  when  Rehoboam,  the  grandson  of 
David,  began  to  reign.  The  throne  of  David 


250 


THE  THRONE  OE  DAVID. 


would  be  about  the  poorest  type  of  Christ’s 
throne,  and  rule  and  reign,  if  we  can  only  see 
it  in  Palestine.  There  it  was  soon  divided,  very 
corrupt.  “If  ye  can  break  my  covenant  of  the 
day  and  night  in  their  season,  then  may  also 
my  covenant  be  broken  with  David  my  servant, 
that  he  should  not  have  a son  to  reign  upon  his 
throne.  * * * Thus  saith  the  Lord: 

if  my  covenant  be  not  with  day  and  night,  and 
if  I have  not  appointed  the  ordinances  of  heaven 
and  earth,  then  will  I cast  away  the  seed  of 
Jacob  and  David  my  servant,  so  that  I will  not 
take  any  of  his  seed  to  be  rulers  over  the  seed  of 
Abraham.” — Jeremiah  xxxiii,  25-26.  Let  any- 
body of  sane  mind  read  the  seventh  chapter  of  the 
second  book  of  Samuel,  and  they  will  see  that 
God  promised  to  David  that  his  house  and  king- 
dom should  be  established  forever,  and  that  God 
would  set  up  the  seed  of  David  after  him.  "Well 
might  David  exclaim  when  he  sat  before  the 
Lord,  “ Who  am  I,  O Lord  God,  and  what  is  my 
house,  that  thou  hast  brought  me  hitherto  ? 
And  this  was  yet  a small  thing  in  thy  sight,  O, 
Lord  God ; but  thou  hast  spoken  also  of  thy 
servant' s house  for  a great  while  to  come."  It 
is  a pity  men  will  not  take  and  interpret  the 
Bible  by  the  rules  of  common  sense. 

David  at  this  time  was  king  over  all  the  tribes 
and  was  at  peace,  and  settled,  and  prospered. 
But  God  told  him  that  “He  would  appoint  a 
place  for  my  'people  Israel , and  will  plant  them 


THE  THRONE  OF  DAVID. 


251 


that  they  may  dwell  in  a place  of  their  own  and 
move  no  more.”  This  promise  was  to  Israel.  If 
the  promises  of  the  multitudinous  seed  were  to 
be  fulfilled  to  Israel  then  it  would  be  necessary  to 
find  them  another  place,  for  Palestine  wouldn’ t 
hold  them.  So  God  has  planted  them.  God 
never  promised  to  find  the  Jews  another  country; 
Palestine  is  specially  reserved  for  them.  They 
have  been  without  country,  king  or  government. 
In  the  year  725  B.  C.  the  Jews  and  Israelites 
were  separated,  and  since  that  time  they  have 
never  been  united.  But  the  day  is  coming,  says 
the  prophet,  when  they  shall  dwell  together  and 
appoint  one  head  over  them.  The  Israelites  are 
only  to  return  to  Palestine  representively.  Jer. 
iii,  14. 

When  Nebuchadnezzar  carried  the  Jews  cap- 
tive, he  took  the  king  Zedekiah  with  him,  and 
destroyed  all  his  family,  and  all  the  real  royal 
seed  of  David.  Zedekiah  died  in  Babylon.  He 
placed  upon  the  throne  of  David,  Gedaliali. 
Now  Gedaliah  was  not  of  the  seed  royal ; but 
God  was  displeased  and  permitted  the  crown  to 
go  to  others.  Ezekiel  was  taken  captive  to 
Babylon  in  the  reign  of  Jelioiachin,  the  father 
of  Zedekiah.  The  prophecy  of  the  text  was 
written  in  Babylon,  and  refers  to  Zedekiah, 
whom  Ezekiel  calls  the  “wicked  Prince  of  Is- 
rael, whose  day  is  come,  iniquity  shall  have  an 
end.  Thus  saith  the  Lord  God,  remove  the  dia- 
dem and  take  off  the  crown,  this  shall  not  be  the 


252 


THE  THRONE  OF  DAVID. 


same  ; exalt  him  that  is  low,  and  abase  him  that 
is  high.  I will  overturn,  overturn,  overturn  it, 
and  it  shall  be  no  more  until  He  comes  whose 
right  it  is  ; and  I will  give  it  to  Him.” 

Now  all  this  is  plain  if  we  keep  in  mind  that 
Zedekiah  was  the  last  prince  of  the  house  of 
David  that  ever  reigned  in  Palestine.  God  re- 
moved the  diadem.  But  in  the  course  of  time  a 
lawful  heir  of  the  seed  of  David  shall  appear, 
and  the  throne  and  the  seed  will  be  established 
again  in  Jerusalem.  It  is  to  this  end  Providence 
is  overturning  Turkey  to  make  way  for  this  seed 
royal.  But  where  is  this  seed  royal  ? Answer  : 
It  is  on  the  English  throne.  .Listen  carefully  to 
the  following : 

Jeremiah  tells  us  that  with  him  he  had  the 
daughters  of  Zedekiah,  who  had  by  some  means 
escaped  the  destroying  edicts  of  Nebuchadnez- 
zar. Jer.  xliii.  6.  And  from  Jer.  xliv.  14,  we 
learn  that  they  visited  Egypt,  and  from  Jer. 
xliv.  28,  we  learn  that  a small  number  escaped. 
Now  Jeremiah  being  the  only  prophet  in  Judah 
at  that  time,  had  a right  to  take  charge  of  the 
royal  seed.  He  could  not  stay  in  Egypt,  nor  in 
Palestine,  nor  would  he  go  to  Babylon.  Where 
then,  did  the  prophet  go  ? He  no  doubt  took 
ship  with  the  Danites,  and  sailed  for  Cornwall, 
in  England,  for  this  place  called  Tarshisli.  We 
learn  from  Ezekiel  the  ship  of  Dan  traded  in  tin 
and  other  things.  History  and  tradition  both 
agree  that  there  landed  on  the  coast  of  Ireland 


THE  THRONE  OE  DAVID. 


253 


in  the  north,  a divine  man  and  a princess.  God 
had  promised  to  Jeremiah  his  life  wherever  he 
went.  “ But  thy  life  will  I give  thee  for  a prey 
in  all  places  whither  thou  goest.”  Jer.  xlv.  5. 

The  North  of  Ireland  had.  been  settled  with 
the  tribe  of  Dan  ; they  at  once  understood  who 
their  visitor  was.  They  called  him  Olam  Fodla, 
meaning  a divine  man  or  teacher.  The  princess 
was  called  Tea  Tephi,  the  beautiful  one  from  the 
East.  This  princess  was  married  to  Heremon, 
of  Ulster,  the  king  of  Lothair  Croffin,  for  such 
was  the  name  of  the  city  of  Tara.  This  word 
Tara  is  Arat  spelled  backward.  The  Hebrew 
read  from  right  to  left ; English,  left  to  right. 
Lothair  Croffin  was  changed  into  Tara  at  the 
time  of  the  wedding.  Tara  means  law.  Thus 


JACOB'S  STONE. 

began  the  seed  of  David  to  take  root,  and  from 
there  it  spread  over  all  Ireland,  then  to  Scot- 
land, thence  to  England,  and  Jacob’s  Stone  in 
Westminster  Abbey,  marks  the  journey  of 


254 


THE  THRONE  OF  DAVID. 


I 


David’ s throne,  and  has  always  kept  with  the 
seed,  and  they  have  been  always  crowned  on  it. 
Ezekiel’ s riddle  is  at  once  solved.  The  tender 
twigs  were  Zedekiah’s  daughters.  One  of  these 
twigs  was  planted  by  the  great  waters  in  a land 
of  traffic.  Our  Episcopalian  friends  intended 
by  their  beautiful  service  to  aid  the  members  of 
their  communion  to  read  in  order,  and  through 
the  bible  or  a given  portion  of  each  chapter  once 
per  year.  But  strange  to  say,  this  17th  chapter 
of  Ezekiel,  they  have  left  out  both  of  the  Old 
and  New  Lectionary.  It  is  itself  a riddle.  Why 
this  should  so  happen  that  the  only  two  chap- 
ters of  the  bible,  left  out  or  proscribed,  are  the 
17th  and  21st  of  Ezekiel ; surely  blindness  in 
part  has  happened  to  Israel,  and  what  we  es- 
teemed as  accidental  in  the  increased  light  of 
Revelation,  stands  to  view  as  the  ordered  pur- 
poses of  an  all-seeing  God. 

The  royal  standard  of  England  has  nine  lions 
on  it  and  a unicorn.  Let  any  one  set  this  stan- 
dard before  him  as  a map,  the  right  hand  will 
represent  east,  the  top  north,  left  west,  the 
bottom  south.  The  unicorn  comes  from  the 
east,  it  has  a chain  around  its-  neck.  So  the 
tribe  of  Benjamin  came  that  way,  and,  as  Nor- 
mans, were  finally  attached  to  the  throne.  The 
big  lion  comes  from  the  west,  so  it  did  from  Ire- 
land to  Scotland  and  London.  On  the  top  we 
have  a crown,  and  on  the  top  of  this  we  have  a 
lion.  On  the  first  quarter  are  three  lions,  second 


THE  THRONE  OF  DAVID.  255 

quarter  one,  on  the  third  a stringed  harp  with 
an  angel’ s head,  and  on  the  fourth  three  lions, 
the  total  of  lions  nine,  and  a * unicorn.  The  fact 
is  this  standard,  had  we  time,  teaches  a world  of 
history,  and  with  the  Psalmist  we  may  say : 
“Thou  hast  given  a banner  to  them  that  fear 
thee ; that  it  may  be  displayed  because  of  the 
truth.” — Ps.  ix,  14. f The  geneology  and  descent 
of  Queen  Victoria  from  Zedekiah  we  will  furnish 
you.  This  geneology  has  been  gotten  up  by  the 
faithful  and  very  persevering  labors  of  Rev.  F. 
R.  A.  Glover,  M.  A.,  and  Rev.  A.  B.  Grimaldi, 
M.  A.,  two  Episcopalian  clergymen  of  England. 
The  chart  is  supposed  to  be  as  near  perfect  as 
any  such  thing  can  be.  If  any  of  you  find  any 
defect  be  kind  enough  and  let  me  know.  In  the 
following  geneology  those  who  reigned  have  K 
prefixed — the  dates  after  private  names  refer  to 
their  birth  and  death,  those  after  sovereigns’ 
names  to  their  accession  and  death. 

ADAM  TO  VICTORIA. 


GENERATIONS. 

1.  Adam  (B.  C.  4000 — 3070),  Eve. 

2.  Seth  (B.  C.  3870—2978). 

3.  Enos  (B.  C.  3765—2860). 

4.  Cainan  (B.  C.  3675—2765). 

5.  Mahalaleel  (B.  C.  3605 — 2710). 

6.  Jared  (B.  C.  3540-2578). 

7.  Enoch  (B.  C.  3378—3013). 


* t See  illustration,  page  243. 


256 


THE  THRONE  OF  DAVID. 


GENERATIONS. 

8.  Methuselah  (B.  C.  3318 — 2344). 

9.  Lamech  (B.  C.  3126—2344). 

10.  Noah  (B.  C.  2944 — 2006),  Naamah. 

11.  Shem  (B.  C.  2442—2158). 

12.  Arphaxad  (B.  C.  2342 — 1904). 

13.  Salah  (B.  C.  2307—2126). 

14.  Heber  (2277— 2187). 

15.  Peleg  (B.  C.  2243—2004). 

16.  Reu  (B.  C.  2213—2026). 

17.  Serng  (B.  C.  2181—2049). 

18.  Nahor  (B.  C.  2052—2003). 

19.  Terah  (B.  C.  2122 — 2083),  Am  theta. 

20.  Abraham  (B.  C.  1992 — 1817),  Sarah. 

21.  Isaac  (B.  C.  1896 — 1716),  Rebekah. 

22.  Jacob  (B.  C.  1837—1690),  Leah. 

23.  Judah  (b.  B.  C.  1753),  Tamar. 

24.  Hezron. 

25.  Aram. 

26.  Aminadab. 

27.  Naashon. 

28.  Salmon. 

29.  Boaz  (B.  C.  1312),  Ruth. 

30.  Obed. 

31.  Jesse. 

KINGS  OF  ISRAEL. 

32.  K.  David  (B.  C.  1085 — 1015).  Batlisheba. 

33.  K.  Solomon  (B.  C.  1038 — 975)  Naamah. 

34.  K.  Rehoboam  (B.  C.  b.  1016,  d.  958), 
Maacah. 


THE  THRONE  OF  DAVID. 


257 


GENERATIONS. 

35.  K.  Abijam  (B.  C.  958—955). 

36.  K.  Asa  (B.  C.  955 — 914),  Azubah. 

37.  K.  Jehosliaphat  (B.  C.  914 — 889). 

38.  K.  Jelioram  (B.  C.  889 — 885),  Atlialiah. 

39.  K.  Ahazia  (B.  C.  906 — 884),  Zibiah. 

40.  K.  Joash  (B.  C.  885 — 839),  Jelioaddan. 

41.  K.  Amaziah  (B.  C.  b.  864;  d.  810),  Jecholiali. 

42.  K.  Uzziah  (B.  C.  b.  826,  d.  758),  Jerushali. 

43.  K.  Jotham  (B.  C.  b.  783,  d.  742). 

44.  K.  Ahaz  (B.  C.  b.  787,  d.  726),  Abi. 

45.  K.  Hezekiali  (B.  C.  b.  751,  d.  698)  Heph- 
zibah. 

46.  K.  Manasseli  (B.  C.  b.  710,  d.  643)  Meshul- 
lemeth. 

47.  K.  Amon  (B.  C.  b.  621,  d.  641),  .Tedidali. 

48.  K.  Josiali(B.  C.  b.  649,  d.  610),  Hamutah. 

49.  K.  Zedekiali  (B.  C.  578 — 599). 

KINGS  OF  IRELAND. 

50.  K.  Heremon  fl.  (B.  C.  580),  Q.  Tea  Teplii. 
She  was  Zedekiali’ s daughter.  Reigned  15  years. 

51.  K.  Irial  Faidh  (reigned  10  years). 

52.  K.  Eithriall  (reigned  20  years). 

53.  Follian. 

54.  K.  Tighernmas  (reigned  50  years). 

55.  Eanbotha. 

56.  Smiorgnil. 

57.  K.  Fiachadh  Labhriane  (reigned  24  years). 

58.  K.  Aongns  Ollmuchaidh  (reigned  27 
years). 


258 


THE  THRONE  OF  DAVID. 


GENERATIONS. 

59.  Maoin. 

60.  K.  Rotheachta  (reigned  25  years). 

61.  Dein. 

62.  K.  Siorna  Saoghalach  (reigned  21  years). 

63.  Oliolla  Olcliaoin. 

64.  K.  Giallchadh  (reigned  9 years). 

65.  K.  Aodhain  Glas  (reigned  20  years). 

66.  K.  Simeon  Breac  (reigned  6 years). 

67.  K.  Muireadacli  Bolgrach  (reigned  4 years). 

68.  K.  Fiachadh  Tolgrach  (reigned  7 years). 

69.  K.  Duach  Laidhrach  (reigned  10  years). 

70.  Eochaidh  Buaigllcry. 

71.  K.  Ugaine  More  the  Great  (reigned  30 
years). 

72.  K.  Cobhthach  Caolbreag  (reigned  30 
years). 

73.  Meilage. 

74.  K.  Jaran  Gleofathach  (reigned  7 years). 

75.  K.  Conla  Cruaidli  Cealgach  (reigned  4 
years). 

76.  K.  Oiliolla  Caisfhiaclach  (reigned  25 
years). 

77.  K.  Eochaidh  Foltleathan  (reigned  11 
years). 

78.  K.  Aongns  Tuirmheach  Teamharch  (reign- 
ed 30  years). 

79.  K.  Eana  Aighneach  (reigned  28  years). 

80.  Labhra  Luirc. 

81.  Blathuchta. 

82.  Easamhuin  Eamhna. 


259 


THE  THRONE  OE  DAVID. 


GENERATIONS. 

88.  Roighnein  Ruadh. 

84.  Finlogha. 

85.  Fian. 

86.  K.  Eodchaidh  Feidhlioch  (reigned  12 
years). 

87.  Fineamhnas. 

88.  K.  Lughaidh  Riadhdearg. 

89.  K.  Criomhthan  Niadhnar  (reigned  16 
years). 

90.  Fearaidhacli  Fion  Feachtnnigh. 

91.  K.  Fiachadh  Fionoluidh  (reigned  20 
years). 

92.  K.  Tnathal  Teachtmar  (reigned  30  years). 

93.  K.  Conn  Ceadchatliach  (reigned  20  years). 

94.  K.  Art  Aonfhir  (reigned  30  years). 

95.  K.  Corine  Usada  (reigned  40  years). 

96.  K.  Caibre  Liffeachair  (reigned  27  years). 

97.  K.  Fiacliadh  Sreabthnine  (reigned  30 
years). 

98.  K.  Muireadhach  Tireach(reigned  30  years). 

99.  K.  Eochaidh  Moigmeodliin  (reigned  7 
years). 

100.  K.  Niall  of  the  Nine  Hostages. 

101.  Eogan. 

102.  K.  Mnrireadhach. 

103.  Earca. 

KINGS  OF  ARGYLESHIRE. 

104.  K.  Feargus  More  Mac  Earca  (A.  D.  487). 

105.  K.  Dongard  (d.  457). 


260 


THE  THRONE  OE  DAVID. 


GENERATIONS. 

106.  K.  Conran  (cl.  535). 

107.  K.  Aidan  (d,  604). 

108.  K.  Eugene  IY.  (d.  622). 

109.  K.  Donald  IY.  (d.  650). 

110.  Dongard. 

111.  K.  Eugene  Y.  (d.  A.  D.  692). 

112.  Findan. 

113.  K.  Eugene  YII.  (d.  A.  D.  721),  Spondan. 

114.  K.  Etfinus  (d.  A.  D.  761),  Fergina. 

115.  K.  Achaius  (d.  A.  D.  819),  Fergusia 

116.  K.  Alpin  (d.  A.  D.  834). 

SOVEREIGNS  OF  SCOTLAND. 

117.  K.  Kenneth  II.  (d.  A.  D.  854). 

118.  K.  Constantin  II.  (d  A.  D.  774). 

119.  K.  Donald  YI.  (d.  A.  D.  903). 

120.  K.  Malcolm  I.  (d.  A.  D.  958). 

121.  K.  Kenneth  III.  (d.  A.  D.  994). 

122.  K.  Malcolm  II.  d.  (A.  D.  1083). 

123.  Beatrix  m.  Thane  Albanach. 

124.  K.  Dunkan  I.  (d.  A.  D.  1040). 

125.  K.  Malcolm  III.  Canmore  (A.  D.  1055 — 
1093),  Margaret  of  England. 

126.  K.  David  I.  (d.  A.  D.  1153),  Maud  of 
Northumberland. 

127.  Prince  Henry  (d.  A.  D.  1152),  Adama  of 
Surrey. 

128.  Earl  David  (d.  A.  D.  1219),  Maud  of 
Chester. 


THE  THRONE  OE  DAVID. 


261 


GENERATIONS. 

129.  Isobel  m.  Robert  Bruce  III. 

130.  Robert  Bruce  IY.  m,  Isobel  of  Gloucester. 

131.  Robert  Bruce  Y.  m.  Martha  of  Carrick. 

132.  K.  Robert  I.  Bruce  (A.  D.  1306 — 1329), 
Mary  of  Burke. 

133.  Margary  Bruce  m.  Walter  Stewart  (I.) 

134.  K,  Robert  II.  (d  A.  D.  1390),  Euphemia 
of  Ross  (d.  A.  D.  1^6). 

135.  K.  Robert  III.  (d.  A.  D.  1406),  Arabella 
Drummond  (d.  A.  D.  1401). 

136.  K.  James  I.  (A.  D.  1424—1437),  Joan 
Beaufort. 

137.  K.  James  II.  (d.  A.  D.  1360),  Margaret 
of  Gueldres  (d.  A.  D.  1463). 

138.  K.  James  III.  (d.  A.  D.  1488),  Margaret 
of  Denmark  (d.  A.  D.  1484). 

139.  K.  James  IY.  (d.  A.  D.  1543),  Margaret 
of-England  (d.  A.  D.  1539). 

140.  K.  James  Y.  (d.  A.  D.  1542),  Mary  of 
Lorraine  (d.  A.  D.  1560). 

141.  Q.  Mary  (d.  A.  D).  1587,  Lord  Henry 
Darnley. 

SOVEREIGNS  OF  GREAT  BRITAIN. 

142.  K.  James  YI.  and  I.  (A.  D.  1603 — 1625). 
Ann  of  Denmark. 

143.  Prince  Elizabeth  (1596—1613),  K.  Fred- 
erick of  Bohemia. 

144.  Princess  Sophia  m.  Duke  Ernest  of 
Brunswick. 


262 


THE  THRONE  OF  DAVID. 


GENERATIONS. 

145.  K.  George  I.  (1698 — 1727),  Sophia  Doro- 
thea Zelle  (1667—1726). 

146.  K.  George  II.  1727—1760),  Princess 
Caroline  of  Anspach  (1683 — 1737). 

147.  Prince  Frederick  of  Wales  (1707 — 1751), 
Princess  Augusta  of  Saxe-Gotha. 

148.  K.  George  III.  (1760—1820),  Princess 
Sophia  of  Mecklenburgh  Strelitz  (1744 — 1818). 

149.  Duke  Edward  of  Kent  (1767 — 1820), 
Princess  Victoria  of  Leiningen. 

150.  Q.  Victoria  (b.  1819,  cr.  1838),  Prince 
Albert  of  Saxe-Coburg. 

Thus  do  we  see  how  God  has  kept  His  word 
to  David,  and  with  this  view,  English  and 
American  history  are  at  once  understandable. 
The  future  is  assuring  and  grand.  God  will  as- 
suredly overturn  till  this  throne  once  more  is 
planted  in  Jerusalem. 


JEREMIAH  AND  ST.  PATRICK 


Discourse,  20. 


THE  PROPHET'S  COMMISSION — HIS  LIFE — THE 
TRIBES  IN  HIS  DAY — LANDING  OF  JEREMIAH 
IN  IRELAND — WHAT  IIE  BROUGHT  WITH  HIM — 
COLONIZATION  OF  IRELAND — JEREMIAH  THE 
FOUNDER  OF  THE  ANCIENT  IRISH  GOVERN- 
MENT AND  RELIGION — TEA  TEPHI  AND  IIERE- 
MON — THE  ANCIENT  IRISH  FLAG — THE  HARP 
AND  LION — SEASON  OF  IRELAND’S  HISTORI- 
CAL PRESTIGE — CAUSES  OF  HER  DECLINE — 
ST.  PATRICK  A BENJAMINITE — HOW  ROME  DE- 
STROYED JEREMIAH’S  MEMORY  AMONG  THE 
IRISH  — DESTRUCTION  OF  TARA  — ULSTER 
NEVER  CONQUERED — IRISH  INDEPENDENCE — 
ARK  OF  THE  COVENANT — RUINS  OF  TARA. 


Text— Jer.  1.  10. 

11  See , I have  this  day  set  thee  over  the  nations  and  over  the  king - 
domsy  to  root  out , and  to  pull  down , and  to  destroy,  and  to 
throw  downy  to  build,  and  to  plant  S 


fN  these  words  we  have  set  forth  the  Divine 
commission  given  to  the  prophet  Jeremiah. 
Never  before,  or  since,  was  such  a commission 
given  to  mortal  man.  It  is  not  that  Jeremiah 


264 


JEREMIAH  AND  ST.  PATRICK. 


is  constituted  a prophet  for  his  own  people,  or 
over  his  own  nation  and  country,  but  he  was 
divinely  appointed  and  set  over  the  nations  and 
kingdoms  of  the  earth,  with  an  authority  “to  root 
out,  pull  down,  destroy,  and  throw  down.” 
Surely  he  was  rightly  named,  for  the  word  Jere- 
miah means  the  exalted,  or  appointed  one  of  the 
Lord.  By  common  consent,  the  Jews  gave  him 
the  first  place  and  name  among  the  prophets. 
Up  to  the  time  of  the  Babylonian  captivity  he 
was  second,  Isaiah  being  first.  But  after  the 
captivity,  on  the  re-arrangement  of  the  holy 
canon,  his  name  was  put  first,  and  ever  after  he 
was  regarded  and  accepted  as  the  patron  saint 
of  Judea.  He  was  born  of  a priestly  family 
about  641  B.  C.,  in  the  priestly  town  of  Ana- 
thoth,  which  was  situated  a few  miles  north  of 
Jerusalem,  in  the  territory  of  Benjamin.  His 
work  and  commission  awaited,  because  they  an- 
tedated his  birth,  for  he  says,  chapter  i,  4., 
“ Then  the  word  of  the  Lord  came  unto  me,  say- 
ing, before  I formed  thee  in  the  belly  I knew 
thee  ; and  before  thou  earnest  forth  out  of  the 
womb  I sanctified  thee,  and  I ordained  thee  a 
prophet  unto  the  nations .”  Jeremiah’s  life’s 
work,  extent  and  devotion,  can  only  find  a par- 
allel in  the  majesty  and  compass  of  his  commis- 
sion. It  is  the  extent  of  this  commission  that  I 
wish  you  would  specially  notice,  for  it  is  neither 
tribal  nor  national  in  its  limitations.  He  was 
ordained  a prophet  unto  the  nations.  Hear  the 


JEREMIAH  AND  ST.  PATRICK. 


265 


voice  of  his  wailing,  chapter  xv.  10,  “Woe  is 
me,  my  mother,  that  thou  hast  borne  me  a man 
of  strife  and  a man  of  contention  to  the  whole 
earth'' 

Consistent  with  the  vastness  of  this  commis- 
sion is  the  recorded  fact  that  he  was  forbidden 
to  marry  in  his  own  land,  for  ‘ ‘ the  word  of  the 
Lord  came  untome,  saying,  Thou  shalt  not  take 
thee  a wife,  neither  shalt  thou  have  sons  and 
daughters  in  this  place.” — Jeremiahxvi.  2.  The 
claims  of  a wife  and  cares  of  a family  could  only 
have  been  harshly  fitted  on  to  such  a work  and 
commission.  Indeed,  every  peculiar  fact  in  the 
life  of  Jeremiah  may  be  best  accounted  for  by 
taking  into  consideration  the  greatness  of  his 
commission.  To  discard  this  is  simply  to  invite 
confusion,  and  yet,  strange  to  say,  many  prefer 
confusion  rather  than  admit  that  he  performed 
the  role  assigned  him  of  heaven.  For  this  very 
reason  writers,  even  Jewish  historians,  are  at  a 
loss  to  account  for  the  latter  half  of  the  pro- 
phet’s life.  They  do  not  seem  to  know  where 
he  spent  his  last  days  ; they  know  not  the  time, 
manner,  nor  place  of  his  death.  And  why,  you 
ask?  We  answer,  because  they  selfishly  and 
persistently  limited  his  life  and  labors  to  his 
own  land.  They  have  not  been  willing  to  allow 
that  he  was  set  as  a prophet  over  nations  and 
kingdoms.  Then  again,  they  have  been  willing 
to  allow  him  to  be  a puller  down  and  destroyer, 
but  not  a builder  and  planter.  To  grant  that  he 


266 


JEREMIAH  AND  ST.  PATRICK. 


was  a builder  and  planter,  would  have  obliged 
them  to  have  found  the  place  of  his  building 
and  the  objects  of  his  planting.  These  they  well 
knew  could  not  be  found  in  Palestine,  and  they 
were  as  loth  as  many  are  unwilling  to-day,  to 
permit  Jeremiah  to  leave  his  own  land.  A man 
who  would  be  equal  to  the  Bible  must  be  large- 
hearted,  generous  and  free,  not  fettered  and 
bound  by  the  errors  of  youthful  training,  the 
selfishness  of  sectarianism,  the  bigotry  of  ortho- 
doxy or  the  indifference  of  infidelity,  but  seek 
the  truth,  no  matter  from  whence,  or  what  it 
upsets  or  overturns  of  preconceived  ideas.  The 
command  is,  “Prove  all  things  and  hold  fast 
that  which  is  good.”  To  hear  some  people  talk 
and  lament,  you  would  think  that  the  command 
was : Prove  nothing,  but  hold  hard  on  to  all 
you  have  got. 

Try  now,  and  reasonably  and  patiently  follow 
me  while  I trace  the  wanderings  of  Jeremiah  to 
old  Ireland.  You  will  be  surprised  to  find  how 
intimate  Irishology  and  theology  are. 

Ireland  and  the  tribe  of  Dan  have  a peculiar 
history,  which  history  only  can  be  made  plain 
by  reference  to  the  Bible.  Ireland  has  had 
much  to  undergo,  yet  of  it  God  says,  “To  the 
island  He  will  repay — recompense ; so  shall 
they  fear  the  name  of  the  Lord  from  the  west.” 

Ireland’s  first  name  was  Scuite’s  Land,  or  the 
Island  of  the  Wanderers.  Her  second  name  was 
Scotia  Major,  and  Scotland  was  Scotia  Minor, 


JEREMIAH  AND  ST.  PATRICK. 


267 


and  England  was  Tarshish,  and  Dannoii  and 
Baratamac,  or  Land  of  Tin.  Yar  in-Eirin 
means  the  land  of  the  setting  snn.  Hibernia  is 
an  Hebrew  word,  and  means  from  beyond  the 
river  or  waters. 

Two  colonies  settled  Ireland  ; the  first,  the 
Phoenicians,  who  were  the  Philistines  or  ancient 
Canaanites.  The  second  settlers  were  the  Tuath 
de  Danan,  meaning  the  tribe  of  Dan.  The  words 
are  Hebrew,  yet  in  Irish.  For  further  informa- 
tion, let  any  one  read  Pinnock’s  Catechism  on 
Ireland.  The  Phoenicians  were  a sea- faring  peo- 
ple ; pressed  by  Israel,  Egypt  and  Assyria,  they 
finally  left  Canaan,  and  settled  Ireland.  We 
find  nine-tenths  of  Irish  historians  agreeing  on 
this.  Then,  the  monuments  teach  the  same — 
ancient  inscriptions,  one  of  which  written  was, 
“We  are  Canaanites  who  have  fled  from  Joshua, 
the  son  of  Nun,  the  robber.”  The  people  who 
show  tourists  the  seven  Churches  of  Grlenden- 
lough,  say  they  are  Hitites  and  Hivites.  Again, 
ruins  of  Baal  Temples,  Cromlechs,  Round  Tow- 
ers, go  to  confirm  the  same.  Customs — Baal 

fires,  on  May  eve,  in  Irish  Ninna-baal-tinne ; 
funeral  wakes,  or  cup  of  consolation,  forbidden 
to  Israel  when  they  sought  to  copy  after  the 
Philistines.  “Neither  shall  men  give  them  the 
cup  of  consolation  to  drink  for  father  or  mother.’  ’ 
— Jer.  xvi:7.  The  Irish  language  came  from  the 
Phoenician,  the  alphabet  of  both  being  composed 
of  sixteen  letters  originally,  the  only  alphabet 


268 


JEREMIAH  AND  ST.  PATRICK. 


in  the  world  so  agreeing.  From  the  Irish  came 
the  Gaelic,  Welsh,  Cornwall,  and  the  Manx 
from  them  all. 

The  second  settlement  of  Ireland  is  what  puz- 
zles historians  of  to-day — not  the  old  historians, 
for  they,  nine  out  of  ten,  admit  that  the  For- 
morians,  Firbolgs  and  Tuath  de  Danans,  were  one 
and  the  same  people.  They  were  a divine  folk. 
The  Tribe  of  Dan  was  a sea-faring  tribe,  trad- 
ing from  Tyre  to  Tarshish  for  tin,  and  so  became 
acquainted  with  the  British  Isles,  and  during 
Ahab’ s persecution  many  of  them  fled  ; so  of  the 
Simeonites  who  settled  Wales.  This  shows  us 
why  the  north  and  south  of  Ireland  should  be 
so  distinct  to  this  day  in  religion,  enterprise  and 
general  characteristics.  When  the  tribe  of  Dan 
finally  left  Palestine,  they,  with  the  other  nine 
tribes,  went  north,  settling  Denmark,  as  in  the 
north  of  Ireland,  leaving  their  names  on  rivers, 
hills,  cities  and  things. 

It  is  this  that  accounts  for  so  many  words  of 
an  Hebrew  orign  being  found  in  the  Irish  lan- 
guage. General  Valiancy  lias  compared  thou- 
sands, and  finds  them  thus  related  to  the  He- 
brew. Instance  : Jobhan-Moran,  Chief  Justice  ; 
Rectaire,  Judge ; Mur-Ollam,  School  of  the 
Prophets  ; Ollam-Folla,  Divine  Teacher  ; Mer- 
gech,  a Depository  ; Tara,  Law  ; Tephi,  Prince 
of  the  East ; Lia-Fail,  Stone  of  Destiny  ; Eben 
Gedoulah,  precious  stone. 

If  to  Irish  history  we  join  Bible  history,  all  is 


JEREMIAH  AND  ST.  PATRICK. 


269 


plain.  God  promised  David  repeatedly  that  he 
should  always  have  His  throne  and  on  it  his  seed. 
The  permanence  of  David’ s throne  makes  it  a 
fit  type  of  Christ’ s.  Now,  Jeremiah  took  charge 
of  Zedekiah’ s daughters  when  Nebuchadnezzar 
took  the  Jews  captive.  He  went  to  Egypt,  then 

escaped,  God  promising  to  keep  him  whitherso- 
ever he  went.  So  he  disappears.  No  account 
of  his  death  in  the  Bible.  He  had  charge  of  the 
ark  of  the  covenant,  royal  seed  and  Jacob’s  pil- 
low— the  stone  of  Israel.  Irish  histories,  some 
twenty  of  which  we  find  agree,  say  that  about 
585  B.  C.,  a divine  man  landed  in  Ulster,  having 
with  him  the  king’ s daughter,  stone  of  destiny, 
and  ark  and  many  other  wonderful  things.  The 
people  of  Ulster  of  Dan  understood  the  old  ad- 
venturer. Jeremiah  married  Teplii,  Zedekiah’ s 
daughter,  to  Eoiacaid,  who  agreed  to  abandon 
Baal  worship  and  build  a school  for  the  prophets. 
So  he  did.  He  then  assumed  the  title  of  Here- 
mon  of  Tara,  which  was  changed  from  Lothair 
Croffin  into  Tara.  From  Tephi  comes  our  God- 
dess of  Liberty,  on  old  coins,  sitting  on  a lion. 
Now,  at  Tara,  Jeremiah  buried  the  ark  of  the 
covenant,  tables  of  law,  etc.,  and  instituted  the 
nine-arch  degree  of  Masonry,  to  keep  in  mind 
its  hiding-place— so  all  may  understand  (Jer. 
iii.  16) : “And  it  shall  come  to  pass,  when  ye  be 
multiplied  and  increased  in  the  land,  in  those 
days,  saith  the  Lord  : they  shall  say  no  more 
the  ark  of  the  covenant  of  the  Lord  ; neither 


270  JEKEMIAH  AND  ST.  PATEtCK. 

shall  it  come  to  mind ; neither  shall  they  re- 
member it ; neither  shall  they  visit  it ; neither 
shall  that  be  done  any  more.”  This  means  that 
when  the  ark  is  found  the  ceremony  will  end  ; 
for  the  ark  has  to  be  found  and  go  before  the 
Jews  when  they  return  to  their  own  land.  Jere- 
miah was  the  first  Grand  Master.  He,  too,  is 
the  real  St.  Patrick — simply  the  Patriarchal 
Saint,  which  became  St.  Patriarch,  then  St. 
Patrick.  The  Roman  Church  introduced  St. 
Patrick  to  offset  the  St.  Patriarch. 

Jeremiah  well  knew  where  the  tribes  of  Israel 
were  in  his  day.  He  knew  that  Judah,  Levi  and 
Benjamin,  were  in  Babylon,  filling  in  the  seventy 
years  of  captivity,  and  the  small  remnant  that 
Nebuchadnezzar  left  of  them  in  Judah,  were 
scattered  hither  and  thither.  The  nine  tribes, 
or  Israel,  were  settled  in  Central  Asia ; and 
were  spreading  northward  and  westward.  This 
he  knew,  as  easily  as  Peter  did  centuries  after, 
when  he  wrote  his  epistle  to  the  brethren,  scat- 
tered abroad  in  Pontus,  Galatia,  Cappadocia 
and  Asia  ; or  as  James,  who  dedicated  his  epis- 
tle to  the  twelve  tribes  which  were  scattered 
abroad  ; or  as  the  Blessed  Master,  commissioned 
and  sent  His  disciples  after  the  lost  sheep  of  the 
house  of  Israel.  The  place  and  locality  of  the 
nine  tribes  were  known  to  the  Jewish  nation  in 
the  time  of  Josephus,  the  historian,  for  he 
speaks  of  them,  and  gives  a fraternal  letter 
which  the  house  of  Judah  sent  unto  the  house 


JEREMIAH  AND  ST.  PATRICK. 


271 


of  Israel.  You  are  to  keep  in  mind  that  it  is 
after  this  the  tribes  of  Israel  are  to  be  lost.  All 
prophecies  after  700  B.  C.,  up  to  this,  our  dajq 
and  till  about  1882,  A.  D.,  that  had  reference  to 
Israel,  plainly  mark  out  the  dwelling-place  of 
these  tribes,  and  yet  these  prophecies  not  be- 
ing understood,  till  these  latter  days,  Israel  was 
as  actually  lost  as  if  there  had  been  no  such 
prophecies.  These  prophecies  were  first  sent 
north,  then  west,  and  then  to  the  isles  of  the 
sea.  The  law  of  the  gospel  of  Jesus  would  be 
sent  to  these  tribes  ; till  then  the  “ isles  had  to 
wait  for  the  law.”  In  due  time  this  law  was 
carried  to  them  by  the  missionary  tribe  of  Ben- 
jamin. This  very  thing  and  time  the  prophet 
had  foretold,  for  he  says:  “Wherefore  glorify 
ye  the  Lord  by  the  urim  ; the  name  of  the  Lord 
God  of  Israel  in  the  islands  of  the  western  sea.” 
How  true,  indeed  “the  isles  saw  it,  and  feared.” 
Jeremiah  knew  that  the  tribe  of  Dan  were  a sea- 
faring people,  and  in  their  trading  they  had  be- 
come acquainted  with  northern  Europe  and  the 
British  Isles.  During  the  persecutions  of  Ahab 
thousands  of  them  had  left  Palestine,  settling 
Denmark — this  word  Denmark  means  the  circle 
of  Dan.  In  course  of  time  they  crossed  the  sea 
and  took  possession  of  the  north  of  Ireland, 
settling  the  province  of  Ulster.  The  tribe  of 
Simeon,  that  had  ever  cast  its  lot  with  Dan,  left 
Palestine  and  settled  Wales.  Read  the  pro- 
phetic benedictions  of  the  patriarch  Jacob,  in 


272 


JEREMTAH  AND  ST.  PATRICK. 


the  light  of  these  historical  facts,  and  they  will 
stand  out  in  sunlight  brightness.  “Dan  shall 
judge  his  people  as  one  of  the  tribes  of  Israel.'’ 
In  his  oneness , all  alone,  he  shall  go  out  first, 
mark  out  and  prepare  the  way  of  the  other 
tribes ; and  the  royal  seed,  the  ruling  power, 
shall  hide  itself  in  him.  “Dan  shall  be  a ser- 
pent by  the  way  ; an  adder  in  the  path  that 
biteth  the  horses’  heels  so  that  his  rider  shall 
fall  backward.”  Yes,  Dan  will  be  hid  among 
the  Gentiles.  He  will  bite  them,  sting  them, 
frustrating  their  purposes.  Then  exclaims  Ja- 
cob : “I  have  waited  for  thy  salvation,  oh 

Lord.”  Dan  did  wait,  until  the  prophet  Jere- 
miah landed  in  his  midst  with  Tea  TepM,  the 
daughter  of  Zedekiah,  the  royal  seed,  with  the 
ark  of  the  covenant,  the  tables  of  the  law,  the 
urim  and  thummim,  which  would  enable  Dan 
to  judge  his  people,  with  the  stone  of  Jacob, 
the  pillar  witness,  which  is  now  in  the  royal 
chair  in  Westminster  abbey  ; and  also  with  the 
standard  of  Judah.  Thus  the  prophet,  who  was 
the  rightful  custodian  of  all  these  things,  care- 
fully cared  for  the  same,  leaving  them  in  charge 
of  Dan.  All  but  the  stone  have  been  concealed 
till  the  latter  day.  For  on  this  stone  have  been 
crowned  all  the  Kings  and  Queens  of  David’s 
line. 

Now  just  here  we  must  take  up  history — espec- 
ially Irish  history — for  in  this  matter  and  at 
this  very  point,  you  will  find  profane  and  sacred 


JEREMIAH  AND  ST.  PATRICK. 


273 


histories  agreeing.  One  will  beautifully  explain 
the  other  ; nor  can  anybody  understand  Irish 
history  unless  they  get  the  key  from  sacred  hist- 
ory. To  take  this  key  later  writers  have  been  ^ 
unwilling,  and,  therefore,  they  have  been  unable 
to  solve  the  problem  embodied  in  this  race  and 
nation.  No  people  on  the  face  of  the  earth  have 
been  less  understood  and  more  misrepresented. 
The  real  allophyllians  of  Ireland,  that  is,  the 
first  native  settlers,  are  unknown.  The  present 
inhabitants  are  not  autochthonal,  no  more  than 
we  are  the  first  settlers  of  this  country.  On 
one  point  all  old  historians  are  agreed, 
namely,  that  Ireland  has  been  settled  by  two 
distinct  colonies  of  people  ; and  from  these 
two  colonies  come  the  present  Irish  race. 
These  two  colonies  were  distinct  in  features, 
manners,  customs,  enterprise  and  religion,  and 
after  all  these  centuries  have  passed  away  these 
differences  are  discernableinsome  degree,  espec- 
ially so  in  enterprise  and  religion.  And  though, 
of  course,  in  these  latter  years  they  have  become 
considerably  mixed,  yet  an  appeal  on  either 
of  these  points  will  mark  out  the  Danite  from 
the  Phoenician.  From  the  loud  boasting  of  the 
Phoenician  Irishman  in  Ireland,  when  speaking 
of  America,  you  would  think  that  he  would  pluck 
out  his  eyes  and  give’ them  for  a gift  if  need  be. 
Well,  a few  years  ago,  Chicago  was  bitterly 
scourged  with  a fire.  The  need  and  distress  thus 
caused  appealed  to  the  nations  of  the  earth  for 


274 


JEREMIAH  AND  ST.  PATRICK. 


help.  The  response  was  grand  and  glorious. 
Even  hateful  old  John  Bull  did  well.  But  what 
did  Ireland  do  ? Take  two  of  her  leading  cities 
as  an  example  ; one  in  the  north,  the  other  in  the 
south.  Belfast  in  the  north,  of  the  tribe  of  Dan  ; 
Dublin  in  the  south,  of  the  Phoenicians.  Belfast 
sent  $36,000  ; Dublin,  $2,000.  Why  this  differ- 
ence % We  answer,  forsooth,  the  people  of  Bel- 
fast are  Danites  ; they  of  Dublin  are  Phoenicians. 

The  Phoenicians,  or  Philistines,  were  the  anci- 
ent Canaanites.  They  took  early  possession  of 
Ireland.  On  this  point  the  old,  as  well  as  the 
new  historians,  generally  agree.  But  there  was 
another  early  settlement  in  the  north  of  Ireland, 
whom  the  historians  called  Tuath  de  Danan , 
which  simply  means  the  folks  of  the  tribe  of 
Dan.  They  introduced  into  the  Irish  language 
hundreds  of  Hebrew  words,  with  many  customs 
and  legends  of  the  Hebrews.  They  were  very 
distinct  in  their  enterprise  and  religion  from  the 
other  settlers.  About  the  year  580  B.  C.  there 
appeared  before  this  people  a strange  man, 
whom  the  historians  call  Ollam-Folla , which 
means  a divine  teacher  ; the  name  or  title  is  in 
Hebrew.  This  man,  whoever  he  was,  soon 
wielded  great  power  in  “their  midst.  What  he 
commanded  they  seemed  ready  to  do.  He  very 
soon  inaugurated  wonderful  reforms.  He  gave 
them  a parliament ; made  them  give  up  their 
idolatrous  customs.  He  founded  a college  to 
train  students  to  teach  and  preach  his  religion. 


JEREMIAH  AND  ST.  PATRICK. 


275 


It  was  called  Mur-Ollam,  school  of  the  divine. 
Here  again  the  name  is  Hebrew,  although  in 
Irish.  This  wonderful  man  had  with  him  a fair 
young  princess,  whose  name  in  Hebrew-Irish 
was  Tea  Tepid,  which  means  the  beautiful  one 
from  the  East.  This  lovely  princess  was  married 
to  the  governor  of  Ulster,  Heremon.  He  resided 
in  the  city  of  Lothair  Croffin.  In  the  agreement 
of  the  marriage,  among  many  things,  he  was  to 
accept  Iier  religion,  give  her  joint  authority,  and 
build  the  Mur-Ollam,  or  college,  and  sustain  it. 
Also  to  change  the  name  of  his  city  from  Lothair 
Croffin  to  Tara , which  means  law  ; to  adopt  her 
standard  or  banner  emblem,  the  harp  and  lion, 
and  to  be  crowned  on  the  wonderful  stone  called 
in  Irish-Hebrew  Lia-Fail , which  means  stone  of 
destiny,  sometimes  called  Eben  Gedoulah , the 
precious  stone.  From  this  Tea  Tephi  we  get  our 
female  goddess  of  liberty,  who  on  old  coins  is 
seated  upon  a lion  with  the  Davidian  harp  in  her 
hand. 

Our  text  tells  us  that  Jeremiah  was  to  plant 
and  build  up.  Here  he  planted,  and  here  he  did 
build.  He  planted  and  built  a throne,  a college 
and  a religion.  Turn  to  Ezekiel,  17th  chapter, 
and  read  the  famous  riddle.  Tea  Tephi  is  the 
tender  twig  that  was  cropped  off  from  the  high 
cedar,  King  Zedekiali,  and  planted  among  the 
merchants  by  great  waters  on  the  mountain  of 
Israel.  She  was  the  tender  one  that  was  to  take 
root  downward.  To  Jeremiah  the  Lord  said, 


276 


JEREMIAH  AND  ST.  PATRICK. 


“Verily  it  shall  be  well  with  thy  remnant.’’ 
Nay,  more,  He  told  him  that  He  would  give  him 
his  life  for  a prey  whithersoever  he  went.  And 
in  2d  Kings  xix.  30,  we  read  : “And  the  rem- 
nant that  is  escaped  of  the  house  of  Judah  shall 
yet  again  take  root  downward  and  bear  fruit  up- 
ward. For  out  of  Jerusalem  shall  go  forth  a 
remnant,  and  they  that  escape  out  of  Mount 
Zion  ; the  zeal  of  the  Lord  of  hosts  shall  do  this.” 
And  Ezekiel,  in  his  captivity,  sent  forth  a 
prophecy  referring  to  the  wicked  prince,  Zede- 
kiah,  saying  of  his  throne  in  the  name  of  Jeho- 
vah : “ I will  overturn,  overturn,  overturn  it, 
and  it  shall  be  no  more  until  he  comes  whose 
right  it  is,  and  I will  give  it  him.”  So  was  this 
throne  overturned,  and  was  never  after  estab- 
lished in  Jerusalem.  You  will  notice  that  there 
are  three  overturnings,  and  as  scriptural  lan- 
guage is  emphatic  and  not  superfluous  or  tauto- 
logical, these  overturnings  mean  something. 
Turn  to  history,  and  you  will  find  this  throne 
has  been  turned  over  just  three  times — first, 
from  Jerusalem  to  Ireland ; second,  through 
King  Fergus  to  Scotland,  and  third,  through 
King  James,  from  Scotland  to  England.  This 
throne  can  never  be  turned  over  again,  for  Jeru- 
salem will  be  incorporated  into  the  British  em- 
pire. The  throne  has  turned  over  till  it  got 
home  again  ; hence,  as  sure  as  we  live,  Palestine 
will  go  into  the  hands  of  England.  The  throne, 
religion  and  education  established  by  the  Pro- 


JEREMIAH  AND  ST.  PATRICK. 


277 


pliet,  have  ever  kept  together.  This  is  the  secret 
of  Ireland’s  prestige  and  marvelous  pre-eminence 
in  centuries  past.  The  college  of  Armach  could 
boast  of  7,000  students  at  a time.  Missionaries 
went  forth  from  Ireland  through  all  Europe, 
teaching  Christianity  and  founding  schools. 
Few  men  can  compare  to  Virgilus,  Erigina, 
Columbanus  and  Columba.  In  olden  times  she 
was  known  as  the  “Isle  of  the  Saints.”  The 
day  of  Ireland’s  weakness  and  distress  came  to 
her  when  she  permitted  her  religion  to  be  cor- 
rupted and  controlled  by  foreigners ; and  by 
these  same  Italian  intriguers  she  is  now  impov- 
erished and  enslaved.  But  for  this  the  throne 
might  have  remained  with  her  to-day,  and  Eng- 
land and  Scotland  have  been  under  her.  But 
when  a nation  loses  her  religion  she  loses  the 
right  arm  of  power,  and  the  ability  to  preserve 
freedom. 

Jeremiah  was  the  patron-saint  for  Ireland  for 
a long  time.  Simeon  the  Welsh  had,  and  have 
David  ; and  as  surely  as  the  Welsh  have  kept 
their  saint,  so  surely  ought  Ireland.  St.  Patrick 
is  looked  upon  by  many  as  a mythical  person. 
I believe,  however,  that  he  was  a veritable  man. 
The  best  authorities  make  out  that  he  was  born 
at  Bonavena,  in  ancient  Gaul,  near  what  is  now 
called  Bolougne,  some  time  about  387  A.  D. 
He  is  reported  as  having  died  March  17th,  465, 
in  the  county  Down.  His  father’s  name  was 
Calpurnius.  Young  Calpurnius,  or  St.  Patrick, 


278 


JEREMIAH  AND  ST.  PATRICK. 


as  lie  was  afterward  called,  had  a hard  life  of  it 
in  youth.  I believe  him  to  have  been  a Ben- 
jaminite,  a Christian  ; for  the  Benjaminites  be- 
gan to  fill  in  that  part  of  France  about  that 
period.  This  tribe  were  by  nature  missionaries. 
This  prompted  him  to  desire  to  redeem  his 
brethren  in  Ireland.  In  Ulster  he  began  his 
labors.  From  this  same  tribe  others  had  visited 
Ireland.  History  mentions  four  who  preceded 
St.  Patrick.  The  name  of  St.  Paul,  by  many, 
is  connected  with  a visit  to  Ireland.  It  is  very 
easy  to  see  how  Jeremiah,  the  patron- saint  of 
Judah,  would  be  installed  in  such  a relation 
with  the  Danites  after  his  death.  He  was  the 
real  sainted  patriarch  of  Ireland.  And  by  a 
crafty  design  of  Rome  young  Calpurnius  was 
created  sainted  patriarch,  or  St.  Patrick,  and  by 
this  means  Rome  linked  the  greater  part  of  the 
Irish  nation  on  to  herself.  Anybody  honest  and 
familiar  with  history,  knows  that  St.  Patrick 
was  a Christian,  and  in  no  sense  of  the  word  a 
Roman  Catholic.  The  fact  is,  Rome  began  early 
to  covet  Ireland.  Once  they  got  possession,  it 
was  necessary  for  them  to  destroy  the  influence 
of  Jeremiah.  This  they  did,  in  part,  by  substitut- 
ing the  name  of  St.  Patrick  in  the  place  of  the 
prophet’s  ; and  more,  they  then  set  to  work  to 
destroy  even  the  old  and  famous  capital  city  of 
Tara.  In  565  St.  Ruadham,  along  with  a posse 
of  bishops  and  chiefs  of  the  south  of  Ireland, 
cursed  the  city,  so  that  neither  King  nor  Queen 


JEREMIAH  AND  ST.  PATRICK. 


27!) 


might  ever  rule  or  reign  therein  again.  They 
forced  the  government,  monarchy  and  people,  to 
abandon  the  place.  Prom  thence  Tara  was 
deserted,  and  the  harp  sounded  no  more  through 
Tara’s  halls.  The  city  thus  cursed  crumbled  to 
ruins,  and  remains  to  this  day  buried,  awaiting 
a glorious  resurrection.  Rome  caught  her  prize 
at  last ; but  neither  Rome  nor  any  other  power 
ever  enslaved  or  conquered  Ulster.  Beyond  the 
pale — that  is,  the  dividing  line,  running  from  the 
Boyne  to  the  Shannon — Rome  never  got,  nor 
never  will.  Irishmen  clamor  for  independence, 
to  be  free  from  England,  and  wonder  why  they 
are  not.  The  reason  is  that  God  cannot  trust 
liberty  to  them  ; for  a people  that  yoke  them- 
selves to  a foreigner,  and  give  themselves  over  to 
be  governed  in  spiritual  matters,  would  make  a 
poor  effort  if  trusted  with  their  temporal  gov- 
ernment. We  all  know  that  if  Ireland  had  been 
free  she  would  not  long  have  remained  so,  for 
body,  as  well  as  soul,  she  would  have  committed 
to  the  Italians.  Why  Irish  Catholics  should  ask 
for  freedom  when  they  so  voluntarily  bind  them- 
selves to  a foreigner,  I fail  to  see.  As  the  Prot- 
estants of  the  north  have  asked,  and  had 
granted,  spiritual  freedom  in  the  severance  of 
church  and  state,  so  let  the  men  of  the  south 
ask  and  demand,  and  stop  not  short  of  free- 
dom from  Rome.  A free  religion  is  the  parent 
of  a free  state,  and  a free  state  of  free  school. 
A people  who  are  not  wise  enough  to  take  care 


280 


JEREMIAH  AND  ST.  PATRICK. 


of  their  own  religion,  are  very  poorly  prepared 
to  be  the  guardians  of  liberties.  My  belief  is 
that  Ireland  ought  to  be  free.  She  ought  to 
be  an  independent  province,  with  responsible 
government,  as  other  English  provinces.  And 
once  she  becomes  free  religiously,  it  will  not 
be  long  before  she  will  be  free  politically. 
Substitute  Jeremiah  for  St.  Patrick,  and  the  Lord 
Jesus  for  the  pope,  then  the  day  of  freedom  will 
not  long  tarry. 


A NEW  AND  REVISED  CATALOGUE  OF  WORKS 


ON  THE  IDENTIFICATION  OF  THE 

ANGLO-SAXONS 

WITH  THE 

Lost  Ten  Tribes  of  Israel, 

ALSO, 

WORK?  ON  THE  QREAT  PYRAMID, 

AND 

MISCELLANEOUS  BOOKS  AND  TRACTS, 

PUBLISHED  AND  FOR  SALE  BY  # 

JAMES  HUGGINS , No.  372  Pearl  Street , New  York. 


WORKS  BY  EDWARD  HINE. 

Forty-Seven  Identifications  of  tlie  Anglo-Saxons,  with  the  Lost 
Ten  Tribes  of  Israel,  founded  upon  500  Scripture  proofs.  By  Edward 
Hine.  20c. 

Flashes  of  Light.  Part  second  of  Forty-seven  Identifications  of  the 
Anglo-Saxons  with  the  Lost  House  of  Israel,  giving  Three  Chapters  on 
Weights  and  Measures.  20c. 

Oxford  Wrong.  Part  third  of  Identifications,  and  Edward  Hine’s  re- 
ply to  Canon  Rawlinson,  showing  that  the  Anglo-Saxons  entirely  agree 
with  the  Bible  accounts  of  Lost  Israel,  in  Language,  Physical  Type, 
Religious  Opinions,  Manners,  Customs,  etc.  15c. 

England’s  Coining  Glories.  Fourth  part  of  the  Identifications  of 
the  Anglo-Saxons  with  Lost  Israel,  containing  the  Glory  of  the  Great 
Pyramid.  By  Prof.  C.  Piazzi  Smyth,  F.  R.  S.  S.  By  Edward  Hine.  20c. 

Anglo-Saxon  Riddle,  or  the  Riddle  of  our  Israelitish  Origin.  Present 
Grandeur  and  Future  Greatness ; also  its  Solution.  By  Edward  Hine,  7c. 

Or  the  FIVE  PAMPHLETS  bound  in  ONE  VOLUME,  $1.25;  gilt,  $1.75. 

Cui  Bono  } or  the  Political,  Social,  and  Religious  Uses  of  the  Identifica- 
tions of  Anglo-Saxons,  with  Israel.  By  Edward  Hine.  20c. 


PERIODICALS. 

Lite  From  the  Dead.  By  Edward  Hine.  Monthly  parts,  15c.  $1.50 
per  year.  Vols.  1 to  5,  cloth,  $1.75;  gilt  edges,  $2.00  each. 

The  Nation’s  Glory  Leader*  By  Edward  Hine.  Weekly,  $2.50  per 
year;  quarterly  parts,  50c.  Vols.  1 to  6,  $1.  50,  cloth ; gilt,  $1.75  each. 

The  Banner  of  Israel*  By  Philo-Israel.  Weekly,  $2.50  per  year; 
Monthly  parts,  $2.25  per  year. 

The  Standard  of  Israel.  By  Grimaldi.  Per  year,  $1.50;  Monthly,  20c. 

‘♦Our  Best,”  By  Thos.  Wilson,  $1.00  per  year.  Subscribers  by  mail, 
$1.25  per  year.  Bound  Vols.  of  “Our  Rest,”  for  1878  and  1879,  price  $1.75 
per  Vol. 

WORKS  BY  VARIOUS  WRITERS. 

The  Lost  Teh  Tribes,  and  1882*  By  Rev.  Joseph  Wild,  I).  D. 
Price  $1.00 ; post,  $1.20. 

Manasseli  and  the  United  States.  An  Essay  delivered  by  the 
Rev.  Joseph  Wild,  D.  D.,  in  the  Union  Congregational  Church,  Brook- 
lyn, N.  Y.  New  Edition,  with  engraving  of  Great  Seal  of  U.  S.  Price, 
post  paid,  6c. 

A Resume  of  the  Scriptural  Argument,  Proving  the  Identity 
of  the  Anglo-Saxon  Race  with  the  Lost  Ten  Tribes.  By  Philo-Israel,  5c. 

Hine’s  Leaflets*  Nos.  1,  2 and  3,  per  100,  50c. 

Anglo-Israel  Leaflets.  1,  2 and  3 ; per  100,  50c. 

Bristol  Leaflets  on  the  Identification*  lto4;  per  100,  50c. 

Arc  the  English  People  the  Ten  Lost  Tribes  } By  Philo- 
Israel.  15c.  * 

The  Clifton  Chronicle,  Letters  with  Introduction.  Objections 
raised  by  Opponents,  and  Replies  Thereto.  By  Philo-Israel.  15c. 

The  History  of  the  House  of  Israel.  How  they  were  Lost  and 
How  they  were  Found.  By  Philo-Israel.  25c. 

Israel  in  Britain.  By  C.  M.  and  Philo-Israel.  15c. 

The  New  Old  Story.  By  Philo-Israel ; for  children ; cloth,  25c. 

Beanlah,  or  Eden  Restored.  In  parts ; 20c.  each ; set  of  eight  maps  to 
illustrate  Beaulah.  65c. 

Shear  jashub,  or  Britain’s  Coming  Ordeal.  By  Watchman.  65c. 

Anglo-1  srael.  A reply  to  the  Rev.  Prof.  Campbell.  By  Wm,  Grieg, 
Montreal.  25c. 

The  lsraelitish  Origin  of  the  Anglo-Saxons*  By  T.  C. 

Balmer.  $2.50. 

The  Bestiny  of  Russia  and  Future  Movements.  With 

colored  map  of  Europe  and  Asia.  Cloth ; price  75c.,  post-paid. 

Light  Colored  Maps.  By  G.  D.  Wilson.  In  which  are  exhibited  the 
positions  of  the  Tribes  upon  their  return  to  Palestine.  The  boundaries 
of  the  land,  giving  a map  of  what  they  were,  and  what  they  are  to  be, 
the  physical  changes  made,  and  to  be  made,  the  site  and  tha.  plan  of  the 
future  Temple,  etc.  75c. 


Our  Israelitisli  Origin.  By  John  Wilson.  $2.00.  New  and  en- 
larged edition.  $3.00. 

Title-Deeds  of  tlie  Holy  Land.  By  John  Wilson.  $2.00. 

Tlie  Mission  of  Elijah.  By  John  Wilson.  $2.00. 

The  Covenant ; or,  Jacob’s  Heritage.  By  F.  C.  Danvers,  Bound,  $2.00. 

Israel  Discovered  in  tlie  Anglo-Saxons  and  other  Kin- 
dred Protestant  Nations.  By  Rev.  H.  Newton,  B.  A.  20c. 
Cloth,  50c. 

Israel ; or,  The  Ten  Tribes  Identified  with  the  Anglo-Saxons  and  other 
Branches  of  the  Teutonic  Race.  By  Rev.  F.  A.  R.  Glover,  M.  A.  35c. 

The  Anglo-Israel  Post  Dag ; or,  “ How  Arthur  Came  to  see  it.” 
By  Bishop  Titcomb.  New  edition.  60c. 

Is  it  not  Reasonable  ? A Dialogue  on  the  Anglo-Israel  Controversy. 
By  Bishop  Titcomb.  10c. 

Links  in  the  Chain  of  Evidence.  By  J.  Leyland  Fielden.  80c.; 
gilt  edges,  $1.00. 

The  Israelites  found  in  tlie  Anglo-Saxons.  The  Ten  Tribes 
traced  from  the  lands  of  their  captivity  to  their  occupation  of  the  Isles 
of  the  Sea.  By  William  Carpenter.  80c.;  gilt  edges,  $1.25. 

Diblical  Testimony  of  the  Present  and  Future  of  Israel. 
By  the  Rev.  J.  G.  Tipper,  M.  A.  3c.;  per  100,  $2.00. 

Eost  Israel.  Where  are  they  to  be  found  ? An  inquiry.  By  H.  L.  20c. 

Scripture  Guide,  in  a Search  after  the  Ten  Tribes ; or,  the 
Whole  House  of  Israel.  By  M.  M.  M.  10c. 

Pamphlet  on  the  Apocalypse.  By  T.  W.  Greenwell.  35c. 

Queen  Victoria’s  Royal  Descent  from  King  David  the 
Psalmist.  New  edition,  revised  and  corrected.  By  .the  Rev.  A.  B. 
Grimaldi,  A.  M.  3c.;  per  100,  $2.00. 

WORKS  ON  THE  GREAT  PYRAMID. 

The  Pillar  of  Witness.  A Scriptural  View  of  the  Great  Pyramid.  65c. 

Philitis  ; or,  Solution  of  the  Mystery  which  for  four  thousand  years  has 
shrouded  the  Great  Pyramid  in  Egypt.  By  Charles  Casey.  75c. 

Our  Inheritance  in  the  Great  Pyramid.  New  edition.  By 
Piazzi  Smyth,  Astronomer-Royal  for  Scotland.  $5.00. 

Eife  and  Work  at  the  Great  Pyramid  in  1S65.  Illustrated 
by  36  fine  plates.  $17.00.  By  Piazzi  Smyth,  Astronomer-Royal,  of 
Scotland. 

The  Great  Pyramid.  By  Philo-Israel.  15c. 

Miracle  in  Stone  ; or,  The  Great  Pyramid.  By  Joseph  A.  Seiss,  D. 
D.  $1.25. 

A Supplement  to  the  Miracle  in  Stone.  This  is  an  invaluable 
addition  to  the  previous  work.  By  Dr.  Seiss.  30c. 

The  Scientific  and  Religions  Discoveries  of  the  Great 
Pyramid.  By  W.  H.  Wilson.  25c. 


The  Death,  Resurrection  and  Ascension  of  the  Wit- 
nesses Prophesying  in  Sackcloth.  By.  T.  W.  Greenwell, 
Esq.  40c. 

Prophetic  Thoughts.  By  B.  W.  Tracy.  12c. 

The  Pyramid  and  the  Bible*  By  a Clergyman.  $1.00. 

Papers  on  the  Great  Pyramid.  By  John  Vincent.  $1.25. 

Facts  and  Bates*  By  Alex.  MacKay.  Second  edition.  $1.25. 

ANGLO-ISRAEL  MUSIC. 

Return  of  Israel  to  Palestine.  An  Anthem.  By  J.  W.  M. 

Young.  50c. 

Kohler’s  Musical  Star.  Parts.  35c. 

Israel  in  England*  Song  of  Myriam.  50c. 

Eastward  Ho  ! Words  and  Music.  By  Myriam.  25c. 

Israel’s  Jubilee  ; or  1882.  Cloth,  50c.;  gilt,  75c. 

The  National  March  into  India  and  up  to  Zion.  By 

Myriam.  35c. 

New  Israelitish  Anthem.  By  Thackway.  Inscribed  to  Edward 
Hine.  65c. 

BOOKS  AND  TRACTS. 

The  Atonement.  By  G.  W.  Samson,  D.  D.  Bound,  $1.00. 

Baptist  Succession.  A Historical  Discourse.  By  G.  W.  Samson, 
D.  D.  20c. 

How  to  Use  the  Bible*  By  J.  H.  Brooks.  46  pages.  15c.  An  ex- 
cellent tract  for  circulation  in  these  days  of  skepticism. 

The  First  New  Testament  Church.  Is  just  the  thing  to  put  into 
the  hands  of  young  converts.  It  is  wholly  Scriptural,  and  in  a small 
space  gives  the  Church  Order,  according  to  the  New  Testament.  On 
fine  paper,  75c.  per  100.  Plain,  50c. 

Only  Believe.  The  design  of  this  tract  is  to  turn  the  inquirer’s 
thoughts  from  his  “FEELING”  to  faith  in  Christ,  and  give  him  rest,  in 
the  Word.  75c.  per  100.  Plain,  50c. 

Workers  and  Drones.  Is  for  both  young  converts  and  old.  It  sets 
forth  the  responsibilities  of  Church  membership,  which  are  too  little 
considered  by  those  entering  our  Churches  to-day.  75c.  per  100. 
Plain,  50c. 

Three  - Button  Gloves  and  Tobacco.  By  Latimer  Ridley. 

60c.  per  100. 

THE  TRADE  SUPPLIED  AT  A DISCOUNT. 

This  catalogue  will  be  revised  and  enlarged  as  the  new  Books  and 
Pamphlets  are  published.  All  other  works  will  be  obtained  at  the  earliest 
possible  moment, ,by  addressing  a postal  card  to 

JAMES  HUGGINS,  Printer  and  Publisher, 

372  Pearl  Street,  New  York* 


/ 


